HAITDBOOK OF PALI. 
 
 AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR, 
 A CHRESTOMATHY, AND A GLOSSARY. 
 
 COMPILE]) BY 
 
 0. FRANKFURTER, Ph.D. 
 
 WILLIAMS AND NORGATE, 
 
 11, HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON; 
 
 AND 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH. 
 
 1883,
 
 HERTFORD: 
 
 PRINTED BY STKPUKN AUSTIM AND SONS.
 
 TO THE RETEEEND 
 
 RICHARD MORRIS, LL.D., M.A., 
 
 TICE-PEESIDENT OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, 
 
 AS A TOKElf 
 
 OF FRIENDSHIP AND RESPECT. 
 
 20(:.4667
 
 PUBLISHED Jbi WILLIAMS Sf N ORG ATE. 
 
 Cloth, gilt. Price 18a\ 
 
 Buddha; His Life, His Doctrine, His Order. By 
 
 Dr. Hekmajtn' Oidexbeeg, Professor at the University of 
 Berlin, Editor of the Vinaya Pitakam and the Dipavamsa in 
 Pali. Translated from the German by "Wixliam Hoey, M.A., 
 D.LiT., Member of the Eoyal Asiatic Society, Asiatic Society 
 of Bengal, etc., of Her Majesty's Civil Service. 
 
 8vo. cloth. Price 21*. 
 
 A Manual of Buddhism in its Modern Development ; 
 
 translated from Singhalese MSS. By B. Spexce Hakdy, 
 M.E.A.S., Author of "Eastern Monachism." Second Edition, 
 "with a complete Index by Dr. 0. FEAifKriJETEE. 
 
 By the same Author. 8vo. cloth. Price 12.?. 
 
 Eastern Monachism ; an Account of the Origin, Laws, 
 
 Discipline, Sacred "Writings, Mysterious Bites, Beligious Cere- 
 monies, and Present Circumstances of the Order of Mendicants 
 founded I'Y *jrotama Buddha (compiled from Singhalese MSS. 
 and other (;;iginal Sources of Information). "With Compara- 
 tive Kotices of the "Usages and Institutions of the "Western 
 Ascetics, and a Beview of the Monastic System. 
 
 Bvo. cloth. Price 10s. M. 
 
 Ehys Davids' Buddhism ; Lectures on the Origin and 
 
 Growth of BeKgion, as illustrated by some points in the 
 History of Indian Buddhism. By T. W. Rhts Davids, Esq. 
 Being the Hibbert Lectures 1881. 
 
 WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London; 
 and 20, South Frederick Street, Edinburgh.
 
 PUBLISHED BY WILLIAMS Sf N ORG ATE. 
 
 BOOKS IN PALI. 
 
 BUDDHIST SCEIPTURES IN PALI. 
 
 In 5 vols. 8vo. Price 21s. each vol. 
 
 The Vinaya Pitakam, one of the principal Buddhist 
 Holy Scriptures in the Pali Language. Edited by Dr. H. 
 Oldexbeeg. Yol. I. The !Mahavagga, with an Introduction. — 
 Yol. II. The Cullavagga.— Yol. III. The Suttavibhanga, I. 
 (Parajika, Samghadisesa, Anyata, Nissaggiya). — Yol. lY. The 
 Suttavibhanga, II. End of Mahavibhanga, Bhikkhunivi- 
 bhanga. — Yol. Y. The Parivara. Published with the assist- 
 ance of the Royal Academy of Berlin, and of the Secretary of 
 India in Council. 
 
 8vo. cloth. Price 21s. 
 
 The Dipavamsa, an Ancient Buddhist Historical Re- 
 cord in the Pali Langiiage. Edited, with an English Transla- 
 tion, by Dr. H. Oldexberg. 
 
 The Dipavamsa is the most ancient historical work of the Ceylonese ; it con- 
 tains an account of the ecclesiastical history of the Buddhist Church, of the 
 conversion of the Ceylonese to the Buddhist faith, and of the ancient history 
 of Ceylon. 
 
 8vo. Price 21s. 
 
 The Milinda Pailho. Being Dialogues between King 
 Milinda and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena. The Pfili Text 
 edited by Y. Trenckner, of Copenhagen, 
 
 " A very interesting dialogue between Milinda and Xagasena." — Max MuUer 
 in Chips I. 
 
 " Next in order of interest should undoubtedly bo named the ' Milinda I'aiiha; 
 or, Questions of Menander.' Whatever be the origin of this remarkable work, 
 there can be no doubt of its great antiquity, for it exhibits a familiarity with 
 Greek names and places, and records a religious discussion between the Buddhist 
 divine Nagasena and a ' Yona ' king Milinda, who can be identified with cer- 
 tainty with the Bactrian king Menander." — Childers in Pull Dictionary. 
 
 Also Svo. Price 4s. 
 
 Pali Miscellany, by V. Trenckner. Part I. The Intro- 
 ductory Part of the Milinda PaFilio, an English Translation 
 and Notes. 
 
 WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London ; 
 and 20, South Frederick Street, Ediubur":h.
 
 HANDBOOK OF PALI.
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The Handbook of Pali whicli I place before my readers 
 consists of three parts, an Elementary Grammar, a Cbresto- 
 mathy, and a Glossary. 
 
 I have called the grammar an elementary one, because no 
 attempt has been made to distinguish the different periods 
 in the development of the language. To write a scientific 
 grammar of Pali, it would be necessary not only to have 
 recourse to the different so-called ancient Prakritic dialects, 
 but also to the modern Aryan languages of India, more 
 especially Mahrathi. I believe Mahrathi to be, if not the 
 daughter of Piili, at least more closely allied to it than 
 any other of the Indian vernacular tongues ; and among 
 these I include also Sinhalese. In fact, a scientific Pali 
 grammar can, in my opinion, only be written as part of a 
 comparative grammar of the Aryan languages of India. 
 
 I have called this work a Handbook of Piili. This requires 
 some explanation. I am well aware that Professor Forch- 
 hammer, in his report of the Rangoon High School, 1879- 
 1880, has shewn conclusively, as did the late Professor 
 Childers before him, that Pali means only Sacred Texts. 
 Professor Forchhammer, quoting from Burmese books, says : 
 " The Tipitaka Pali was written by means of the Magadha- 
 bhasha ; " and again, " The Pali of the Tipitaka may be 
 preached by means of any language." He goes on to 
 remark that "a Pali grammar and a Pali dictionary must
 
 X TREFACE. 
 
 appear to the Burmans as an ineompreliensible misnomer, 
 or at best what to us would be a Bible dictionary or a 
 grammar of the New Testament." I believe the examples 
 are not very well chosen. In a grammar of the New Testa- 
 ment we expect to find the New Testament Greek. A 
 Bible dictionary would mean a cyclopaedia, in which one 
 can find information on any Bible subject. 
 
 I could have chosen "Handbook of MagadhI" as a title 
 of the book ; but this would imply more than is actually 
 given in the book. Under such a title one would expect 
 to find a grammar of the Magadhese Inscriptions and of 
 the MagadhI of the drama. Moreover, in calling it a 
 Handbook of MagadhI, I should have committed myself to 
 a definite statement about the country in which the language 
 of the Buddhist Scriptures was spoken. Pali means for 
 European scholars the sacred language of the Buddhist 
 Scriptures, and as a matter of convenience this designation 
 ought to be kept until conclusive proofs are adduced 
 to shew in which part of India this Prakrit dialect was 
 spoken. We have moreover the excellent authority of 
 Subhiiti, who calls his Abhidhdnappadljjikd a Pali dictionary, 
 and his Ndmamdid a work on Pali grammar. 
 
 As a reading-book I have chosen the Paritta. The text 
 is based on a MS. in the British Museum (Or. 1092), written 
 in Sinhalese characters. Besides this I had several printed 
 Burmese copies, and one printed Sinhalese copy of the book. 
 They however var)^ in the selection they give. None 
 contains all the extracts given in the reading-book. Part 
 of the Paritta has, as is well known, been published by the 
 late Professor Childers, and by the late M. Grimblot, with 
 notes and translations by M. Leon Feer. Some of the 
 suttas which in the " Extraits du Paritta " are given as
 
 PREFACE. xi 
 
 belonging to the Sutta Nipata occur also in the Samyutta 
 Nikaya. The two suttas of the Digha Nikaya were pub- 
 lished by the late M. Grimblot in the " Sept Suttas Palis." 
 I have consulted the MSS. of the individual Nikaj'as in 
 constituting the text. The translation of the Sutta Nipiita 
 given by Professor Pausboll in the "Sacred Books of the 
 East " was of great service to me in deciding on the merits 
 of the various readings. I have not seen the " Ceylon 
 Friend," in which the late Pev. D. Gogerly has translated 
 most if not all the suttas belonging to the Paritta. I shall 
 take an early opportunity of giving a more elaborate account 
 of the comj)ilation of the book and the diflferent versions 
 which we have of it. 
 
 The other extracts given are "A Collection of Kamma- 
 vacas." If the Paritta was intended to represent the style 
 of the Sutta Pitaka, these may be taken as a fairly good 
 specimen of the Yinaya Pitaka. I also reserve for a later 
 occasion any mention of the relation of the Kammavacas 
 to the Yinaya Pitaka, viz. if they stand in the same rela- 
 tion to the Mahavagga and Cullavagga as the Patimokkha 
 stands to the Sutta Yibhahga. The text of the Kam- 
 mavaciis is based on MSS. belonging to the Bodleian 
 Library (Piili 1 and 2). They are written in the square 
 character, and represent the usual Burmese orthograph3% 
 A distinction between linguals and dentals is seldom made, 
 nor do they write anusvdra after i and «. For several 
 chapters I have consulted other MSS. in the British 
 Museum, and some belonging to the Liverpool Free Library. 
 They present the same texts, and are also written in the 
 square painted character. Whilst examining the Liverpool 
 MSS., in company with Professor Rhys Davids, to whom 
 they had been sent by Sir James Allanson Picton for
 
 xii PREFACE. 
 
 identification and report, we found that one of tliera (No. 
 L 24091) was of especial value, as it contained a few extra 
 Kammavacas not appearing in the usual text which I have 
 given in the Chrestomathy. Professor Spiegel and Mr. 
 Dickson have published part of the text (see Bibliography). 
 
 The third part contains the Glossary. I have omitted 
 in it all proper names. In eraploj'iug two sorts of type 
 and hyphens I have tried to distinguish between compound 
 words and simple ones. Compound words ought all to have 
 been given under their last member, as is done in Benfey's 
 Sanskrit Dictionary. This is the only scientific way. The 
 last member in the Indo-European languages is explained 
 by the preceding ones, or as the late Professor Benfey put it 
 in his lectures, " the defining members always precede 
 the defined." But as all the second members did not 
 occur in the glossary, I had to give up this plan, and to limit 
 mj'self to using italics for compound words. I employ 
 capitals, however, for compound words when the individual 
 meaning of the component parts is another than that of the 
 whole word ; e. g. addhayogo was printed in capitals for that 
 reason. I have not attempted to explain the different philo- 
 sophical terms which occur in the extracts. I give mostly 
 one translation, and put a 1. 1. (technical term) after them. 
 Fault may perhaps be found with the explanation of 
 Nibhdnam as the summum bonum of the Buddhists ; but 
 among so many different views it seems to me best neither 
 to oflPer an opinion nor to defend one. 
 
 I have given the third person singular present of the 
 verb, and translated this throughout with the infinitive. 
 The third person singular present, as is well known, has 
 in Indian grammar the same value as the infinitive of 
 modern grammar. It is the type given for the verb by the
 
 TREFACE. xiii 
 
 native grammarians. To give the so-called root did not 
 commend itself to me — for two reasons. First, — the 
 principle of the root- theory has been recently, and not 
 without reason, greatly shaken, so that it would not be wise 
 to introduce it. Secondly, it is difficult to determine what is 
 the root of a Piili word. I have given the nominative case 
 of nouns, and here I think I may deserve some blame. 
 But, as is shewn in the chapter on declension, through the 
 working of the phonetic laws none of the declensions keeps 
 within its own range, and the crude form of a Pali noun is 
 thus not easily fixed. 
 
 I have availed myself on every occasion of all the books 
 published on Pali grammar, and consulted Childers's Dic- 
 tionary of the Piili Language. These works will be found 
 in the appended Bibliography. I name here more particu- 
 larly the works of Professors Kuhn and Minayefi", of M. 
 Senart, of the Terunnanse Subhuti, and of Dr. Trenckner. 
 
 I hope the Tables of Alphabets will be found useful. 
 
 In conclusion, I have to thank Dr. Morris for many 
 valuable suggestions, and for his kindness in looking over 
 the proof-sheets. I am also indebted to the authorities of 
 the Bodleian Library'', the British Museum, and the India 
 Office Library, for the courtesy and ready help I have 
 uniformly received from them. 
 
 O. FBANKFURTER. 
 
 Oxford, February, 1883.
 
 PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
 
 I. PALI LITERATURE. 
 
 TuRNOUR, G. Examination of the Piili Buddhistical Annals. 
 J.A.S. of Bengal, 1837, 1838. 
 
 Westergaard, N. L. Codices Indici bibliothecge regiiB 
 Havniensis enumerati et descripti. Copenhagen, 1846. 
 
 Hardy, Rev. R. S. List of Books iu the Pali and Singha- 
 lese Languages. J.R.A.S. Ceylon Branch, 1848. 
 
 Alwis, J. DE. Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit, Pali, and 
 Sinhalese Literary Works of Ceylon. Colombo, 1870. 
 
 ZoYSA, L. DE. Catalogue of Pali, Sinhalese, and Sanskrit 
 Manuscripts in the Ceylon Government Oriental Library. 
 Colombo, 1876. 
 
 FoRCHHAMMER, E., Professor of Pali, Rangoon High School. 
 Report by, for the year 1879-1880. 
 
 Davids, T. W. Rhys. Report on Pali and Sinhalese. 
 Transactions of the Philological Society, 1875-1876. 
 
 Feer, L. Les nouveaux Manuscripts Palis de la biblio- 
 theque nationale. Annales de I'extreme Orient, 1880. 
 
 Morris, Rev. Dr. Richard. Report on Pali Literature, 
 1875-1880. Transactions of the Philological Society, 
 1881. 
 
 Haas, E. Catalogue of Sanskrit and Pali Books in the 
 British Museum. London, 1876. 
 
 Trijbner & Co. Catalogue of leading Books on Pali, 
 Prakrit, and Buddhist Literature. London, 1881.
 
 xvi TALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
 
 II. TEXTS. 
 
 YiNAYA PiTAKAM. One of the principal Buddhist Holy- 
 Scriptures. Edited by Hermann Oldenberg. 5 vols. 
 London, 1879-1883. 
 
 Kammavaca. 
 
 Spiegel, F. Karamaviikyam, liber de officiis 
 buddhicorum piilice et latine edidit. Bonn, 
 1841. 
 
 • Anecdota Piilica. Chaps, ii. iii. v. 
 
 Leipzig, 1845. 
 
 Boehtlingk, 0. Bulletin de I'Academie Imperiale 
 des Sciences, 1844, No. 22, chap. iv. 
 
 Dickson, J. F. Upasampada Kammavaca. J.R.A.S. 
 1875. 
 
 • The Piili Manuscript written on 
 
 Papyrus, preserved in the Library of the 
 Armenian Monastery, St. Lazaro. Venice, 
 1875. (This appears to be a reprint of the 
 preceding.) 
 
 Patimokkha. 
 
 Minayeflf, J. Pratiraoksha Siitra buddijskij sluzeb- 
 
 niku izdannyj i perevedennyj. Petersburg, 
 
 1869. 
 Dickson, J. F. Patimokkha, being the Buddhist 
 
 Office of the Confession of Priests. J.R.A.S. 
 
 1875. 
 
 SUTTA PiTAKAM. 
 
 DTgha Nikaya. 
 
 Grimblot, P. Sept Suttas Palis, tires du Digha 
 
 Nikaya. Paris, 1876. 
 Childers, P. C. Mahiiparinibbilnasutta. London,, 
 
 1878. 
 Mahasatipatthanasutta. Maulmain, 1881.
 
 PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. xvii 
 
 SUTTA PlTAKAM. 
 
 SamYUTTA NlKAYA. 
 
 Feer, H. L, Le Bhikkhuni Samyuttam. M^moires 
 de la Societe d'Ethnographie, Sect. Orient, 
 1877. 
 
 Frankfurter, O. Buddhist Nirvana and the Noble 
 Eightfold Path. J.R.A.S. 1880. 
 
 Majjhima Nikaya. 
 
 Pischel, H. Assala5^anasuttam. Edited and trans- 
 lated. Chemnitz, 1880. 
 
 Anguttara Nikaya. 
 
 Morris, Rev. Dr. R. Publications of the Pali Text 
 Society. 
 
 Khuddaka Nikaya. ' 
 
 Fausboll, V. The Jataka, together with its Com- 
 mentary. Yols. i. and ii. London, 1877, 
 
 1879. 
 Two Jatakas ; the original Pali text, 
 
 etc. London. 
 
 Five Jatakas. Copenhagen, 1861. 
 
 Ten Jatakas. Copenhagen, 1872. 
 
 The Dasaratha Jataka. Copenhagen, 
 
 1874. 
 Zachariae, Th. Die sechszehnte Erzahlung des 
 
 Vetalapailcavincati. Contains the Umma- 
 
 dantl-jiitaka. B.B. iv. p. 375. 
 Weber, A., and Fausboll, Y. Die Sage von der 
 
 Entstehung des Siikya und Koliya Ge- 
 
 schlechtes. Indische Streifen i. Berlin, 
 
 1868. 
 Fausboll, Y. Dhammapadam, ex tribus codicibus 
 
 Havniensibus Piilice edidit. Copenhagen, 
 
 1855. 
 Childers, R. C. Khuddaka Piitha, with English 
 
 translation, etc. J.R.A.S. 1870. 
 Spiegel, F. Anecdota Palica. Leipzig, 1845. 
 
 Contains the Uragasutta of the Sutta JSTipata.
 
 xviii TALI BIBLIOGRAniY. 
 
 SUTTA PiTAKAM. 
 
 Khuddaka Nikaya. 
 
 Alwis, J. de. Buddhist Nirvana. Colombo, 1871. 
 
 Contains extracts from the Sutta Nipata. 
 Morris, Rev. R. Cariya Pitaka. 
 
 Buddhavamsa. (Publications of 
 
 the Pali Text Society.) 
 Peer, H. L. Textes tires du Kandjour. 11 livraisons. 
 
 Paris, 1864-1871. 
 Gray, J. Ajjhatta Jiiya Mangalam. Rangoon, 1881. 
 Grimblot, P. Extraits du Paritta, texte et commentaire, 
 avec introduction, traduction, notes et notices par Leon 
 Peer. J.A. 1871. 
 Peer, H. L. E^tudes Buddhiques. J.A. 1870, etc. 
 Pirit Pota {i.e. Paritta). Colombo, 2411 (1869). 
 Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1879. 
 Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1881. 
 Mangalasutta. 2nd ed. Rangoon, 1881. 
 
 Mahavamso. In Pali and English, with an Introductory- 
 Essay on Pali Buddhistical Literature. Vol. i. By 
 G. Tumour. Colombo, 1837. 
 
 From the 37th Chapter. Translated and edited 
 
 by II. Sumangala and Don Andris de Silva Batuwantu- 
 diiwa. 2 vols. Colombo, 1877. 
 
 DiPAVAMSA. A Buddhist Historical Record. Edited, with 
 an English translation, by H. Oldenberg. London, 1879. 
 
 Dhammakitti. The Dathjlvamsa, the Piili text and its 
 translation into English. By Mutu Coomara Swamy. 
 London, 1874. 
 
 Hatthavaxagallavamsa. The Attanagalluvansa. Trans- 
 lated from the Pali by J. d' Alwis, with the Pali text. 
 Colombo, 1866. 
 
 MiLiNDAPANHO. Being Dialogues between King Milinda 
 and the Buddhist Sage Kagasena. Edited by V. 
 Trenckner. London, 1880.
 
 PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
 
 III. TRANSLATIONS. 
 
 XIX 
 
 Clough, Eev. B. The Eitual of the Buddhist Priesthood. 
 Translated from the original Pali work entitled Karma- 
 vakya (Miscellaneous Translations from Oriental Writers, 
 vol. ii. London, 1834). 
 
 Beal, Bev. S., and Gogerly, Bev. D. J. Comparative 
 Arrangement of Two Translations of the Buddhist 
 Bitual for the Priesthood. London, 1862. 
 
 Davids, T. W. Rhys, and Oldenberg, H. Vinaya Texts. 
 Translated from the Pali. Part I. The Piitimokkha ; 
 the Mahavagga. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the 
 East, vol. xiii.) 
 
 Davids, T. W. Rhys. Buddhist Suttas. Oxford, 1881. 
 (Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi. Contains the Maha- 
 parinibbJIna Sutta, the Tevijja Sutta, the Mahiisudassana 
 Sutta, the Dhammacakkappavattana Sutta, the Sabbii- 
 sava Sutta.) 
 
 Buddhist Birth Stories, or Jataka 
 
 Tales. London, 1880. 
 
 "Weber, A. Dhammapadam (Indische Streifen). 
 
 MiJLLER, F. Max. Buddha's Dhammapada. Translated 
 from Piili. (Buddhaghosha's Parables. Translated from 
 Burmese by H. T. Rogers. London, 1870.) 
 
 Dhammapada ; a Collection of Verses, 
 
 translated from Piili. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of 
 the East, vol. x. part 1.) 
 
 Hu, Ferd. Dhammapadam traduit en Francais, avec intro- 
 duction et notes. Paris, 1878. 
 
 SwAMY, Sir M. Coomara. Sutta Nipata, or the Dialogues 
 of Gotama Buddha. Translated from the Piili, with 
 Introduction and Notes. London, 1874. 
 
 Fausboll, Y. The Sutta Nipata ; a Collection of Discourses, 
 translated from Pali. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of 
 the East, vol. x. part 2.)
 
 XX PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
 
 lY. DICTIONARIES, GRAMMARS, AND 
 GRAMMATICAL PAPERS. 
 
 MoGGALLAXA Thero. Abhidbanappadlpika, with English 
 
 and Sinhalese Interpretations, etc. By Waskaduwe 
 
 Subhuti. Colombo, 1865. 
 Childeks, R. C. A Dictionary of the Pali Language. 
 
 London, 1875. 
 Clough, B. a Compendious PaK Grammar, with a Copious 
 
 Vocabularj' in the same Language. Colombo, 1824. 
 BuRNOUF, E., and Lassen, Chr. Essai sur le Pali. Paris, 
 
 1826. 
 Observations grammaticales sur quelques 
 
 passages de I'essai sur le Pali. Paris, 1827. 
 Storck, W. De declinatione nominum in lingua Palica. 
 
 Berlin, 1858. 
 Casuum in lingua Palica formatio. Miinster, 
 
 1862. 
 MiJLLER, F. Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Pali Sprache. 
 
 Yols. i. ii. iii. Yienna, 1867-1869. 
 Minayeff, J. Grammaire Piilie, traduite par St. Guyard. 
 
 Paris, 1874. 
 KuHN, E. W. A. Beitriige zur Pali Grammatik. Berlin, 1875. 
 Torp, a. Die Flexion des Piili in ihrem Yerhaltnis zum 
 
 Sanskrit. Christiania, 1881. 
 Trenckner, Y. Pali Miscellany. Yol. i. London, 1879. 
 GoLDSCHMiDT, S. Priikritica. Strassburg, 1879. 
 
 Balavataro. Pandita Devarakkhitacariyena Samsodhito. 
 
 Colombo, 1869' [2412 A.B.]. 
 Kaccayana. 
 
 Alwis, J. de. Introduction to Kaccayana's Grammar 
 
 of the Piili Language. Colombo, 1863. 
 KuHN, E. W. A. Kaccayanappakaranae specimen. 
 Halle, 1869. 
 
 „ „ specimen 
 
 alterum. Ilalle, 1871.
 
 PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. xxi 
 
 Kaccayana. 
 
 Mason, F. The Pali Text of Kachchayano's Grammar, 
 
 with English Annotations. Toongoo, 1871. 
 Senart, E. Kaccayana et la litterature grammaticale 
 
 du P5li. 1^« Partie. Paris, 1871. 
 SIlayamsa. Kacciiyana's Dhatumaiijiisa. Edited, with 
 a translation in Sinhalese and English, by Deva- 
 rakkhita. Colombo, 1872. 
 "Waskaduwe Subhuti. Nclmamiila, or a Work on Pali 
 
 Grammar. Ceylon, 1876. 
 SuMANGALA. Declension and Conjugation of Pali "Words. 
 
 Edited by M. Gunaratana. Ceylon, 1873. 
 Sangharakkhita Thera. Subodhalankara. (Pali Studies, 
 
 by Major G. E. Fryer.) Calcutta, 1875. 
 Vuttodaya. Edited, with trans- 
 lation and notes, by Major G. E. Fryer. Calcutta, 1877. 
 Yuttodaya, die Pali Metrik des 
 
 herausgegeben von J. MinayeflP. Melanges Asia- 
 
 tiques, vi. 
 Childers, R. C. On Sandhi in Pali. J.R.A.S. n.s. iv. 
 
 p. 309. 
 
 Dakkh in Pali. K.B. viii. p. 150. 
 
 The PnTkrit Dekkh. K.B. vii. p. 450. 
 
 PiscHEL, R. Die wurzeln pekkh, dakkh und dekkh in 
 
 Prakrit. K.B. vii. p. 453. 
 Weber, A. Zur Yerstiindigung. K.B. vii. p. 458. 
 PiscHEL, R. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiii. p. 423. 
 Jacobi, H. Yocaleinschub in Piili. K.Z. xxiii. p. 594. 
 ZiMMER, H. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiv. p. 220. 
 Oldenberg, H. Bemerkungen zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. 
 
 XXV. p. 314, 
 GoLDSCHMiDT, S. Priikritischo Miscellen. K.Z. xxv. 
 
 pp. 436, 610. Z.D.M.G. xxxii. p. 99. 
 PiscHEL, R. Pali acchati. B.B. iii. p. 155. 
 Die de9lcabdas bei Trivikrama. B.B. iii. 
 
 p. 255.
 
 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 abl. = ablative. 
 
 ace. = accusative. 
 
 adj. = adjective. 
 
 adv. = adverb. 
 
 aor. ==aorIst. 
 
 atm.:=atmane. 
 
 caus.= causative. 
 
 comp., cp.=compare. 
 
 cond. =condItIonal. 
 
 conj . = con j unction. 
 
 dat.=: dative. 
 
 f. = fem. 
 
 foil. = following. 
 
 fr. = from. 
 
 f ut. = future. 
 
 gen. = genitive. 
 
 ger. = gerund. 
 
 Iraperat. = Imperative. 
 
 inf. = infinitive. 
 
 instr. = instrumental. 
 
 loc.=locative. 
 
 ra.=masculine. 
 
 n. = neuter. 
 
 num. = numeral. 
 
 opt. = optative. 
 
 p. f. p. = participle of the 
 
 future passive, 
 p. p. = participle present. 
 
 p.p.p.=participle of tlie per- 
 fect passive. 
 
 par. = parasmai. 
 
 part. = particle. 
 
 pass. = passive. 
 
 pers.=person. 
 
 pe=peyyalo, etc. 
 
 pi. = plural. 
 
 prep. =preposItIon. 
 
 pres. = present. 
 
 pret.= preterite. 
 
 Sep. = separately. 
 
 sing. = singular. 
 
 t. t.=technical term. 
 
 voc. = vocative. 
 
 J.A. = Journal Aslatlque. 
 
 J.H. A. S. = Journal of the 
 Royal Asiatic Society. 
 
 B. B. = Bezzenberger, bei- 
 trage sur kunde der indo- 
 germanischen sprachen. 
 
 K.B. = Kuhn's Beitriige. 
 
 K.Z =:Kubn's zeitschrift fiir 
 vergleichende spracbfor- 
 scbung. 
 
 Z.D.M.G. = Zeitschrift d. 
 deutschen morgenlan- 
 
 dischen gesellschaft.
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 Page. 
 
 line. 
 
 HEAD. 
 
 Page. 
 
 line. 
 
 READ. 
 
 4 
 
 33 
 
 tanhci. 
 
 31 
 
 36 
 
 tr. najjo to 1. 35. 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 prthivi. 
 
 34 
 
 28,29 
 
 nidtiiyd, mdtublii. 
 
 ' 6 
 
 25 
 
 nioha. 
 
 35 
 
 22 
 
 sakhdresu, sakhe.sa. 
 
 6 
 
 32 
 
 oddriko, oddro. 
 
 35 
 
 33 
 
 attdnam. 
 
 8 
 
 31 
 
 miidho. 
 
 45 
 
 5 
 
 yam. 
 
 J* 
 
 5 
 
 mrnala. 
 
 47 
 
 •18 
 
 ekdrasa. 
 
 y 
 
 7 
 
 ekddasa. 
 
 48 
 
 27 
 
 adhiko. 
 
 17 
 
 4 
 
 qravaka. 
 
 52 
 
 6 
 
 kU/ddi, tanddi. 
 
 17 
 
 16 
 
 qalmali. 
 
 60 
 
 17 
 
 kareyyum, kubboyuih 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 khalldto. 
 
 68 
 
 10 
 
 iiccate. 
 
 19 
 
 18 
 
 nikklio. 
 
 68 
 
 14 
 
 ganhdti. 
 
 '21 
 
 11 
 
 ganhdti. 
 
 68 
 
 21 
 
 daddallati. 
 
 '21 
 
 21 
 
 tikJiino. 
 
 68 
 
 33 
 
 bubJmkkhati. 
 
 •2S 
 
 11 
 
 dvikaromi. 
 
 74 
 
 8 
 
 dvi. 
 
 31 
 
 10 
 
 adaii. 
 
 75 
 
 29 
 
 ddsiddsath. 
 
 89 
 
 27 
 
 bhikkliu. 
 
 105 
 
 29 
 
 □ana. 
 
 90 
 
 17 
 
 satapadi. 
 
 108 
 
 28 
 
 ug'ganbatlia. 
 
 94 
 
 29 
 
 pabiyissati. 
 
 108 
 
 31 
 
 rakkba. 
 
 95 
 
 7 
 
 Isanassa. 
 
 109 
 
 5 
 
 amantesi. 
 
 102 
 
 22, 
 
 adinnadaiia. 
 
 110 
 
 22 
 
 katabban. 
 
 103 
 
 8 
 
 sabbadhi. 
 
 110 
 
 24,26 
 
 gamiiii. 
 
 103 
 
 10 
 
 panudanarii. 
 
 113 
 
 15.' 
 
 iietbani. 
 
 103 
 
 20 
 
 sa. 
 
 114 
 
 19 
 
 afidasinh. 
 
 103 
 
 29 
 
 sainekkhasi. 
 
 114 
 
 21 
 
 addakkbiuii. 
 
 104 
 
 2 
 
 yasassi so. 
 
 117 
 
 30 
 
 asayamvasT. 
 
 104 
 
 3 
 
 namaso. 
 
 121 
 
 28? 
 
 paradaresu. 
 
 104 
 
 12,13 
 
 vaiidama. 
 
 121 
 
 29 
 
 vijaiiania.
 
 xxiv 
 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 
 
 Pa<;e. line. 
 
 RR\n. 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 lino. 
 
 ItKAl). 
 
 124 9 
 
 pall <>nn till to. 
 
 
 146 
 
 7,8? 
 
 sainniata. 
 
 125 8 
 
 dakkhintl. 
 
 
 147 
 
 14 
 
 sammata. 
 
 125 18? 
 
 Kaslbharadvajo. 
 
 
 144 
 
 16 
 
 avippavasam. 
 
 132 12 
 
 sampajaao. 
 
 
 148 
 
 24 
 
 anuinudama. 
 
 143 20 
 
 upajjhayena. 
 
 
 149 
 
 27 
 
 yacati. 
 
 144 11, etc 
 
 ussalio. 
 
 
 150 
 
 9 
 
 dharayainitl. 
 
 144 35 
 
 haritattaya. 
 
 
 
 
 
 154b 18 
 
 anu-kathayati. 
 
 
 170* 
 
 29 
 
 bhikkliuni. 
 
 154* 30 
 
 atm-paraydti. 
 
 
 173i 34 
 
 valittaro. 
 
 159a 12 
 
 ussdho. 
 
 
 176a 
 
 25 add. 
 
 sata-padt (f) ' a ceiiti 
 
 165a 2 
 
 satta-nikdyo. 
 
 
 
 
 pede.' 
 
 167a 9 add 
 
 panudanarh' mmovixl' 
 
 
 
 
 Page 60. — The first person plural of the optative ends sonnetimes in ' u,' 
 e.g. viJiaremu, jdnemu. This is an archaic form, occurring mostly in 
 verses.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Preface .... 
 
 . is 
 
 Pali Bibliography . 
 
 . XV 
 
 Part I. 
 
 
 Alphabet .... 
 
 . 1 
 
 Pronunciation 
 
 . 1 
 
 Classification of Letters . 
 
 . 2 
 
 Vowels ..... 
 
 . 2 
 
 Short Vowels 
 
 . 3 
 
 Long Vowels 
 
 . 5 
 
 Nasal Vowels 
 
 . 7 
 
 Interchange of Vowels . 
 
 . 7 
 
 Consonants .... 
 
 7 
 
 Phonetic Changes . 
 
 8 
 
 Compound Consonants . 
 
 11 
 
 Sandhi 
 
 21 
 
 Euphonic Changes 
 
 24 
 
 Declension .... 
 
 25 
 
 Declension of Nouns 
 
 29 
 
 Comparison .... 
 
 41 
 
 Declension of Pronouns . 
 
 42 
 
 Numerals .... 
 
 47 
 
 Cardinals .... 
 
 47 
 
 Ordinals .... 
 
 49 
 
 The Verb .... 
 
 51 
 
 Present System . . . . 
 
 53 
 
 Modes of the Present Tense 
 
 58 
 
 Perfect System . . . . 
 
 60 
 
 Aorist and Imperfect . 
 
 61 
 
 Future .... 
 
 66 
 
 Conditional . . . . 
 
 67 
 
 Participles, Infinitives, Gerunds 
 
 69 
 
 Indeclinables 
 
 70 
 
 Adverbs . . . . . 
 
 70 
 
 Prepositions . . . . . 
 
 73 
 
 Compounds .... 
 
 74 
 
 Part II. 
 
 
 Saranagamanam (Khuddaka Nikaya 
 
 81 
 
 Dasasikkhapadaiu ,, ,, 
 
 81 
 
 PAGE 
 
 SamaneraPanham (Khuddaka Nikaya) 82 
 Dvatitnsakaram ,, ,, 82 
 
 Paccavekkhana (Anguttara Nikaya) 82 
 Dasadhammasuttam ,, ,, 83 
 
 Mahamarigalasuttam (Khuddaka 
 
 Nikaya) 84 
 
 Eatanasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya) . 85 
 KaranTyamettasuttam „ ,, 88 
 
 Khandhaparittam (Anguttara Nikaya) 89 
 Mettasuttam ,, ,, 90 
 
 Mettanisamsam (Jataka) . . 91 
 Moraparittam ,, . .92 
 
 Candaparittam (Samyutta Nikaya) . 92 
 Suriyaparittam ,, ,, .93 
 
 Dhajaggaparittam „ ,, . 94 
 
 Mahakassappattherabojjhangam 
 
 (Samyutta Nikaya) . .96 
 
 Girimanandasuttam (SamjTitta 
 
 Nikaya) 97 
 
 Atiinatiyasuttam (DTgha Nikaya) . 101 
 Dhammacakkappavattanasuttam 
 
 (Samyutta Nikaya) . . 109 
 
 Mahusamayasuttam (Dlgha Nikaya) 112 
 Alavakasuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) . 118 
 Parabhavasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya) 1 20 
 Vasalasuttam „ ,, 122 
 
 Kasibharadvajasuttain ,, ,, 125 
 
 Saccavibhahgam (Majjhima Nikaya) 127 
 Arunavatisuttam (Saniyutta Nikaya) 133 
 Devadahasuttam „ ,, 136 
 
 A Collection of Kammavacas . . 142 
 
 Part III, 
 
 Glossary .... 
 Tables of Alphabets : — 
 
 Sinhalese Alphabet. 
 
 Burmese Alphabet. 
 
 Kambodian Alphabet. 
 Comparative Table of Alphabets. 
 
 152
 
 HANDBOOK OF PALI. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 AIST ELEMEI^TARY GRAMMAR. 
 
 § 1. THE ALPHABET. 
 
 Pali, the sacred language of the Buddhists, is written, 
 according to the countries from which the MSS. come, either 
 in Sinhalese (Ceylon), Burmese (Burma), or Kambodian 
 (Siam) characters. The system of writing in the original 
 characters is syllabic and consonantal (as will be seen from 
 the appended table). 
 
 To transliterate these characters the following system is 
 now mostly adopted : — - 
 
 u u e 
 
 um 
 
 g gh h 
 
 j jh n 
 
 d (/) clh {J]i) n 
 
 d dh n 
 
 h hh m 
 
 I V 
 
 § 2. PEONUNCIATION. 
 
 The vowels are pronounced in the Continental way. The 
 short a has mostly the indistinct sound as in English but. 
 The nasal vowels are now pronounced in Ceylon and Burma 
 
 1 
 
 Vowels : 
 
 a a 
 
 i I 
 
 Nasal vowels : 
 
 ; cm 
 
 im 
 
 Consonants : 
 
 k' 
 
 kh 
 
 
 c 
 
 ch 
 
 
 t 
 
 th 
 
 
 t 
 
 th 
 
 
 V 
 
 ph 
 
 
 y 
 
 r 
 
 
 s 

 
 2 PALI GEAMMAE. 
 
 like the guttural nasal in English hang. e and o are 
 m etrica lly always lon g, but P^'^^APJlJ^^ . f ,^^,..shof^ .. ^*f^ P[.^ ^^^ 
 consona nts.^ 
 
 The consonants are pronounced in the manner known from 
 Sanskrit grammar. 
 
 c is English ch. 
 
 n is the Spanish n and French ng in campagne. 
 
 V is pronounced as English or French r, except when 
 preceded by a consonant in the same syllable, in which case 
 it has the sound of English n\ 
 
 The aspirated letters, surd and sonant, are pronounced as 
 the corresponding non-aspirates followed by h. 
 
 The sound of the nasal is defined by the letter which 
 follows it, cf. English /lang, hand, bench, hemp. 
 
 § 3. CLASSIFICATION OF LETTERS. 
 
 All the vowels and consonants are arranged by the native 
 grammarians under the following classes : — 
 
 1) a k kh g gh h and h are considered gutturals {kanthaja). 
 
 2) i c ch j jh n and y are termed palatals {tdlnja). 
 
 3) u p ph h hh m are termed labials (otthaja) . 
 
 4) t th d (I) dh (/h) ?i r are termed linguals {muddhaja).^ 
 
 5) t th d dh n I s are termed dentals {dantaja). 
 
 6) e is termed gutturo-palatal {kanthatdluja). 
 
 7) is termed gutturo-labial {kanthoUhaja). 
 
 8) V is termed dento-labial {dantotthaja), 
 
 § 4. VOWELS. 
 
 1) Piili being one of the Indian dialects, is best con- 
 sidered in comparison with one of those dialects of which the 
 grammar is already firml}^ established, viz. Sanskrit. 
 
 1 In the Sacred Books of the East, edited hy Prof. Max Miiller, the palatals 
 are printed, like gutturals, in italics, and the cerebrals likewise as dentals in 
 italics, thus : k kh g gh n, t th d dh n. 
 
 This transliteration seems to imply that the palatals arise always from the 
 gutturals, and that they stand in the same relation to these as the linguals stand to 
 the dentals. This is, however, not the case in Pali. 
 
 The system adopted in this handbook is used in most of the texts published up to 
 the present time, such as Dr. Oldeuberg's edition of the Vinayapitaka, Prof. 
 Fausbiill's Jataka, and also in Childcrs's Dictionary of the Pali Language.
 
 SHORT VOWELS. 3 
 
 2) In comparing Piili with Sanskrit forms, it must always 
 be kept in mind that Sanskrit is not to be regarded as the 
 parent language : but as the dialect which best represents 
 the primitive Aryan speech, to which Sanskrit and Pali stand 
 in the relation of elder and younger sisters. 
 
 In comparing the Piili vowels with those of Sanskrit, we 
 find that Pali has no written characters for the r and ^/^ jow els. 
 It has not the diphthongs ai an, and lacEs tne long nasal 
 vowels. 
 
 We find therefore in Pali three short vowels a i u, and five 
 long vowels dlue o, and three nasal vowels atn iin mn, which 
 are also considered long, and wtich are' technically called 
 niggahlta. 
 
 -" ^'s^to the accent, which plays such a conspicuous part in 
 Yedic Sanskrit, no accented texts have been handed down. 
 It is, however, clear that Pali possessed a free accent 
 just as much as Sanskrit, and every other Aryan language. 
 It is now the fashion in Ceylon and Burma to give the accent 
 to the long syllable in every word. 
 
 A syllable is considered long, if it contains one 
 of the 1 o'B^,"*^T'"'n a s a 1 " v o weTsTo r a short vowel 
 followed by two con^i)n ants. 
 
 A Pali word may only end in a vowel or nasal vowel. 
 For exceptions see the chapter on Sandhi. 
 
 § 5. SHORT YOWELS. 
 
 In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, it will 
 be seen that the short vowels a i u correspond as a rule to 
 those of Sanskrit. 
 
 A short vowel followed by two consonants corresponds to 
 a Sanslmtlong vowel ; thus we have : — maggo Skr. miirga 
 'path ' ; mrtfjdro Skr. marjiira ' cat ' ; mtti Skr. ratri ' night' ; 
 saddhim Skr. sardham ' with ' ; iWiati Skr. ikshati * to 
 look ' ; kitti Skr. kirti ' fame ' ; tittham Skr. tirtha ' landing- 
 place ' ; (//«(;f('o Skr. dhurta 'gamester'; muttam Skr. mutra 
 ' urine ' ; suttam Skr. sutra.
 
 4 PALI GRAMilAE. 
 
 An original long vowel following a simple consonant 
 can arbitrai'ilyjbe shortened by doubling the consonant. 
 This seems only to be graphic, as in the metre no diflference 
 is made between a form hahunnam and haliiinam, gen. plur. 
 m. and n. of hahii ' much,' or alklpo and cildpo * speech.' 
 
 In the gen. plur. m. and n. of the numerals tinnam pancan- 
 nam channam the forms with doubled nasals are in use. 
 
 The syllable ya is chanfjed to i. Among: the examples 
 given IS W^WWfW lor okr. nyagrodba, majjhimo for Skr. 
 madhyama. The process called samprasarana. 
 
 In the same way va is contracted into u in such words as 
 latukikd SlTrT latvata ^'quail.' 
 
 § 6. Piili has, as was shown above, no written character 
 corresponding to the Sanskrit r and / vowels. 
 
 It is a well-known fact that those two vowels originate in 
 Sanskrit and other languages for the most part through the 
 abbreviation of a S3dlable which contains an r or I through 
 the influence of the accent. 
 
 Theoretically, therefore, one would expect to find in Pali 
 a short syllable containing an ;• or I element. This r or I 
 element may be inherent in the vowel. We find a whole 
 syllable with the consonant r to represent the Sanskrit vowel. 
 
 r, practically speaking, therefore, is represented in Piili by 
 one of the short vowels a i u or by the consonant r in con- 
 junction with one of the vowels a i u, which in this case are 
 vowel fractures (svarabhakti). 
 
 There is no fixed rule for the use of these vowels, and in 
 difierent, sometimes in the same, texts, they are used in- 
 differently in the case of the same word, and the divergency 
 in the use of these vowels shows that they were employed in 
 a merely tentative way to indicate the sound in writing. 
 
 1) a-=r in kato Skr. krta * made ' ; gmihuti Skr. grhnati ' to 
 seize ;w^?o Skr. mrta ' dead ' ; tanha Skr. trshna ' lust.' 
 
 2) ^ = r in isi Skr. rshi 'a sage' ; kicco Skr. krtya ' what is to be 
 diOTVQ^'^'pitlhatn pitthl Skr. prshtha 'back ' ; innm Skr. rnd 'debt.' 
 
 3) » = ;• in samvnto Skr. samvrta 'restrained'; uja Skr. rju 
 * straight.' 
 
 4) r=r in iritvijo Skr. rLvi'j 'a priest'; iru Skr. re 'hymn';
 
 LOXG VOWELS. 5 
 
 hruheti Skr. brmliayati ' to increase ' ; brahci Skr. brhaut 
 ' great ' ; rukJiho Skr. vrksha ' tree.' 
 
 5) r=« or i or u in the same word : 
 
 9)iH/tf'JMgo^k.r. mrga * antelope ' ; accho iJd-o Skr. rksha 
 'bear'; patharJ pufhurt Skr. prthivi 'earth'; sati sanndi Skr. 
 smrti ' thought ' ; vuddhi vaddhi Skr. vrddhi ' increase.' 
 
 The long r vowel is of later development in Sanskrit, and 
 has therefore no equivalent in Piili. 
 
 The so-called root AVi!};^ the onlj one which contains an 
 / vowel, in Sanserif becomes happati. 
 
 § 7. In comparing Piili words with corresponding Sanskrit, 
 in several instances a difference in the vowels is to be found. 
 This is generally the case in unaccented syllables, 
 and the reason for sue h'a pract ice lies in assimila- 
 tion. In several instances, however, wordsareuse3!^ with 
 both vowels. 
 
 midi Diafi Skr. mati ' mind ' ; jjana puna Skr. punar ; piin'so 
 piuniso Skr. piirusha ' man ' ; ucchu Skr. ikshu ' sugar-cane.' 
 
 Pukkuso Skr. Pukkaca ; Kondamw Skr. Kaundinya ; 
 camUmd Skr. candramas 'moon'; saddJiim Skr. siirdham ; 
 jigucchati Skr. jugupsati ' to dislike ' ; timisam tamisam 
 Skr. tamisra 'darkness'; Timihgalo T^V>^^y^^^7o Skr. Timirigila ; 
 nitthuhhati nutthubhatl Skr. nishthiv 'to spit out'; mitca- 
 lindo Skr. mucilinda ' a tree ' ; Ciymma Skr. ayushmant 
 * venerable ' ; kutumham kutimham Skr. kutumba ' family.' 
 
 Where a difference in the vowel takes place in conjunction 
 with one of the semivowels or nasals, the vowels only desig- 
 nate a partial vowel, such as in garu Skr. guru, Greek ^apv. 
 
 § 8. LONG VOWELS. 
 
 The long vowels a I I'l agree with the corresponding 
 Sanskrit, with the exception above stated, that a long vowel 
 followed by two consonants is represented in Pali by 
 a short one. 
 
 1) a: a = a 'the prep.' sddhii Skr. siidhu 'good'; ddfd 
 Skr. clatf 'giver.' 
 
 2) T: Ifi Skr. Iti 'calamity'; glfam Skr. gita 'a song'; 
 jiiitcuii Skr. jivita 'life.'
 
 6 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 3) u : uno Skr. una ' deficient ' ; supo Skr, siipa ' broth ' ; 
 muMo'^kr. mudlia * foolish.' 
 
 § 9. The long vowels e and o coiTespqridJiP the Skr. diph- 
 thongs c and 0, and sometimes to the diphthongs ai ait. 
 
 They combine therefore guna and vrddhi of i and u, and 
 they go back to these vowels accordingly, before a compound 
 consonant. 
 
 1) e: efi Skr. eti * he goes'; ekani Skr. eka 'one'; hefu 
 Skr. hetu * cause.* 
 
 jeguccho * contemptible ' goes back to jigncchd ; keldso 
 ' suffering from a cutaneous complaint ' to kilaso. 
 
 ediso eriso edikkho erikklio * such ' to idani. 
 
 gelaumm 'sickness' to gildno, in which, however, the i is 
 svarabhakti for Skr. gliina. 
 
 2) E = Skr. ai : 
 Erdvano Skr. Airavana. 
 
 etihyam Skr. aitihya 'traditional instruction.' 
 ekdgdriko Skr. aikjigarika ' a thief.' 
 
 3) aija is contracted to e in the middle of a \sQx^\katheti^=. 
 kathayali 'to relate' ; jcti^ayati ' to conquer.' 
 
 4) e arises out the contraction of aci in, e^>» ihcro Skr. 
 sthavira ' an older.' 
 
 1) o: okam Skr. okas 'a house'; ojo Skr. ojas 'splendour'; 
 lohho ' covetousness ' from hibhati Skr. lobha ' to be greedy ' ; 
 moho Skr. moho ' delusion ' ; doso Skr. dosha ' blemish.' 
 
 pothujjaniko ' belonging to an unconverted person,' 
 puthujjano ; this latter stands for Skr. prthak. A form 
 pidhujjaniko, however, is also given. 
 
 2) o=Skr. au: 
 
 opammam Skr. aupamya 'comparison.' 
 
 orahhJiiko Skr. aurabhrika ' a shepherd.' 
 
 odariko and odaro Skr. audilrika ' greedy.' 
 
 ^) ^^1^: is cont racted to o in the beginning of a word ; the 
 fuller form is almost always also in use: ofdro and avatdro 
 ' descent ' ; okdro avakdro ' vileness.' 
 
 • 4) sometimes arises from the vocalisation of v and its 
 combinations with a as hoii^=.h]uivati and dhooati Skr. 
 \/dhav 'to wash.'
 
 CONSONANTS. 7 
 
 § 10. THE NASAL VOWELS. 
 
 The nasal of every class, if preceded by a vowel, may 
 arbitrarily become niggahlta. They correspond in every 
 respect to Sanskrit. 
 
 For a nasalized vowel, a simple lon_g one can be substituted: 
 uho ' lion ' for Skr. simha ; vlsafi Skr. vimcati. sam very 
 often becomes sd : sdmgo * possessed of passion.' 
 
 Every one of the five n asals can^ before a nv other con- 
 sonant or nasal, become nisgahlta. The MSS. vary greatly 
 m the expression of the nasals : cnnno, anno, ' other,' pamha, 
 pahha and pcmlia * question.' In very many cases the long 
 vowel and the nasalized vowel appear in the same word. 
 
 In later texts a short vowel is often nasalized : nagaram 
 becomes nahgaram. This seems, however, a mistake of the 
 Sinhalese copyists. 
 
 § 11. INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS. 
 
 By the side of hhtyo bhii/i/o=Skr. bhuyas we find yehhuyyo 
 yehJruyo, which is a contraction of yad + bhuyas. 
 
 Skr. a appears as u in the last part of such compounds as 
 addhagu katahnii, which stand respectively for Skr. adhvaga 
 and krtajila. 
 
 In merayam 'intoxicating liquor,' Skr. maireya, second e 
 appears in Pali as a. In milakhho Skr. mleccho the Pali 
 preserves the older form. It stands for mlaska. 
 
 We sometimes find the gunated forms of words in Piili by 
 the side of Sanskrit ungunated. 
 
 § 12. CONSONANTS. 
 
 The consonants are divided by the native grammarians 
 into gJiosavd ' sounding,' and agJwsd ' surd.' They are : — 
 
 Ghosava : g, gh, h ; /, jh, n ; d, dh^ n ; (/, dh, n ; h, hli, m ; 
 y, r, I, r, h. 
 
 Aghosa : k, kh ; c, ch ; /, th ; t, th ; p, ph ; s. 
 
 The simple consonants of Pali mostly agree with those of 
 Sanskrit and the other Indo-European languages.
 
 8 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 The Gutturals, Palatals, Linguals, Dentals, Labials, as well 
 as the semivowels and s and h, correspond in Sanskrit and 
 Pali. 
 
 Piili possesses all the consonants of Sanskrit, with the excep- 
 tion of the palatal and lingual sibilant; the last of which is even 
 in Sanskrit of late origin, and occurs only in the numeral 
 shash and its derivatives, and in a few words in conjunction 
 with the Unguals according to phonetic rules. The dental 
 sibilant s '.akts the place of the th-ree sibilants of Sanskrit. 
 However, the aspirated surd palatal is found in, e.g. 
 
 cJiakam Skr. cakrt * dung ' ; chCipo Skr. cava ' young of an 
 animal ' ; chavo Skr. cava * a corpse.' 
 
 Skr. shash, which goes back to a form sva];s, is represented 
 in Pcili by the form clui and chal. 
 
 % 13. PHONETIC CHANGES. 
 
 None of the changes pervades the whole grammar; they 
 only take place optionally, and can scarcely be called con- 
 sistent. In most instances the leading motive for the change 
 is euphony or fiilse analogy ; in many instances also two 
 forms occur, of which one preserves intact the form known 
 from Sanskrit grammar. 
 
 General Remarks. 
 
 1) For Skr. mleccha Piili has mUalxkho *a stranger.' Here 
 the Piili form is the older one, just as in bhisakko Skr. bhishaj 
 * physician.' 
 
 2) Palatals, in conjunction with one of the semivowels 
 y, V, become sometimes dentals. 
 
 3) Cerebrals., /,,,//i, CaiiJ?p!tio09.l|y..J>e..^.li-5.ti,tui,ed for (/, dh, 
 in the middle of a word between vowels, the difference only 
 being graphic, e.g. 
 
 khifjdd klld Skr. krlda 'play'; mulho miKJlio Skr. mildha 
 ' foolish ' ; daJho Skr. drdha ' firm.' 
 
 4) Through tlie influence of r, vowel or consonant, and 
 s and //, the dentals ai'c sonietinics made cerebrals, e.g. 
 
 daJidti Skr. \/dah ' to burn ' ; (UkIiIIio Skr. dagflha * burnt.'
 
 PHOXETIC CHANGES. 9 
 
 hato Skr. hrta ' seized ' ; pati Skr. prati * to.' 
 iqmtthdpanam Skr. upasthtipana ' providing,' 
 
 5) l=d is substituted sometimes for n, e.g. muJdlo Skr. 
 mrnala 'lotus-fibre' ; tcIu venu Skr. venu 'bamboo.' 
 
 6) An interchange between d and r_ takes places, e.g. in 
 ekdddsa ekdrasa ' eleven ; ediso cn'so ' such.' 
 
 7) The mutes of one class are occasionally used for the 
 mutes of another : 
 
 Pakudho and Kakudho. 
 
 kipilliko and kipUlako Skr. pipllika * ant.' 
 
 gaddiihano Skr. dadriighna 'good for leprosy.' 
 
 takkollam Skr. kakkola ' bdellium.' 
 
 scnnpufito sahkutito sahkiicito from Skr. y/ kut or ■\/ kuc 
 'shrivelled'; cikicchati and tikicchati Skr. cikits 'to care'; 
 iighacchd dighacchd Skr. jighatsa ' hunger.' 
 
 8) For sonants the surds appear : — 
 jjdtu Skr. prtidur (in comp.). 
 akildau Skr. aglasnu ' healthy.' 
 chakalo Skr. chagala ' a he-goat.' 
 
 palikJio paligho Skr. parigha ' an iron beam.' " 
 
 mudihgo mutingo Skr. mrdanga *a kettle-drum.* 
 
 thakani Skr. sthagana ' covering'.' 
 
 clidpo Skr. cava ' young of an animal.' 
 
 paldpo Skr. palilva ' chaff,' perhaps through the influence 
 of pcddpo Skr. praliipa ' nonsense.' 
 
 ardpurati and apdpurati Ski'. ava+ -v/vr ' to open.' Several 
 derivatives of sad show t in the place of d. 
 
 9) An interchange between surd and sonants takes 
 place, e.g.: 
 
 Sdgald Skr. ^iikala ; elamugo Skr. edamuka ' deaf and 
 dumb.' 
 
 Nighcmdu Skr. ISTighantu. 
 
 For the cerebral t in such instances / appears, e.g. 
 
 alaviko Skr. atavika ' dwelling in forests ' ; cakkavdlam and 
 cakkabdio for Skr. cakravata and cakrabjila. 
 
 10) We find v interchanged with p in the same word, and 
 vice vend. This last cTiarige seems only graphic, e.g. 
 
 kavl kapi Skr. kapi ' a monkc}'.'
 
 10 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 11) A change takes place sometimes between the sonant 
 aspirates, for which the aspiri|te /i i$ substituted. 
 
 laiiH lacjliu fcJkr. laghu'Tight ' ; hoti by the side of hhavati 
 Skr. bhavati ; but also idha and iha for Skr. iha * hither,' 
 where the original form is, perhaps, preserved in Piili. 
 
 12) n and / are froi^ueutly interchanged in Piili, e.g. 
 nahgalam Jahg'dlam Skr. laagula 'a plough'; pilandhanam 
 
 Skr. pinaddha ' an ornament.' 
 
 Semivowels. 
 
 1) y is inserted in a word to avoid hiatus after a consonant 
 has been elidedBetween two vowels, e.g. khdyito P.P.P. from 
 Jxhddati Skr. v/khad ' to eat ' ; sdyaniyo from sdyati for Skr. 
 svadate ' to taste.' 
 
 For the same reason it appears as if y was interchangeable 
 with V in such words as dvuso voc. to ayasmii, where it stands 
 for duso. 
 
 2) y is interchangeable with r in antardrati and antardyati 
 *■ to run into danger ' Skr. antariiya ' danger, impediment ' ; 
 nahdru Skr. sniiyu * a sinew.' 
 
 3) r is interchangeable with /, e.g. taluno taruno Skr. taruna 
 * tender ' ; cattallsam cattarlsam Skr. catviirimcat * forty ' ; 
 further in some of the numerals where r is interchanged with 
 d, telasa terasa and tcdasa Skr. trayodagan 'thirteen.' jaldhu 
 corresponds to Skr. jariiyu 'womb' ; halidydhho haliddo and 
 hari correspond to Skr. haridrabha and hari ' yellow.' 
 
 4) Parindado, an epithet of Indra, corresponds to a Skr. 
 Purandara, the change being due to false etymology, just as 
 in pa Hbodho 'obstacle,' where two roots have been confounded. 
 
 5) For /, r is substituted occasionally, and the former is 
 generally the original sound : kira Skr. kila ' they say ' ; 
 drammanam Skr. iilambana ' support, basis ' ; araTijaro Skr. 
 alinjara ' waterpot.' 
 
 6) We find / for Skr. d in hubhulam budbuda ' a bubble.' 
 
 Nasals. 
 
 The MSS. greatly vary in the expression of the nasals. 
 No fixed rules can therefore be given, as also the native
 
 COMPOUND COXSOXAXTS. U 
 
 grammarians are at variance in this respect. It may, 
 however, be stated that r, h and s cerebralize a dental nasal, 
 which then is interchangeable with the palatal nasal. 
 
 § 14. COMPOUND COXSOIs^ANTS. 
 
 In the beginning of every Piili word only vowels, simple 
 consonants, or consonants in conjunction with the semivowels 
 y, V, r, occur. Assimilation is the commonest means of effecting 
 this change. This assimilation, of course, considerably alters 
 the shape of a word, and therefore, when a word commences 
 with a vowel or simple consonant in Sanskrit, in Pali also 
 a vowel or simple consonant appears; whereas, if a double 
 consonant, otherwise than in conjunction with ?/, r, t\ com- 
 mences a word, the corresponding word in Piili takes a 
 different form. 
 
 The same rules which apply to the beginning of a word 
 also apply to the middle of a word. Here, also, conjunct 
 consonants, belonging to different classes, are avoided 
 through the help of assimilation, or through the insertion 
 of a vowel. 
 
 The rules of assimilation apply to the beginning of a word 
 as well as to the middle, and if, at the beginning of a word, 
 a simple consonant is exhibited, the word takes in com- 
 position always the two sounds from which the simple sound 
 originated. 
 
 The chief rule for assimilation is, that of two consonants 
 the former ia entirely assimilated to the latter. T//e two 
 80uncU, (f^Jie one teas a surd, the other a sojiant, are assimilated 
 (viz. the final letter is assimilated to the following initial) ; 
 a perfect assimilation takes place, so that the two sounds 
 are not only made to belong to one class, but also to the 
 same order. In Piili itself it will be sufficient if the last of 
 these processes is pointed out, as the first has taken place in 
 common with other Indian dialects, anterior to the 
 fixing of the Pali language, 
 
 A second means of avoidiqg^^cOTJunct^^onsonaiijts jwas the 
 insertion of a vowel between two ktkrs. This could only
 
 12 PALI GRAMMAE. 
 
 take place when one of the letters was a sei nivojccljiX.a. nasal, 
 in either of which the part of a vowel (svakabhakti) is 
 already inherent. 
 
 It remains now to consider the Phonetic changes which 
 tuke place in the word itself : 
 
 1) It is self-evident that when two consonants belonging 
 to the same class meet together, they are preserved intact, e.g. 
 cittam Skr. citta 'mind, thought'; lajjd Skr. lajjil 'shame'; 
 annam Skr. anna ' food.' 
 
 2) MuTES + MrxES are Assimilated. 
 
 l:-\-t —tt lattaliam Skr. laktaka *a red dye'; muttd ^kv. 
 
 muktii 'pearl' ; mutto Skr. mukta ' released.' 
 k + th = tth sittham Skr. siktha 'bee's wax'; satthi Skr. 
 
 sakthi ' thigh."" 
 g-}-dh-=ddh duddho Skr. dugdha 'milked.' 
 g-\-bh^bbh ^jf/ii/^r/ro Skr. pragbhtira 'a cave.' 
 d+g =^gg sagguno Skr. sadguna 'good quality'; puggalo 
 
 Skr. pudgala ' individual.' 
 d-\-gh=.ggh ugghoso Skr. udghosha 'proclamation'; ugghamti 
 
 Skr. ud+v/ghr 'to open.' 
 d-\-b :=bb bubbulam Skr. budbuda 'a bubble.' 
 d-\-bh — bbh abbhuto Skr. adbhuta 'wonderful, mysterious.' 
 p-\-t ^=tt tatfo Skr. tapta ' burnt.' 
 h-\-j -^jj ^hujjo Skr. kubja 'limping.' 
 h-\-d ^dd saddo Skr. cabda ' sound.' 
 b-\-dh=ddh laddho Skr. labdha ' taken.' 
 
 3) Mutes + Nasals. 
 
 ASSnillATIOy. SVAHABnAKTI. 
 
 /t -\-n sahkoti sahmati Skr. caknoti *to be 
 
 k -\-m rumma n/Z;«7«rt Skr. rukina ' gold.' 
 
 g -\-n naggo Skr. nagna 
 
 ' naked ' 
 aggi aggini gini Skr. agni * fire.' 
 
 gli + n agghCi Skr. aghnat ' not 
 
 killing.'
 
 SEMIVOWELS. 13 
 
 ASSnilLATION. SYAEABHAKTI. 
 
 / -{-n ^^iJ/Ja Skr. ajna. * command.' 
 
 Jidfi Skr. jniiti 'kinsman.' 
 d +m Jaidnmalo Skr. kudmala 'an 
 
 opening bud.' 
 t -\-n mppafto Ski\ sapatna 
 
 'hostile.' ratanam Skr. ratna 'jewel.' 
 
 gahapatanl Skr. grhapatni 
 ' housewife.' 
 t + m aftd dtumd Skr. iitman ' self.' 
 
 th +w matiJio Skr. mathna 
 
 ' shaking.' 
 d -\-m chaddam Skr. chadman 
 
 'roof.' padumam Skr. padma 'lotus.' 
 
 dh-\-m idhumam Skr. idhma 'fire- 
 
 wood.' 
 p +w j)appoti pdpunafi Skr. prapnoti 'he 
 
 obtains.' 
 
 4) Nasal + surd remains mostly unchanged. 
 
 How eO til, U)i Lhy Wf^^T^amhd Skr. amba 'mother,' we 
 have ammd, and by the side of palica ' five,' pahndm and 
 pxmiidm Skr. pancjicat ' fifty,' where the im is probably due 
 to the influence of s. 
 
 Further, hhdnako 'a jar' by the side of hhandaJcam 
 ' a utensil ' Skr. bhiinda. 
 
 5) Of two^nasals the first4,s_,.|§si^ to the second, eg.: 
 ninnnm Skr. nimna ' depth.' 
 
 jammam Skr. janman 'birth.' 
 
 Semivowels. 
 
 6) No fixed rules can be given, y, after gutturals, palatals, 
 labials^jigyd,the_ sibilant s, is either preserveH'S't'*' assimilated, 
 always so that the 'sennroicel'is'-'dMmiluted to the preceding 
 conso)ia Us^ J^ot as is the case with mutes in conjunction with 
 mutes where the first sound is assimilated to the second) or 
 a vowel is inserted between the mutes and the semivowel. 
 
 An example will sufiice : 
 Sdkigo Sakgo SaJiko Skr. Qakya.
 
 14 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 7) j is made tlirougli the influence of y ai'bitrarily a dental 
 in do8ino Skr. jyotsnii ' a moonlit night,' but we have also 
 junhd ; daddallati Skr. jajvalyate * to blaze.' 
 
 jyCi and J iyd Skr. jyii ' a bowstring.' 
 
 8) The preposition abhi before vowels becomes ahhha. We 
 liave, of course, simple assimilation. Is gheppati pass, to 
 Vgrah 'to take ' = Skr. grbhyate? 
 
 9) In conjunction with the sibilants we have : 
 dlasiyam diasyam d/assain Skr. ulasya ' sloth.' 
 sdlo Skr. cyiila ' brother-in-law.' 
 
 10) The dentals in conjunction with j/ are palatalized or 
 kept intaci. ' '"-""""^''^ '"""■"■ 
 
 c and ch sometimes represent the surd dentals when 
 followed by y and j, and j'h, the sonant dentals in con- 
 junction with y. The dental nasal -1-y is also palatalized, 
 becoming n/i. '""' ■■•■"•iv,^- - 
 
 Tibje preposition adhi before vowels becomes (ijjha\ atl in 
 the same way acc\ /^'thus' becomes Ice. K iaxta'atyappo, is 
 ofTrequent occurrence, this form, however, only shows ? = ?/ 
 before a vowel. 
 
 Other examples are : 
 
 paccuso Skr. pratyusha * dawn ' ; s«££oSkr. satya ' true ' ; 
 cdgo Skr. tyiiga ' abandoning ' ; majjam okr. madya * strong 
 dlrmk''; majjJio Skr. madhya 'middle'; hajjo Skr. hrdya 'dear.' 
 
 11) r,''*^%6nj unction with y, is either assimilated or both 
 letters "are preserved intact with intervening vowel. If 
 assimilation takes place, r is always assimilated to y, thus 
 we fi nd m i j x f^t.rr. which never occurs in Pali. 
 
 Cpr. ar'njo and ayyo Skr. arya and iirya ' noble.' 
 hhariyd and hJtayyd Skr. bhiirya ' wife.' 
 Ixdriyo and kayyo Skr. kiirya * that ought to be done.' 
 
 12) In a few instances r+y is assimilated to //, as in 
 pallahlio Skr. paryanka ' couch.' 
 
 ^^\ Jj^j^jg^.^ar> preserved or ^ is assimilated to /=//. 
 
 hahjdno and halJdno Skr. kalyiiiia ' fortunate,' 
 
 sallo Sk]-. 9alya ' an arrow ' ; mllako Skr. 9alyaka * a 
 porcupine.' 
 
 14) v+y is differently treated if it begins a word or if it 
 is in the middle of a word.
 
 SEMIVOWELS. 15 
 
 vy, according to Burmese and Siamese manuscripts, be- 
 comes by, whilst the Sinhalese write vy throughout at the 
 beginning of a word, vydmo or hyamo Skr. vyiima *a fathom.' 
 This is often assimilated to v : valo Skr. vyiila ' snake.' 
 
 In the middle of a word it is either written hy^ vy^ or 
 with assimilation hb, or, though less frequently, yy. 
 
 From kavi *a wise man, a poet,' kabbam and kavyani Skr. 
 kiivya ' poetry.' 
 
 imttabbo, but also pattayyo and pattabyo Skr. praptavya 
 
 * attainable.' 
 
 The preposition vi becomes by before vowels. 
 
 15) A + y appear s _asj^A, just as for^^ j-£^J^g.^asiatlie»i»-«#* 
 takes place. Besides this, we have assimilation and svarabhakti. 
 
 asayJio Skr. asahya ' unendurable.' The participle P.P. 
 from lehati is kyyo Skr. lehya ' to lick ' ; hlyo and hiyyo 
 appear for Skr. hyas * yesterday.' 
 
 16) r before gutturals, palatals, cerebrals^ dentals, labials 
 and the sibilant s,i£4gQ§tly assimilated. 
 
 saggo Skr. svarga ' heaven ' ; digho Skr. dirgha ' long,' but 
 digghikd ' an oblong pond ' ; maggo Skr. miirga ' path ' ; 
 kakkatako Skr. karkataka ' a crab.' In sakkhard Skr. carkara 
 
 * a potsherd,' we find aspiration. 
 
 accati Skr. -y/arc 'to honour' ; ajjavam Skr. arjava 'recti- 
 tude ' ; majjdro Skr. marjara ' a cat ' ; nijjaro Skr. nirjara 
 'free from decay'; khajjii Skr. kharju 'itching'; gajjati 
 Skr. v^garj ' to roar ' ; imicchd Skr. murchii ' fainting.' 
 
 pak/nnako Skr. praklrnaka ' miscellaneous ' ; imno Skr. urna 
 ' wool' ; trnmo Skr. varna ' colour.' 
 
 Before dentals assiniilatiQii takes plajpe, and the dental Is 
 sometimes altered to a cerebral. The MSS., however, differ 
 greatly in the use of dental and cerebral letters. 
 
 We have kifti Skr. kirti * fame ' ; kevatto Skr. kalvarta 
 ' fisherman ' ; vattati and vattati Skr. -v/vrt ; addho and addho 
 Skr. ardha ' half.' 
 
 scq^po Skr. sarpa * a snake ' ; tappati Skr. Vtyp ' to be 
 glad ' ; gabbho Skr. garbha ' womb ' ; dabbho Skr. darbha 
 ' kuca grass ' ; dluuiimo Skr. dharma ' law ' ; kammam Skr. 
 karman ' action ' ; NauDnadd Skr. Narmada, ' Nerbudda.'
 
 16 PALI GEAMMAR. 
 
 17 ) r + r= ^^ : nJbhdi^aM, 3kr. nirvana (a technical term) ; 
 gahbo kSkr.'garva ' pride ' ; 2^'^^bato Skr. parvata ' mountain ' ; 
 iiObl * earth ' Skr. urvl. 
 
 18) r-{-h. In this combination, both letters are preserved 
 ■with or without an inserted vowel: ara/id Skr. arhant; tarahi 
 tarhi Skr. tarhi ' then ' ; yamhati Skr. -y/garh ' to blame.' 
 
 19) If ,2; follows gutturals, ai->i*-jeithe^<-assimilated or a 
 vowel is inserted, and both letters are preserved. In case of 
 assimilation the guttural is optionally aspirated. 
 
 caJiJiam Skr. cakra *a wheel'; akkodho Skr. akrodha 'mild- 
 ness ' ; liujjhati Skr. -v/krudh * to be angry ' ; yuJiati Skr. 
 -v/grah * to take ' ; ghayati Skr. -v/ghra ' to smell ' ; nrjgo Skr. 
 agra 'first'; kin' //a kriz/ci Skr. kriya ; khiijdd kild Skr, krida 
 'play.' 
 
 20) For r followed by a palatal cpr. rajiro Skr. vajra 
 'thunderbolt,' and/Jf/yVro Skr. pajra 'firm.' 
 
 21) Dentals followed by r are either assimilated or preserved 
 intact. rToinetimes aspirates a preceding de^tglj^ Optionally, 
 also, the dental is changed to a cerebral. In many instances 
 we find three forms : 
 
 kiitra, kuttha, kutta Skr. kutra ' where ' ; gattam Skr. gatra 
 ' limb ' ; sattu satthu Skr. catru ' enemy ' ; hhadro bhaddo Skr. 
 bhadra ' good ' ; giddho Skr. grdhra ' greedy ' ; Ddmilo Skr. 
 Dravida ; dt'avo davo Skr. drava ' liquid ' ; chuddho khuddho 
 Skr. kshudra ' mean.' 
 
 99^ ^,ff|Ar lfl.bj;|1s^r is assimilated: pa ti Skr. prati (a prep.) ; 
 pa Skr. pra (in composT}*; "^pano Skr. pi'iina ' breath ' ; pii/o 
 Skr. priya ' dear ' ; bhdmo Skr. bhrama ' whirling ' ; sappan/io 
 Skr. sa + prajna ' wise.' 
 
 br is preserved in Brahma Skr. Brahman ; brarlti Skr. 
 -v/bru *to speak.' 
 
 mr is assimilated in the beginning : niakkheti Skr. v^mrksh 
 ' to anoint' ; miiji/ati mh/atl Skr. \/mx ' to die.' 
 
 For mr in the middle of a word, cfr. anibo Skr. ilmra ' the 
 mango tree ' ; tambo Skr. tilmra ' copper.' 
 
 23) v-\-r in the beginning of a word is assimilated to r, in 
 the mi3?rfe^of 1x word it P^y^fij'g itHj^aP"^—*** 
 
 vajati Skr. \/vraj ' to walk ' ; hwi pahbaj at i Skr. pra+ v^vraj
 
 SEMIVOWELS. 17 
 
 * to go forth ' ; vajo Skr. vraja ' a cow-pen ' ; mhhato Skr. 
 suvrata * conscientious ' ; tihho Skr. tlvra * sharp.' 
 
 24) r, after sibilants^ is as.siinilated : 
 
 saw^o-'Skr. criivako ' pupil, follower ' ; m88U Skr. cvacru 
 ' mother-in-law ' ; msu Skr. acru ' a tear ' ; simoti Skr. \/cv\x. 
 ' to hear ' ; asso Skr. acra * corner' ; assavo Skr. iisrava * dis- 
 charge ' ; but siri Skr. cri ' fortune,' with svarabhakti. 
 
 25) For h-\-r, cp. hiri Skr. hrl ' shame' ; ahirikd Skr. ahrl 
 
 * shamelessness ' ; rasso Skr. hrasva ' short ' ; rahado Skr. 
 hrada ' a pool.' 
 
 26) I is assimilated before gut.turqjs and labials. 
 2)Jitfggn''^^sxT^vlgK\ 'reddish.' 
 
 appo Skr. alpa ' little ' ; kappo Skr. kalpa ' period of time ' ; 
 jajjj^o Skr. jalpa ' word, speech ' ; goppJio Skr. gulpha ' ancle.' 
 
 27) Through metathesis gumbo Skr. gulma ' thicket ' ; 
 simhall Skr. ciilmali ' cotton-tree.' 
 
 28) For /+ V cp. Idbhisam Skr. kilvisha ' fault ' ; hillo, but 
 also beluvo Skr. bilva and bailava ' the vilva-tree ' ; hhallato 
 Skr. khalvata ' bald ' ; pallalam Skr. palvala ' small tank.' 
 
 29) / after gutturals shows svarabhakti in kileso Skr. kleca 
 
 * sin ' ; kilissati Skr. Vklic ' to suflFer ' ; kilomakam Skr. 
 kloman 'right lung'; kilainati Skr. -y/klam 'to be tired'; 
 gildno Skr. gliina ' faded ' ; and from this an abstract 
 gelawiam is formed, see § 9. akildsu Skr. aglasnu ' healthy.' 
 Without svarabhakti kleso ' sin.' 
 
 30) For / after labials cp. 
 
 pilavo Skr. plava ' a kind of duck ' ; pihakam Skr. pllhan 
 ' spleen ' ; pihwati and piavati Skr. i/t^I\x ' to float ' ; plavo 
 Skr. plava ' a raft.' 
 
 ambiio Skr. amla 'sour'; milakkho Skr. mleccha 'stranger.' 
 
 31) After r, l\^ assimilated 'm.duUabho Skr. durlabha. 
 
 32) For / after sibilants cp. 
 
 siloko Skr. cloka ' stanza ' ; silesumo semho Skr. cleshman 
 ' phlegm ' ; silittho Skr. clishta ' adhering ' ; silagha Skr. 
 clagha ' praise ' ; asilesa Skr. a9lesha ' name of a lunar 
 mansion.' 
 
 33) For h-\-l cp. hiladati, hilado, hilito Skr. -v/Wad 'to 
 be glad.' 
 
 2
 
 18 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 34) r, in conjunction with gutturals in the middle of a 
 word is assimilated: thus pa kko Skr. pakva 'cooked.' In the 
 beginning of a word, hitJnto Skr. ■y/kvath 'boiled.* 
 
 35) For v after palatals cp. jaldti * to blaze,' and the 
 intensive dacldallati Skr. jajvalyati. 
 
 36) V after cerebral: kinnam Skr. kinva 'yeast.' 
 
 37) V AFTER DENTALS. 
 
 1) t-\-v: tvam, tuvam, tarn Skr. tvara 'thou'; tarati Skr. 
 •v/tvar ; taco Skr. tvac 'skin, bark.' In cattdro Skr. catviiras 
 * four,' and in ittaro Skr. itvara ' going,' we have assimila- 
 tion. In caccaro Skr. catvara 'a court' v was changed into 
 y, which then palatalized the t. The gerundial suffixes 
 trdna and tra are mostly preserved, but sometimes tvdna 
 is contracted into tuna. Iritvijo Skr. rtvij 'an officiating 
 priest.' 
 
 2) cl-\-v: d'ijjo Skr. dvlpa 'an island'; doso Skr. dvesha 
 'hatred'; saddalo Skr. ciidvala ' grass3\' For Skr. dvi, as 
 separate numeral, the forms dee and duve occur ; in com- 
 position, however, dvi, di, da and bd : hdrasa Skr. dviidacan 
 'twelve'; bdvlsati Skr. dvavimcati. 
 
 Q}..^-^^::^^^ilh '■ dJiajo Skr. dhvaja ' flag ' ; dhamseii corre- 
 sponds to Skr. -v/dhvams 'to fall, to perish,' and in composition 
 viddhavised ; d/utni Skr. dhvani ' sound ' ; add/id Skr. adhvan 
 'path.' 
 
 38) V after sibilants is mostl}' assimilated : 
 
 asso Blir. acva ' horse ' ; bhassaro Skr. bhilsvara ' brilliant.' 
 In the beginning of a word sv is sometimes preserved. We 
 find also svarabhakti and assimilation, sdiiil and suvdmi Skr. 
 svjimin ' lord.' sd Skr. cvan ' dog,' has the following forms 
 besides : sono, sfmo, sdno, svdno and sumno. svannam and 
 somiam correspond to Skr. svarna ' gold.' saggo Skr. svarga 
 'heaven, paradise,' but the adjective sovaggiko. sve, sure Skr. 
 cvas ' yesterday ' ; soft/ii and suvatthi Skr. svasti 'health.' 
 
 39) Through metathesis h-^v has become r/s in j'whd Skr. 
 jihvil ' tongue ' ; sarhayo Skr. siihvya ' called, named.' 
 
 gabhJiaram Skr. gahvara ' cavern.' 
 
 40) Sibilants in conjunction with the surd letters. 
 Following, or prece£Uag-.tlL§ ^ui^-JJb^'Sibilants are alwaj^s
 
 SIBILANTS. 19 
 
 assimilated ; mostly an aspirat ion n^ |]jy|^,,|XAmV>inn tmn takes 
 place. 
 
 Skr. ksh becomes Tikh and cch ; some of the words exhibit 
 both forms. Skr. shk and sk=H-A. 
 
 1) cakkhii Skr. cakshus 'eye'; Rakkhaso Skr. Riikshasa ; 
 rukkho Skr. vrksha ' tree ' ; hhikkhu Skr. bhikshu * a mendi- 
 cant'; khalati Skr. v/skhal 'to tumble'; khandho Skr. skandha 
 ' shoulder ' ; khattiyo Skr. kshatriya ' member of the second 
 caste ' ; khayo Skr. kshaya ' decay ' ; khlpati Skr, -y/kshlv 
 
 * to spit.' 
 
 2) kacchd Skr. kaksha ' a girdle ' ; kucchi Skr. kukshi 
 
 * belly ' ; chamd Skr. kshama ' earth.' 
 
 3) akkJii acchi Skr. akshi ' eye ' ; ikko, accJio, and with a 
 singular assimilation ko and isso Skr. rksha ' bear ' ; khuddo 
 chuddho Skr. kshudra ' small ' ; chcmo kliano Skr. kshana 
 
 * moment, a festive time ' ; pakklio pacclio Skr. paksha 
 
 * a wing ' ; kluiro Skr. kshura ' razor ' ; eullo, culo, cido Skr. 
 kshulla ' small ' ; mkkato Skr. samskrta ' Sanskrit ' ; nikko 
 Skr. nishka ' a golden ornament ' ; nikkeso Skr. nishkeca 
 ' bald.' 
 
 4) Skr. c c=cchj^ acchariyo Skr. accary a ' wonderful ' ; pacclid 
 Skr. '|)accat' Demnd ' ; vicchiko Skr. vrccika ' a scorpion ' ; 
 nicchinati Skr. nis+-v/ci 'to ascertain.' 
 
 5) ^s and^js become alike cch. 
 
 blhhacc/M Skri bibhatsa ' loathsome ' ; cikicckati tikicchati 
 Skr. cikitsati ' to cure ' ; dicchatl Skr. ditsati (desid. to 
 •y/da) ; maccliarl Skr. matsarin ' selfish.' 
 
 acchard Skr. apsaras ' a nymph ' ; lacchati Skr. lipsati 
 (desid. to -v/labh). 
 
 6) sht s/ith=zttIu,JJJfhati Skr. tishthati 'to stand'; yiftho Skr. 
 ishta^P!KlP. to -v/yaj 'to sacrifice'; attha Skr. ashtan 'eight' ; 
 chattho Skr. shashtha 'sixth'; Ihattho Skri bhrashta 'fallen'; 
 mattho and matto Skr. mrshta ' polished ' ; hhattho and bhatto 
 Skr. bhrshta 'fried.' 
 
 7) leddu ' a clod of earth,' is supposed to stand for Skr. 
 loshta. The modern vernaculars, however, show the forms 
 lendu and leddu. 
 
 8) Skr,sUai4r«i4j»»s»w«^^ ^ih. This
 
 20 rALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 may optionally be cerebralized. (dthi Skr. astlii 'bone'; 
 atthi Skr. asti 'to be ' ; hatthl Skr. hastiu ' elepliant,' and 
 without aspiration atto Skr. asta ' thrown.' 
 
 9) In the beginning of a word ep. thal^anam Skr. sthagana 
 * covering ' ; thamhho Skr. stambho ; thdnani Skr. sthana 
 ' standing,' and other derivatives from -v/stha with cerebrali- 
 zation ; thcro Skr. sthavira ' priest ' ; fhupo Skr. stupa 
 'a tope'; thevo and chew 'a drop,' to Skr. Vstip, and 
 perhaps chamhhati Skr. Vstambh ' to amaze ' ; hhdnu Skr. 
 sthiinu ' stump of a tree.' 
 
 10) In conjunction with the labials the sibilants are assimi- 
 lated; sometimes an aspiration takes place. The characters 
 for p, -pli being very much alike in Siamese, Burmese and 
 Sinhalese MSS., it is very difficult to say if this is more than 
 graphic. 
 
 11) pJiasso Skr. spar^a 'touch'; j^husati Skr. \/sprc *to 
 touch'; 2^up2}/iam Skr. pushpa 'flower'; by the side oi jmpphito 
 a form p/nissito occurs, both going back to Skr. pushpita 
 'flowering,' 
 
 12) bapjio Skr. viishpa * a tear ' ; apphofd Skr. asphota 
 'jasmine'; nippdpo Skr. nishpapa 'free from sin'; nippdvo 
 Skr. nishpava ' winnowing, clearing ' ; nippJiddanam ' ac- 
 complishment,' to nipajjati Skr. nis+Vpad; nipphah Skr. 
 nishphala ' fruitless.' 
 
 41) Groups of ji a sAlg,witli sibilants following are treated in 
 difierent ways : 1) The group is preserved intact ; 2) be- 
 tween the sibilant and the nasal a vowel is inserted ; 3) the 
 sibilant is changed to J5,"and metathesis takes place. In the 
 beginning of a word assimilation may take place. 
 
 In several instances a word appears under more than one form. 
 
 1) sineJio sncJio Skr. sneha 'friendship'; nisne ho ' vf\i\io\xt 
 love ' ; sindnam nahdnom Ski\ snilna ' bathing ' ; siniddho 
 nuhlho Skr. snigdha ' oily ' ; sxmhd smjisd husd Skr. sniisha 
 ' sister-in-law ' ; Sineru Nern Meru Sumeni probably belong 
 together, and point to a form Sneru. 
 
 2) pan/ti Skr. prcni ' variegated ' ; jxniho Skr. pra9na 
 * question ' ; tcmhd tasind Skr. trshnii ' lust ' ; kanho kasiiio 
 Skr. krshna 'black ' ; loilio Skr. ushna 'hot.'
 
 SANDHI. 21 
 
 3) sitam mihitam Skr. smita * smile ' ; massu Skr. cmacru 
 
 * beard ' ; gimho Skr. grlsbma ' summer ' ; asmd amhd Skr. 
 a§man 'stone'; semho si/esuDio Skr. gleshman 'phlegm'; rasmi 
 ramsi Skr. ra9mi ' a ray of light ' ; rainsimd Skr. racmimat 
 
 * radiant ' ; apamCiro ajxismdro Skr. apasmura ' epilepsy.' 
 
 4) In the oblique case of the pronouj^^HlBiiHiiiipiienally 
 changed into mlt, and thus also lii the torm of the verb, 
 subst. amlii'asml amhe asme. 
 
 42) In combination with nasals, /i shows syarabhakti or 
 metathesis. 
 
 ganhati Skr. grhnati ' to grasp ' ; Jianute hnute Skr. hnute 
 ' to conceal oneself ' ; cihancmi cinham Skr. cihnana ' mark, 
 sign ' ; jimho Skr. jihma ' crooked.' 
 
 43) Groups of three or more consonants are treated like 
 those consisting only of two. Assimilation takes place, in 
 some instances svarabhakti. 
 
 uddham uhhham Skr. urdhvam ' upwards.' The repre- 
 sentation is, of course, due to the different assimilation which 
 took place ; just as in disrd, and less frequently datthu, for 
 Skr. drshtva ^^vc; uddhumdyati (pass.) Skr. ud+y'dhma 'to 
 be blown up ' ; tikkino tikkho tinho Skr, tikshna * sharp ' ; 
 smiho Skr. clakshna ' smooth ' ; jimhd dosino Skr. jyotsna 
 
 * moonlight ' ; kasino Skr. krtsna ' entire ' ; satti Skr. castri 
 'knife'; idattaijain^:zidam-\-traya; lacchati Skr. lapsyati fut. to 
 \Jlahh\ checchati fut. to chindati Skr. -v/chid ' to cut'; '))iacco 
 Skr. martya ' mortal ' ; niaccho Skr. matsya ' fish ' ; alio Skr. 
 adra 'wet'; ratumam vattam Skr. vartman ; itthi Itthi tJil Skr. 
 strl 'woman.' 
 
 44) Three consonants are only allowed in conjunction with 
 the semivowels. 
 
 § 15. SANDHI.i 
 
 In the preceding paragraphs the phonetic changes which 
 take place in the midst of a word have been considered. 
 It remains now to be seen what changes take place in the 
 
 ' Cpr. On Sandhi iu Pali by thu late H. C. Childors, Journal lloyal Asiatic 
 Society, 1879.
 
 22 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 sentence. None of the SandJii rules known from Sanskrit 
 grammar as imperative are so in Pali. We have of course 
 only to deal with external Sandhi in Pali, as internal Sandhi 
 has been treated under the heading of phonetic changes^ to 
 which it properly belongs. 
 
 In prose the MSS. differ greatly in the use of Sandhi, and 
 whilst, for instance, Burmese and Siamese MSS. prefer 
 writing khrd/iam, the Singhalese MSS. separate the words 
 into li/io aham. In verse Sandhi of course takes place 
 according to the exigencies of the metre. Later texts, such 
 as the Dlpavama, take great liberties, omitting whole 
 syllables, etc. 
 
 The following tables will show the most frequent changes 
 that occur : — 
 
 VOWEL SANDHI. 
 
 VOWELS IN COMBINATION WITH VOWELS. 
 
 a + a=-d: ndhosi=na ahosi. 
 
 a •+• a + CONJUNCT coNSONANT=a : na 'tthi=na atthi ; ^^anci 
 anmm=.pan* annam. 
 
 (7 + «+ CONJUNCT coNSONANT=d : ndssa = )ia assa. 
 
 a before a is rarely elided. Such elision generally takes 
 place before aham ' I,' az/am ' this,' and the forms of the 
 verb atthi ' to be.' 
 
 d-\-d=d: taddyam-=tadd ai/am ; taddsi=-tadd dsi. 
 
 d-\-i-=.e: bandhuss 'eva=bandhussa iva. 
 
 a + ^ = o: nopeti=.na U2)eti. 
 
 a-\-iti=d : Tissdti vacancna= Tissa iti. 
 
 a+pi=dpi : ajjdpi=-ajja. 
 
 d-\-u=^u : cubhayam^=^ca uhhayani ; tadupa° = tadd upa- 
 sammanti. 
 
 rt4-« = d (elision of i) : yena 'me=.yena inie. This elision 
 seems only to take place in case of the pronoun idani. 
 
 a-\-ioT u=.i or u (elision of a) : pahdy* imam =.pahdya imam ; 
 tatr' idam=.tatra idam; yass' indnydn=yassa indriydnii ; ten' 
 upasanlcami=tena upasankami.
 
 VOWEL SANDHI. 23 
 
 a is elided before a u e o : yen'' dyasmd ; lUthdif dsand ; idh' 
 demo; eken' uno^=^ekena uiio ; neto' ekamantikam ; c' etarahi 
 fass' okdsam. 
 
 a sometimes elides a sliort vowel, and less often a long 
 vowel other than a : disvd 'j^anissai/am for disvd iqxm° ; sated 
 'va for sutvd eva. 
 
 a is often elided before a long vowel or a short followed 
 by a conjunct consonant : taW eca^^tathd', netv^ ekamantikam 
 eva^netvd ek°. 
 
 d-\-i=^l in seyyathldam-=.seyyathd idam and saddJudhd-=. 
 saddhd idlid. 
 
 i is elided before short or long vowels : gacchafrC aham 
 gacchdmi a° ; p'' ajja=pi ajja', dasah' upagatam=.dasahi upa°. 
 
 I is elided in tunh^ assa=ztimhl assa. 
 
 i-\-i=il: in combinations with iti: samantidha=zsamanti idha. 
 
 i-\-a=^a : kmcdpi:=kmci apt (more frequently kincid api). 
 
 i preceded by t or tt and followed by a vowel becomes ty : 
 jlvanty elaka; ty ayani ti ayani. The examples are from 
 late Pali works, and are perhaps doubtful. 
 
 iti-\-emin: ify erain, but also according to the rules after 
 which ty is palatalized ice evani, and thus di-=.jj \ api^=^app, 
 etc., as pointed out above, § 14, and itv evatn. 
 
 u is elided before a vowel : samef dyasind^sametu d^ ; sadh' 
 dmso^sadhif ; tiisites' iipa2xijjat/ia = tusiiesii iqM°. 
 
 u-^i=::u: sadhuti=sadhu iti; kimsud/ia=:kimsu-\-idha. 
 
 u before a vowel changes into v. The examples are 
 doubtful: vatthv' eva-=.ratthu eva. 
 
 e may be elided before a long vowel: nv dsi=zme dsi; sllamnf 
 ettha=^silai'anto ettJia. 
 
 e sometimes elides a following vowel: te 'me=.fe ime; sace 
 'jja-ajja. 
 
 e-\-a=.d : sacdluunz=z sace -\- aham. 
 
 e + a-=y, the a being lengthened: tydham=^te aham. After 
 a double consonant lengthening takes place arbitrarily. 
 
 often elides a following vowel: so 'ham=zso aham; jxcftiko 
 *i-a=°eva; kattabho' posathe=.k° vpo°. 
 
 is elided before a vowel: kut' ettha=kuto ettha; kataui' 
 assa=katamo assa.
 
 24 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 o-\-a=:d: dnlilx-hd.yam^^du'klxho ay am. 
 
 o + rt = r, the a being lengthened: scaham=-so aham; khvd' 
 ham=kho aham.. After a double consonant lengthening takes 
 place arbitrarily. 
 
 becomes v before a long vowel. 
 
 § 16. EUPHONIC CHANGES. 
 
 1) If a word ending in d is followed by idam, or one of its 
 oblique cases, /Ts'mserted : ' nd yldam, na-y-imassa. 
 
 2) iva after words ending in vowels or nasal vowels 
 becomes *^'jya sometimes Tc.^. /.///? riya like what. 
 
 3) V is inserted if a vowel is followed by u or u. 
 
 4) eva becomes yeva after words ending in vowels or nasal 
 vowels. 
 
 5) m is inserted bet^j^geu jiwo vowels: idha-m ahu=.idha 
 dhu; jeyya-m attdnam-=jeyya atf; id/ia-m-/Jj7iafi, giri-m-iva. 
 
 6) r is inserted when a word ending in a vowel is followed 
 by a word commencing, with a vowel : dhir atthu and vijjur eva. 
 
 7) d is inserted in sammad eva, anvad era, satthud anvayo. 
 These consonants have been inserted according 
 
 to false analogy. 
 
 8) A few instances occur of the original consonant reappear- 
 ing which, according to the phonetic rules in Pali 
 should be omitted. 
 
 manasdd a>'uiavimuttdHam=-manasd° ; yasmdd apeti (and so 
 in Sanskrit) ; tasmdd eva = tasmd; kenackl eva; ahud eva (Skr. 
 abhud eva) ; puthag eva (Skr. prthag eva) ; pageva (Skr. 
 priigeva) ; tunh'im dslnam (Skr. tushnlm) ; vuffir esd (Skr. 
 vrttir esbii) ; sabbln'r eva (Skr. sadbhir eva) ; 7;fl//iat7" dhdtur 
 eva = dhdti( eva (Skr. dhiitur eva) ; punar eva=puna eva (Skr. 
 punar eva) ; bhattur atthe-=.bhaUu atthe (Skr. bhartur arthe) ; 
 chal eva (Skr. shad eva). 
 
 9) The niggahTta stands sometimes for an original final 
 consonant. This can be replaced by an original consonant 
 before vowels : sakim stands for Skr. sakrt, and before eva it 
 becomes sakkl eva, in accordance with Sanskrit. 
 
 10) The same is the case with tarn yam etam, which stand
 
 DECLENSION. 25 
 
 for tad yad efad respectively, and appear in this shape before 
 vowels ; tad eva ; etad avoca. 
 
 11) Owing to false analogy, wrong consonants sometimes 
 appear by the side of the right : punam eva for punar, ahnad 
 atthu for annam, hahud eva for bahur. 
 
 12) Original double consonants which are assimilated are 
 sometimes after vowels doubled. 
 
 13) Inverse the niggaiiita is elided before a consonant : 
 no ce munceyija candimam for munceyijam ; maccdna jivitam 
 for maccdnam ; etani huddhdna sdmnam for buddhdnam sds°. 
 
 14) Sometimes the nasal vowel is entirely elided : im' etam 
 ■z^imam etam ; nipaj'f aliamz=.nipajjlm aham. 
 
 am-\-a=zd : ckam iddham samayam ; ekam idam aham ; 
 evayam-=eva7n ay am. 
 
 15) If a word ends in niggahTta and a consonant follows, 
 it may be changed to the nasal of that class to which the con- 
 sonant belongs : m-\-k=:hk, m-\-c=znc, in=^f=znt, m-{-t^nt, 
 m-\-p=^mp). 
 
 16) A word ending in the niggahTta, followed by a word 
 begmmng with j/, becomes__w« : tarn yeva-=tanneva ; dnantari- 
 kannam. 
 
 17) The niggahTta before /ioptionaUv becomes n : evanhi. 
 
 § 17. DECLENSION. 
 
 1) We have drawn attention in the chapter on Phonetics 
 to the fact that Piili only allows vowels and nasalized vowels 
 at the end of a word. Through this law the shape of a word 
 is considerably altered. Roughly speaking, vowels are either 
 substituted at the end of a word, or those consonants which 
 would impede the action of this law are dropped. A con- 
 sequence of this process is, that, although the essential 
 features of the various Sanskrit declensions are preserved, 
 no declension has kept within its proper range. 
 
 2) The nominative case as a prototype case has influenced 
 the other cases, and since stems e.g. ending in as or a alike
 
 26 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 form the nominative case in o, the as and a declension follow 
 respectively the analogy of the as or o declension. 
 
 3) Besides this the influence of the declension of the 
 pronouns on the declension of nouns has to be noticed, 
 and vice versa. 
 
 4) Pali distinguishes three genders : masculine, feminine 
 and neuter, two numbers singular and plural, and, including 
 the vocative, eight cases. In the declension of neuter nouns 
 and of pronouns some traces of an old dual are to be found, 
 which will be noticed hereafter ; but practically speaking 
 the dual is extinct. 
 
 5) The Pali grammarians recognize six case relations, 
 which by their name indicate the functions of the cases. 
 The nominative and vocative cases are of course omitted in 
 this enumeration. 
 
 6) The nominative case is simply called the first case 
 (jjafhamd). It simply expresses the subject. It is sometimes 
 used instead of the vocative, which latter is called the 
 dlapanam ' the addressing case.' 
 
 7) The names given respectively to the other cases to 
 show their relation {kdrakam) are : 
 
 Jiammam accusative. 
 
 karanam instrumental. 
 
 sampaddnam dative. 
 
 ajULcIdnam ablative. 
 
 sdml genitive. 
 
 okdso or ddhdro locative. 
 
 Other terms are : for the accusative upayogo, for the ablative 
 nksakko, and for the locative bhuDimo. 
 
 USES OF THE CASES. 
 
 I) The relatiox of the Accusative (kammam). The 
 accusative is used as the case of the direct object of a 
 transitive verb. The transitive verbs have a somewhat 
 wider range in all the Indian languages than in the related 
 ones, and so we find an accusative as the goal of motion
 
 USES OF THE CASES. 27 
 
 with verbs of ' going/ * bringing,' * sending/ etc. Vihdram 
 
 gantcci 'having gone to the monastery/ 
 
 Verbs of speaking may follow the same rule. Tarn raja 
 
 idam ahruvi ' the king said this to him.' 
 
 The accusative is further used to denote space traversed 
 
 and duration of time. Panhdsa yojandni gacchati ' he marches 
 
 fifty yojanas.' 
 
 It is used with verbs signifying to have recourse, to appear, 
 
 to ask. Buddham saranam gacchdmi * I take my refuge in 
 
 the Buddha.' 
 
 Causative verbs have a double accusative. TJpdmkam mam 
 
 hhavam Gotamo dhdretu 'let the lord Gotama receive me as 
 
 a disciple.' 
 
 The accusative is used with the following prepositions : 
 2XiH : Sahgamam jxtti' pihd ' longing for union.' 
 
 pari : rukkhani pari ' in the direction of the tree.' 
 
 ami: anu Sdriputfam panJiai-d hhikkhu 'a priest 
 
 inferior to S. in learning.' 
 anto,antara\ antara nthim olokayamdno 'looking down into 
 
 the street.' 
 ahhi ahhito: ahhito gdmam 'round the village.' 
 tiro : tiro hhavam gacchati ' he goes out of sight.' 
 
 II) The relation of the Instrumental (karanam). 
 The instrumental denotes adjacency, accompaniment, 
 
 association, and of course, instrumentality. All the uses 
 
 of this case may be derived from its original meaning. 
 
 We notice particularly the use made of the instrumental 
 
 to denote 1) equality, likeness, accordance, default : 
 
 Rdgena samo aggi ndma natthi ' there is no fire like lust.* 
 akkhind kdiio ' blind of one eye.' 
 
 2) the space traversed and duration of time : 
 nabhasd gacchati ' he goes through air.' 
 
 3) the construction of a passive verb or participle : 
 evam me sutam ' thus it was heard by me.' 
 
 4) the prepositions saha saddhirn vind, though generally used 
 with the instrumental, are also found with other cases : 
 
 Saha gahbhena jldtakkhayam pdpunissdmi ' I shall perish 
 together with mj'- unborn child ' ; Mahatd hhikkhu-mnghoia
 
 28 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 sacMhhn * with a great company of priests ' ; vind dosena 
 ' without any fault.' 
 
 Ill) The relation of the Dative (sampacldnam) [effect- 
 ing case]. The case of the indirect object. It is used to 
 denote objects ' to, towards, for, at, against,' which, anything 
 is done or intended. 
 
 It is used, therefore, with words signifying 
 
 1) give, share out, and assign : Maggam delii ranno ' make 
 room for the king.' 
 
 2) Show, announce, declare : tassa abruvi ' said to him ' ; 
 tuyham avikaromi ' I will explain thee.' 
 
 3) Give attention, have a regard or feeling, inclination, 
 obeisance: Bhavato hhaddam hotii 'may good happen to the 
 lord.' 
 
 4) In an infinitive sense : lolianukamj^dya ' out of pity to 
 the world.' 
 
 lY) The ablative relation {apdddnam). The 'from' 
 case. It is used to denote removal, distinction, separation, 
 issue, deprival, restraint: mdtito suddho 'pure on the mother's 
 side ; ' avijjd paccayd saiikhdrd. 
 
 As special applications, we notice 
 
 1) the ablative after words expressing fear in interchange 
 with the genitive : 8(d)he hhdyanti maccuno or maccund ' all 
 fear death.' 
 
 2) the ablative of distinction: yato panitataro vd rasifthataro 
 vd nattlii ' than whom there is none better or more ac- 
 complished.' Also in interchange with the genitive and 
 instrumental. 
 
 The ablative is used with the prepositions and adverbs 
 implying the notion of distance, removal, such as drd ' far 
 off'; 2)urd 'formerly,' which are ablatives according to their 
 formation : drd so dsavakkkayd ' he is far from the extinction 
 of passion' ; tassa dgamand purd ' before his arriving.' 
 
 V) The genitive relation [sdmi~\. The case relation is 
 an adjectival one, out of which all other uses arise. 
 
 It is to a great extent interchangeable with IV) the 
 locative [okdso'\, the ' in' case. 
 
 Thus we find a locative and genitive absolutel}' employed :
 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 29 
 
 rudato ddrahassa or rudantasmim ddrake ' whilst the child 
 was crying ' ; Evam vutte ' having said thus.' 
 
 In connection with verbs and substantives denoting either 
 possession or dominion, either the genitive or locative is used. 
 
 The locative is used interchangeably with the accusative, 
 instrumental, dative, and ablative. 
 
 Among prepositional uses of the locative we notice upa and 
 adhi having respectively the sense of inferior and superior to. 
 U2)a khdriyam dono 'a drona is inferior to a kharl'; adhi 
 devesu BuddJw ' Buddha is superior to the gods.' 
 
 In interchange with the instrumental, the locative is used 
 with adjectives of the sense of satisfied, eager, zealous. 
 
 I. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 "VYe shall now give the paradigms for the different 
 declensions, of which we make two divisions. 
 
 I. Stems in vowels. 
 
 II. Stems in consonants. 
 
 "We shall mark those forms which belong to the pro- 
 nominal declension with f, those which are taken from 
 another declension with *, obsolete forms with %. 
 
 STEMS IN VOWELS. 
 
 Masculine and Neuters in a. 
 
 Dhamma. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. dhammo dhamma % dhammase 
 
 Yoc. dhamma dhamma dhamma 
 
 Ace. dhammam dhamme 
 
 Instr. dhammena-rimffB dhammehhi dhammehi 
 
 Dat. dhammdija * dhammassa dhammdnam 
 
 Abl. dhammd f dhammasmd 
 
 ^ dhammamhd dhammehhi dhammehi 
 
 Gen. dhammassa dhammdnam 
 Loc. dhamme f dhammasmim 
 
 t dhammamhi dhnmmcsu
 
 30 
 
 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 Neuters in a. 
 Citta, 
 
 Norn. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Instr. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Loc. 
 
 cittam 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 cittdni X cittd 
 cittdrd 
 
 citfani % citte 
 cittehhi cittehi 
 cittdnam 
 cittehhi cittehi 
 cittdnam 
 cittesu 
 
 'citte 
 
 cittena 
 
 cittdya cittasm 
 cittd t cittastnd t ciftamhd 
 cittasm 
 
 citte t cittasmim cittamhi 
 The forms of this declension correspond more to those of 
 Yedic Sanskrit than those of classical Sanskrit. 
 
 Cp. instr. sing, yqj'nd ; pi. nom. devdsas ; pi. nom. neut. 
 yu(/d', pi. instr. devehhis. Is the foi'm citte an old dual neuter? 
 
 Feminine Stems in a. 
 
 Kama. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. kannd kaTiJid 
 
 Voc. kaune kamid 
 
 Ace. kaunam kamtd 
 
 Instr. kamidya kanndhJii 
 
 Dat. kamidya kanhdnam 
 
 Abl. kamidya kamidbJii 
 
 Gen. kamidya kamtdnam 
 
 Loc. kamidyam * kamidya kamidsu 
 The voc. sing, of ammd * mother ' is given as amma and 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 * kaniidyo 
 
 * kaiihdyo 
 
 * kamidyo 
 kamidhi 
 
 kaiiridhi 
 
 amma. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. aggi 
 
 Voc. aggi 
 
 Ace. aggim 
 
 Instr. aggind 
 
 Masculines in i. 
 
 Aggi. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 aggino ^aggism 
 
 aggayo aggiyo * aggi 
 aggayo aggiyo aggi 
 aggi * aggayo * aggiyo 
 aggihhi agglhi 
 agglnam
 
 STEMS IX VOWELS. 31 
 
 SIXGVLAR. PLfRAL. 
 
 Abl. * aggind -f aggimhd f aggistnd aggihhi agglhi 
 Gen. * aggino * aggissa agglnam 
 
 Loc. (iggini faggiiiihi faggisinim agglsu 
 
 The voc. sing, of isi * a sage ' occurs as ise, corresponding 
 to Sanskrit rshe. 
 
 From muni 'a, recluse' the loc. sing, occurs as niune. 
 
 Of ddi 'starting-point' the following locative sing, forms 
 occur : 
 
 ado, ddu corresponding both to Skr. adau, * ddim f ddimhi 
 f ddismiyn. 
 
 The neuters in i follow the declension of those in in. As 
 paradigm aWii ' a bone ' will be given. 
 
 Feminines in I. 
 
 Rata. 
 
 SIXGULAK. PLmAL, 
 
 Nom. rata ratilyo * rattl 
 
 Voc. rata raUiijo * rattl 
 
 Ace. ratthn rattl * rattlyo 
 
 Instr. rattiijd rattlhhi 
 
 Dat. rattiyd rattlnani 
 
 Abl. rattiyd rattlhhi rattlhi 
 
 Gen. rattiyd rattlnani 
 
 Loc. rattiyam * rattiyd Jra^'/o rattlsu 
 
 . Instead of the forms of the instr. sing: in iyd, yd occurs, 
 corresponding to Sanskrit. This unites with the preceding 
 consonant, and palatalizes the same arbitrarily : 
 mafyd santyd for matiyd santiyd 
 jaccd najjd for jdtiya nadiyd 
 A palatalization occurs in conjunction with other forms. 
 The paradigm of nadl ' river ' will show the declension. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. nadl nadiyo * najjo * nadl 
 
 Voc. nadl nadiyo * najjo * nadl 
 
 Ace. nadim nadl * nadiyo X najje 
 
 Instr. nadiyd nadyd najjd nadlhhi nadlhi * najjo
 
 32 
 
 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 Sns'pULAR. PLVRAL. 
 
 Dat. nadij/d nadyd najjd nadJnam 
 
 Abl. „ „ ,, nadlhJii nadlhi 
 
 Gen. „ „ „ nadhiam 
 
 Loc. nadiyam nadiyd najjam nadisii 
 
 The loc. sing, of Bdrdmsl is given as Bdrdnamn. 
 
 ittlt'i, tin 'a woman,' corresponding to Skr. strl, shows the 
 following forms : 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Instr. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Loc. 
 
 SINGt'LAR. 
 
 itt/n 
 
 itthl 
 
 ittJiim 
 
 itthl yd 
 
 itthiyd 
 
 itthiyd 
 
 itthiyd 
 
 itthiyam 
 
 thl 
 thi 
 
 itthiyam 
 thi yam 
 thiyain 
 thi yam 
 thiyam 
 itthiyd 
 
 itthlyo 
 
 itthiyo 
 
 itthl 
 
 itthibhi 
 
 itthinam 
 
 itthibhi 
 
 itthinam 
 
 itthlsu 
 
 thiyo 
 thiyo 
 * itthiyo 
 itthihi 
 thl nam 
 itthihi 
 thlnam 
 thisu 
 
 * itthi 
 
 * itthl 
 
 Declension in u. 
 Bhikkhu. 
 
 Nom. 
 Voc. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 bhikkhu 
 bhikkhu 
 
 PLVRAL. 
 
 bhikkhavo * bhikkhu 
 bit ikkh avo bh ikkh a ve 
 
 * bhikkhu 
 
 bhikkhu * bhikkhavo 
 
 bh ikkh uh i bh ikkh u bhi 
 
 bhikkhiinam 
 
 bh ikkh u bhi bh ikkhuhi 
 
 Ace. bhikkhum 
 
 Instr. hhikkhund 
 
 Dat. *bhikkhuno * bhikkhitssa 
 
 Abl. bhikkhuno f bhikkhusmd 
 
 t bhikkhumhd 
 Gen. bhikkhuno * bhikkhussa bhikkhiinam 
 
 Loc. t bhikkhusmim f bhikkhumhi bhikkhusu bhikkhusu 
 
 We have in adverbial use the gen. sing, heto and hetu from 
 hetu. 
 
 The influence of other declensions we find in such forms as 
 nora. plur. of jantu and hetu : jantuyo jantuno, hetuyo hetuno. 
 
 Masculines in u agree with those in «, showing the long u 
 in the nom. voc. ace. plur. In those forms we have also 
 formations according to other declensions, e.g. : 
 sabbaTniu : sabbauuuno 
 abhibhu : abhiljhuvo abhibhuno
 
 STEMS IN CONSONANTS. 
 
 33 
 
 Neuters in u form their nom. ace. plur. either in u or uni. 
 The form of the ace. sing, in m is also used for the nomi- 
 native. 
 
 Feminines in &. 
 Jamhii. 
 
 SINC 
 
 JULAR. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 jamhii 
 
 
 jamhii yo 
 
 * jamhii 
 
 Yog. 
 
 jamhii 
 
 
 jamhiiyo 
 
 * jamhii 
 
 Ace. 
 
 jamhum 
 
 
 jambu 
 
 * jamhiiyo 
 
 Instr. 
 
 jamhuyd 
 
 
 jamhahhi 
 
 jamhuhi 
 
 Dat. 
 
 jamhuyd 
 
 
 jamhunam 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 jamhuyd 
 
 
 jamhuhhi 
 
 jamhuJd 
 
 Gen. 
 
 jamhuyd 
 
 
 jamhunam 
 
 
 Log. 
 
 jamhUyam 
 
 jamhuyd 
 
 jamhusu 
 
 
 The loc. of bhu is hhuvi adverbially used. 
 
 Of crude forms ending in Sanskrit in diphthongs we find 
 only go ' a cow.' 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Yog. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Instr 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Log. 
 
 SrXGLTLAB. 
 
 go 
 
 go 
 
 gam *gavam *gavi(m *gdvam 
 * gdcena 
 
 gdfo 
 
 g'di'o 
 
 *gdvo 
 
 gohhi goJii 
 
 gavam *gunnam 
 
 gohhi gohi 
 
 ''gonani 
 
 gavam *gu)inam * gonam 
 gosu *gdfesu 
 
 "^gava 
 
 gdvassa 
 
 gdvd fgdrasmd fgdramha 
 
 * gdvassa 
 
 gdve fgdvamhi fgdvasmim 
 The influence of the ace. sing, has effected a transition 
 of the diphthongal conjugation in other declensions, e.g. ace. 
 sing. Skr. rayam from rai, Piili rdyo ' wealth ' ; ace. sing. 
 Skr. navam from nau, Pali ndrd ' a ship.' 
 
 II. STEMS IN CONSONANTS. 
 Stems in ar, Skr. r. 
 
 
 
 Satthd 
 
 ' teacher.' 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nora. 
 
 satthd 
 
 
 satthdro 
 
 Yog. 
 
 satthd 
 
 sat f ha 
 
 satthdro
 
 34 I'ALI GEAMMAE. g 
 
 SIXGVLAR. PLVRAL. 
 
 Acc. satt/idram saff/idre *satthdro 
 
 Instr. satthard * saWiund * satthdrd satthdrehhi satthdrehi 
 
 Dat. safthu * satthussa satthanam * satthdnam 
 
 * saWmno * satthdrdnam 
 
 Abl, satthard satthdrd satfharehhi * satthdrehhi 
 
 Gen. satthu satthussa satthanam * sattlidrdnam 
 
 * satthdnam 
 
 Loc, satthari sattharesu *satthdresu 
 
 "Witli the declension of satthd, that of pita nearly agrees. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLVRAL. 
 
 Nom. j^itd pitaro 
 
 Voc. pita pita pitaro 
 
 Acc. pitaram pitare * pitaro 
 
 Instr. pitard *pjitund pitnbhi *pitUhi piitarehhi 
 
 Dat. 7J>;Y?< *pitussa *pituno pitnnnam pitunam pitdnam 
 
 *pitardnam 
 Abl. ^^iYw *p)itard pituhhi *pituhi *pitarehhi 
 
 *pitarehi 
 Gen. p)itu *pitiissa *pituno pitunnam pitunani 7;«Ya«aw 
 
 *pitardnam 
 Loc. pitari pitusu *pitusu *pitaresu 
 
 Mdtd ' mother.' 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. mdtd mdtaro 
 
 Voc. 7ndta * mdtd mdtaro 
 
 Acc. mdtaram mdtare * mdtaro 
 
 Instr. mdtard*mdtuya*mdtyd mdtuhhi *matuhhi *mdtarehhi 
 
 Dat. 7ndtu * mdtuya *mdtyd mdtunam *mdtunani mdtdnam 
 
 * mdtardnam 
 
 Abl. mdtard*mdtuyd*matyd mdtubhi * mdtuhhi *mdtarehhi 
 Gen. mdtu *mdtuyd *matyd mdtunam * mdtunam mdtdnatn 
 
 * mdtardnam 
 
 Loc. mdtari * mdtuyam mdt- mdtusu * mdtusu * mdtdresu 
 yam *mdtuyd *mdtyd 
 
 As an appendix to the declension in ar, it will perhaps be 
 best to give the declension of sakhd ' a friend.'
 
 STEMS IN CONSONANTS. 
 
 35 
 
 The word corresponds to the Skr. sakhi, which shows an 
 irregular declension. The same irregularities we find also in 
 Pali, and besides this we find the influence of other de- 
 clensions. The forms are not marked. 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 sakhd 
 
 
 
 Voc. 
 
 sak/ie sakhi sakhl sakM 
 
 I sakha 
 
 Ace. 
 
 sakhdmm 
 
 sakhdyam sakhdnam sakhani 
 
 Instr. 
 
 sakhind 
 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 sakhi ssa 
 
 sakhi )io 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 sakhind 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 sakhissa 
 
 sakhi no 
 
 
 Loc. 
 
 sakhe 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 sakhdyo 
 
 sakhino 
 
 sakhdno 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 sakhdyo 
 
 sakhino 
 
 sakhd no 
 
 Ace. 
 
 sakhl 
 
 sakhino 
 
 sakhdyo sakhi 
 
 Instr. 
 
 sakhareJd 
 
 sakhdrehhi 
 
 sakhehi 
 
 Dat. 
 
 sakhlnam 
 
 sakhdrdnam 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 sakharehi 
 
 sakhdrebhi 
 
 sakhehi 
 
 Gen. 
 
 sakhardnam sakhdrdnam 
 
 sakhlnam 
 
 Loc. 
 
 sakkhdresH sakkhesu 
 
 
 II. Stems in Nasals. 
 
 in an. 
 
 
 
 Atfan 'self.' 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULA! 
 
 I. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 attd 
 
 
 attdno 
 
 
 Voc. 
 
 atta 
 
 *attd 
 
 attano 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 attdnam 
 
 *attanani * attani 
 
 attano 
 
 * attdno 
 
 Instr. 
 
 attand 
 
 * attena 
 
 *attanebhi 
 
 *attehhi 
 
 Dat. 
 
 attano 
 
 
 attanani 
 
 * attdnam 
 
 Abl. 
 
 attand 
 
 fattasmd 
 
 *attanehhi 
 
 *attebhi 
 
 Gen. 
 
 attano 
 
 
 attanani 
 
 * attanani 
 
 Loc. 
 
 attani 
 
 fattasmim attamhi 
 
 attanesu 

 
 30 
 
 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 The form dlnnid is of comparatively rare occurrence. "We 
 find : Ace. sing, dtnmdnam 
 
 Nom. ace. plur. dtutndno 
 Gen. and dat, plur. dtumdnat)). 
 
 Brahman. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 hrahmd 
 
 
 hraJimdno 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 braltme 
 
 
 hralimdno 
 
 Ace. 
 
 hrahmdnam * hrahmam 
 
 hrahmano * brahmdno 
 
 Instr. 
 
 hrahmund 
 
 hrahmand 
 
 *hrahmebJii 
 
 Dat. 
 
 hrahmuno 
 
 * hrahmassa 
 
 brahmunani * brahmdnani 
 
 Abl. 
 
 hrahnnind 
 
 hrahmana 
 
 hrahmehhi 
 
 
 •fbrahmasnid 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 hrahmuno 
 
 * braltmassa 
 
 braJimunani * hrahmdnam 
 
 Loc. 
 
 hrahmnni 
 
 hrahmani 
 
 * brahmcsu 
 
 
 ■\hrahmasmim 
 
 
 
 
 Rdjan ' king.' 
 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 rdjd 
 
 
 rdjdno 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 raja * 
 
 rd/d 
 
 rdj'dno 
 
 Ace. 
 
 rdjdnam. * 
 
 rdjam 
 
 rdjano * rdjdno 
 
 Instr. 
 
 ran/id r< 
 
 djina * rdjona 
 
 rdjiibhi *rdjubhi *rajehhi 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ramio ri 
 
 djino * rdjassa 
 
 rauhani rdjunam * rdjdnani 
 
 Abl. 
 
 raJind f 
 
 rdjainha 
 
 rdjabhi * rdjubhi *rdjebhi 
 
 Gen. 
 
 rantio ri 
 
 'Ijino rdjassa 
 
 rahmm rdjunam * rdjdnam 
 
 Loc. 
 
 rdjini rawii *rauhe 
 
 rdjusu *rdjusu, *rdjesu 
 
 
 
 Tuvan 'y 
 
 oung.' 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 yiivd 
 
 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 yuva 
 
 yard 
 
 *yuvdna * yuvdnd 
 
 Ace. 
 
 yuvdnam 
 
 * ynvani 
 
 
 Instr. 
 
 Xyiind 
 
 *yurdnd 
 
 *yuvcna * yuvanena 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Xyuno 
 
 *yurdnassa 
 
 *yuvassa 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Xyuno 
 
 *yuvdnd 
 
 fyuvanasma 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Xyuno 
 
 *yuvassa 
 
 *yurdnassa 
 
 Loc. 
 
 yuve 
 
 yuvi 
 
 •fyuram/ii ■fyiivasmim 
 
 
 yurdne 
 
 fyiiranasni)'>n
 
 STEMS IN CONSONANTS. 
 
 37 
 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 yuvdno 
 
 * yuvdnd 
 
 Voc. 
 
 yiwdna 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 yuve 
 
 *yuvdne 
 
 Instr. 
 
 yuvdnehi 
 
 yuvehi 
 
 Dat. 
 
 yuvdndnam 
 
 yiivdnam 
 
 Abl. 
 
 yuvdnehi 
 
 yuvehi 
 
 Gen. 
 
 yuvdndnam 
 
 ynvdnam 
 
 Loc. 
 
 yuvdnesu 
 
 yuvdsu 
 
 ■ yuvana 
 
 yiivesu 
 
 Sd ' dog.' 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 sd 
 
 
 
 sdno *sd 
 
 Voc. 
 
 sd 
 
 
 
 sdno sd 
 
 Ace. 
 
 sdnam 
 
 *sam 
 
 
 sano *sdno 
 
 Instr. 
 
 sund 
 
 sand 
 
 *send 
 
 sdhhi 
 
 Dat. 
 
 *sdya 
 
 * sassa 
 
 
 sdnam 
 
 Abl. 
 
 sd 
 
 fsasnid 
 
 t samhd 
 
 sdhhi 
 
 Gen. 
 
 * sassa 
 
 
 
 sdnam 
 
 Loc. 
 
 se 
 
 t sasmim 
 
 fsamhi 
 
 sdsu 
 
 'sa ^se 
 
 Besides this, the following forms occur, and are declined 
 as if belonging to the first declension : 
 
 sono suno svdno and suvdno. The fern, is so7u. 
 
 Pimid \_puman~\. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 2)umd 
 
 
 pumdno 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 puniam 
 
 puma 
 
 pumdno 
 
 Ace. 
 
 pumdnam 
 
 *pumani 
 
 pumune pumdno 
 
 Instr. 
 
 puniund 
 
 *pumdnd *pumend 
 
 pumdnehi 
 
 Dat. 
 
 pumuno 
 
 *p)umassa 
 
 pumdnam 
 
 Abl. 
 
 pumund 
 
 
 pumdnehi 
 
 Gen. 
 
 pumuno 
 
 *pumassa 
 
 pumdnam 
 
 Loc. 
 
 2mmane 
 
 *pu))ie 
 
 pumdsu pumesu 
 
 These paradigms have been given to show the way in 
 which the an stems are treated. We find several instances 
 where, according to what was said in the introduction, a
 
 38 
 
 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 word has only preserved a few traces of its belonging to this 
 class. 
 
 Besides the regular forms of the a declension of kammam, 
 we find the instr. sing, kammund kammand, the gen. sing. 
 kammuno, and the loc. kamrnani. 
 
 In several instances forms of the an declension are in 
 adverbial use only. 
 
 2) Declension of Stems in mant vant. 
 
 
 SINGfLAR MASC. 
 
 SINGITLAR NEUT. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 gimavd 
 
 * gunaranto 
 
 gunavam 
 
 Voc. 
 
 gunavam 
 
 *gunavd *guiiava 
 
 Ace. 
 
 giinacantam 
 
 *gi(navam 
 
 gunavam 
 
 Instr. 
 
 gmiavatd 
 
 * gunavaniena 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 gunavato 
 
 * gunavantassa 
 
 gunavassa 
 
 Abl. 
 
 gunavatd 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 gunavato 
 
 * gmmvantassa 
 
 gunavassa 
 
 Loc. 
 
 gimavati 
 
 * gmmvante 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 f gunavantasmim -fgtiTia- 
 vantamhi 
 
 Nom. 
 Voc. 
 
 y gimavanto *gunavantd 
 
 gunavanti gunavantdni 
 
 Ace. 
 
 *gunavante 
 
 
 gujiavanti gunavantdni 
 
 Instr. gmiavantehhi * gunavantehi 
 Dat. gunavatam * gunavantdnam 
 Abl. * gunavantehhi 
 Gen. gunavatam * gunavantdnam 
 Loc. gunavantesu 
 
 The corresponding feminine is made by adding I to either 
 the strong or weak form : gunavanti or gtmavati. It is then 
 declined like a form I. 
 
 The participles in ant are declined like those in mant, with 
 the exception of the nom. sing, case, which is gacchani or 
 * gacchunfo. Compare further : 
 
 Nom. sing. araJid and araham ' venerable.' 
 
 „ mahd maham *ma/ia)ifo ' great.'
 
 STEMS IX CONSONANTS. 39 
 
 Santo P.P. to atthi ' to be.' 
 shows the following forms : 
 
 SINGULAK. PLURAL. 
 
 Norn. santo santo 
 
 Ace. santam sante 
 
 Instr. satd *santena Instr. and Abl. sahhhi 
 
 * sante hi 
 Gen. and Dat. safe santassa satam 
 
 Log. 
 
 Bhavam. 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 hho 
 
 bhonta 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 
 hhamntani 
 
 b ho tarn 
 
 
 Instr. 
 
 
 hhavatd 
 
 bhotd 
 
 bhavantena 
 
 Gen. ; 
 
 and Dat. 
 
 hhavato 
 
 bhoto 
 
 bhavantassa 
 
 Abl. 
 
 
 hhavatd 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bhotd 
 
 1 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 
 bhavanto 
 
 bhonto 
 
 bhavantd 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 bhavanto 
 
 bhonto 
 
 bhante 
 
 Ace. 
 
 
 hhavante 
 
 bhonte 
 
 
 The fem. appears under the forms of : 
 
 bhavati bhavanti bhotl Fem. nom. plur, bhotiyo 
 
 3) Stems in in. 
 
 In this declension several stems have been combined in 
 one system. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. clandl dandino *dandl 
 
 Yoc. dandi dandino * dandl 
 
 Ace. dandinam dandim * dandino dandl 
 
 Instr. dandind *dandind daiidibhi *dandibhi 
 
 Dat. dandino * dandino *da?idissa dandinam *da7idinam 
 
 Abl. dandind \ dandismd-\ dandimhd dandibhi * dandlhi 
 
 Gen. dandino * dandino * dandism dandinani * dandinam 
 
 Loc. dandini *dandlni -f dandimhi dandisu *da7idisu 
 The short vowel in the oblique cases of the plurul appears
 
 40 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 optionally iu verses ; the forms with long vowels are the 
 more frequent, 
 
 Notice noni. plur. d'qyiyo, from dipl 'a panther.' 
 
 The word atthi ' a bone,' corresponding to Skr. asthau and 
 asthi, shows the following forms : 
 
 
 
 SIN-GULAR. 
 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 atthi 
 
 *affhi>n 
 
 
 atthlni 
 
 althl 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 atthi 
 
 * atfliini 
 
 
 atthlni 
 
 atthi 
 
 Ace. 
 
 atthi 
 
 *atthim 
 
 
 atthlni 
 
 atthi 
 
 Instr. 
 
 at thin a 
 
 
 
 atthlbhi 
 
 atthlhi 
 
 Dat. 
 
 * atthino 
 
 *atthissa 
 
 
 atthlnani 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 atthind 
 
 f atthi inhd 
 
 faffhisnid 
 
 atthlbhi 
 
 atthlhi 
 
 Gen. 
 
 * atthino 
 
 * atthisso 
 
 
 attJnnani 
 
 
 Log. 
 
 althini 
 
 fatthimhi 
 
 atthismim 
 
 atthisu 
 
 
 Neuters in as and us. 
 Mano (fnanas). 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. mano *manam 
 
 Voc. mano * manam 
 
 Ace. mano *manasani * manam 
 
 Instr. manasd * manena 
 
 Dat. manaso *manassa 
 
 Abl. manasd * mand fmana)nhd 
 
 Gen. manatio * manassa 
 
 Loc. manasi *mane 
 The pi. follows entirely the declension in a masc. and neut. 
 From thdmo 'strength' instr. thdmasd and gen. thdmaso, 
 by the side of thdmund and thdmuno respectively ; from tapo 
 * religious austerity ' instr. fapasd and tapena. 
 
 The comparative in yo and iyyo is declined like mano. 
 Nom. sing. m. f. and n. seyyo, gen. seyyaso. 
 
 
 Neuters in us. 
 
 
 
 Ayu 'life.' 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 dyu *dyum dyiini 
 
 * dyu 
 
 Voc. 
 
 dyu * dyu III dyuni 
 
 * dyu
 
 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dyu 
 
 * dyuni 
 
 dyuni 
 
 *dyu 
 
 Instr. 
 
 dijHsd 
 
 * ay una 
 
 *dyii/H 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 *di/iissa 
 
 *dyuiio 
 
 *dyanam 
 
 X ay main 
 
 Abl. 
 
 dyusd 
 
 * dyund 
 
 * dyiihi 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 * di/ussa 
 
 *dyuno 
 
 dyimam 
 
 X ayusam 
 
 Loo. 
 
 di/usi 
 
 *dyuni 
 
 * dyiim 
 
 
 41 
 
 For the different endings of the ablative sing, to can be 
 substituted. This is added to the weakest form pitito abl. of 
 jntd ' father.' hh is interchangeable with k in the suffixes of 
 the abl. and instr. plur. 
 
 § 18. COMPARISON. 
 
 The suffixes which are used to denote the comparative and 
 superlative value of an adjective are : 
 
 tava iyo and tama iftlia 
 e.g. pdpafa)V or papiyo pdpatamo and pdj)ittho 
 It cannot be said that these suffixes denote a comparative 
 and superlative meaning. They have mostly an intensive 
 value. This intensive value is shown when the two suffixes 
 are united and made one 
 
 itthatara as in e.g. pdpitthataro. 
 The suffix issika is used promiscuously with fara and tama. 
 There are some words with the suffixes iya and itt/ia, which 
 are attached to other adjectives from a different root, e.g. : 
 fuddho ' old ' jeyyo jettJio 
 
 pamttho ' excellent ' seytjo scttho 
 antiko 'near' nedlyo nedittho 
 
 hdlho 'strong' 
 ap)po 'small' 
 yuvd 'youn< 
 
 The themes in vat and mat drop of course this termination 
 before affixing iyo ittho. 
 
 gimavd ' excellent ' 
 satimd ' thoughtful ' 
 
 ■} 
 
 sddhiyo 
 kaniyo 
 
 sddhiUlio 
 kanitfho 
 
 dhittimd * courageous 
 rupavd * beautiful ' 
 
 gnmyo 
 
 sat iyo 
 
 dhitiyo 
 
 rupiyo 
 
 gunittJio 
 
 satittho 
 
 dhitittho 
 
 rupittho
 
 42 
 
 PALI GRAMMAE. 
 
 II. DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 
 1) Personal Pronouns. 
 
 
 
 1st Person. 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 aham 
 
 
 mayam 
 
 amhe 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 mam ma mam 
 
 
 amhe 
 
 amhdham 
 
 Instr. 
 
 ma yd 
 
 
 amhehi 
 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 mayham mama 
 amham 
 
 ma mam 
 
 amham 
 ham 
 
 amhdh 
 
 am asmd- 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ma yd 
 
 
 amhehi 
 
 asm a 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 mama mayham 
 amham 
 
 mamam 
 
 amham 
 ham 
 
 amhdl 
 
 iam asmd- 
 
 Loc. 
 
 mayi 
 
 
 amhesu 
 
 asmdsu 
 
 Enclitic forms are : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 me for the instr. 
 
 dat. and 
 
 gen. sing. 
 
 
 
 
 no for the ace. dat. and gen. plur. 
 
 
 
 
 
 2nd Person. 
 
 
 
 
 SIXGL-LAR. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 tvam tuvam 
 
 tarn 
 
 tumhe 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 tvam tuvam 
 
 ta)n 
 
 tavam fu 
 
 mhe 
 
 tumhdham 
 
 Instr. 
 
 tvdya tayd 
 
 
 tti 
 
 mhehi 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 tuyham tava 
 
 tumham 
 
 tavam tu 
 
 mham 
 
 tumhdham 
 
 Abl. 
 
 tvayd tayd 
 
 td 
 
 tumhehi 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 tuyham tava 
 
 tumham 
 
 tavam tumham 
 
 tumhdham 
 
 Loc. 
 
 tvayi tayi 
 
 
 tumhesu 
 
 
 Enclitic forms are : 
 
 te for the instr. dat. and gen. sing., and 
 ro for the ace. dat. and gen. plur. 
 
 Pronoun of the 3rd Person. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Masc. and Xeut. Fcm. 
 Nom. so sa tarn (tad) sd 
 
 Ace. tarn tarn (tad) tarn 
 
 Instr. tciia tdya
 
 DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 43 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Abl. 
 Gen. 
 
 Log. 
 
 Masc. and Neut. 
 
 
 
 Fern. 
 
 tassa assa 
 
 
 tdya 
 
 tassa 
 
 tassayd tissd 
 
 
 
 tissayd assd 
 
 tasmd tamhd asmd amhd 
 
 tdya 
 
 
 
 tassa assa 
 
 
 tdya 
 
 tassd 
 
 tassayd tissd 
 
 
 
 tissayd assd 
 
 tasmim tamhl asmim 
 
 
 tdyam tassam tissam assam 
 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 Masc. and Neut. 
 
 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Nom. te tdni 
 
 
 
 td 
 
 tdyo 
 
 Agg. te tdni 
 
 
 
 td 
 
 tdyo 
 
 Instr. tehi 
 
 
 
 tdhi 
 
 
 Dat. tesam tesdnam 
 
 
 
 tdsam 
 
 tdsdnam 
 
 Abl. tehi 
 
 
 
 tdhi 
 
 
 Gen. tesam tesdnam 
 
 
 
 tdsam 
 
 tdsdnam 
 
 Log. tesu 
 
 
 
 tdsu 
 
 
 In all the oblique eases of the sing. masc. and fem., and in 
 all Gases of the neuter sing, and plur. and of the masc. and 
 fem. plur., forms beginning with n can be substituted. 
 
 It is sometimes added pleonastically to the pronouns aham 
 and tvatn, as are also all the demonstrative pronouns. It 
 stands also and must be translated so sometimes for the definite 
 article. 
 
 Many of the oblique cases are used adverbially, especially 
 tasmd and tena. 
 
 The oblique cases of attd, dtiimd can be used reflexively in 
 place of the three personal pronouns. 
 
 attuno dsane yeva attdnani dassesi 'showed himself too in his 
 own seat.' rakkhitiun sakam attdnani ' to save his own life.' 
 
 2) Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 1) Eso esd etam (efad) 'this' declined like so sd sam. 
 
 2) ayam ' this ' used adjectively and substantively. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Masc. and Neut. Fem. 
 
 Nom. ayam idam imam ayam 
 
 Ace. imam idam. imam
 
 44 
 
 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Masc. and Neut. 
 
 
 
 Feui. 
 
 
 Instr. 
 
 ancna imbid 
 
 amind 
 
 imdi/a 
 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 assa i/nassa 
 
 
 assd assdya imissd imissd- 
 
 
 
 
 ya 
 
 imdya 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 asm a imasmd 
 
 imamhd 
 
 imdya 
 
 
 
 Geu. 
 
 ((■■^■sa inufssa 
 
 
 like dat. 
 
 
 Loc. 
 
 asiniin imasmim 
 Masc. and Neut. 
 
 imamhi 
 
 PLUUAL. 
 
 assani 
 
 imissam 
 Fern. 
 
 ; imdydm 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ime imdni 
 
 
 
 imd 
 
 imuyo 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ime imdni 
 
 
 
 imd 
 
 imdyo 
 
 Instr. 
 
 ehi imehi 
 
 
 
 imdhi 
 
 imdhhi 
 
 Dat. 
 
 esam csdnam imesam imesdnam 
 
 imdsam 
 
 imdsdnam 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ehi emehi 
 
 
 
 imdhi 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 esam csdnam imesam imesdnam 
 
 imdsam 
 
 iindsdnam 
 
 Loc. 
 
 esu imesu 
 
 
 
 imdsu 
 
 
 Amu. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Masc. and Neut. 
 
 Nom. asii 
 Ace. amum 
 Instr. amund 
 Dat. amiissa 
 amusmd 
 amussd 
 amumhi 
 
 aduni 
 adum 
 
 Abl. 
 Gen. 
 
 Loc. 
 
 adussa 
 amumhd 
 adiissd 
 amusmiin 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 Nom. amu amuyo 
 
 amU 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Instr. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Loc. 
 
 amuyo 
 
 amiihhi 
 
 amusam 
 
 amuhhi 
 
 amvsani 
 
 Fem. 
 asu 
 amum 
 amuyd 
 amnssd 
 amuyd 
 amussd 
 amussam 
 
 Neut. 
 amu amuni 
 amu amuni 
 amuhi 
 amusdnain 
 amuhi 
 amicsdnani 
 amusu 
 
 amnya 
 
 amuyd 
 
 amu yam 
 
 A defective pronominal stem is ena. It occurs in the ace. 
 of all numbers enam, and the instr. sing-. : masc. enena, and 
 fem. enayd.
 
 DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 45 
 
 3) Relative Pronoun. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 Masc. and Neut. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 
 Nora, yo 
 
 ?/r/>« (yarf) 
 
 yd 
 
 
 Ace. yam 
 
 yam 
 
 ydm 
 
 
 Instr. yena 
 
 
 ydya 
 
 
 Dat. f/^.ssrt 
 
 
 yassd 
 
 ydya 
 
 Abl. yasjjid 
 
 yamhd 
 
 ydya 
 
 
 Gen. yassa 
 
 
 yassd 
 
 ydya 
 
 Loc. yasmim 
 
 yamhi 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 yassam 
 
 ydyam 
 
 Masc. and Neut. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 
 Nom. ye 
 
 ydni 
 
 yd ydyo 
 
 Ace. ye 
 
 ydni 
 
 yd ydyo 
 
 1 
 
 Instr. yehi 
 
 
 ydhi 
 
 
 Dat. yesam 
 
 ydsani 
 
 
 Abl. ?/e/ii' 
 
 
 ydhi 
 
 
 Gen. yesam 
 
 ydsam 
 
 
 Loc. //(?s^« 
 
 
 ydsH 
 
 
 so, ayam and eso, along with the personal pronouns, are 
 sometimes used in conjunction with yo for greater emphasis. 
 
 In adverbial use we find the ace. sing. neut. yam, the 
 instr. ye)ia, the abl. yasmd, and the loc. yasmim. 
 
 4) Interrogative Pronoun. 
 
 Masc. lio, neut. Mm, fem. lid, is declined like yo. 
 
 In the dat. and gen. masc. and neut. sing. Imsa by the 
 side of kassa, and in the loc. kismim kimhi by the side of 
 kasmi^n kamJii. The gen. sing. n. kissa, instr. kena and kasmd, 
 are used adverbially. 
 
 5) Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 In affixing ci (for cid) api and cana to the interrogative 
 pronoun, the indefinites are foi-med. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 Masc. and Neut. 
 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Nom. koci 
 
 kiuci 
 
 kdci. 
 
 Ace. kanci 
 

 
 46 
 
 
 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 
 SINGt'LAR. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 and Xeut. 
 
 
 Instr 
 
 . kenaci 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Icassaci 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 JiCismaci 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 kassaci 
 
 
 Loc. 
 
 kasmici 
 
 kismici 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Masc. and Fern. Xeut. 
 
 keci kanici 
 
 sayam ' self, oneself,' and fiono corresponding to Skr. tmana, 
 are used as emphatic pronouns with all cases. 
 
 §19. PRONOMINAL DERIVATIVES. 
 
 From pronominal stems derivatives are formed, which have 
 the character of pronominal adjectives. Thus : 
 
 niachyo 'mine,' mamako 'mine,' -y/mad ; amhadiyo 'our/ 
 -y/amhad; and in combination with diso and di, interchangeable 
 with the form riso, standing for Skr. drc, we find mddiso 
 ' like me,' efadiso ' like that,' Idiso and Jdl ' like this,' kidiso 
 and kldi ' like what ? ' 
 
 From the stems : 
 
 ta ka ya are formed the adjectives 
 tati kati yati, with the meaning of, respectively, 'so 
 many,' ' how many,' and ' as many.' 
 
 From 
 
 ya ka, with the suffixes tara tama, we find yataro yatamo 
 ' which,' and kataro katamo ' what, which?' and from i : itaro 
 * other, diflFerent.' 
 
 A great manj' derivatives of pronouns are used adverbially. 
 They will be noticed hereafter. 
 
 A number of adjectives are inflected according to the 
 pronominal declension. 
 
 Such words are, e.g. 
 
 anno amataro auJiatamo ' certain ' ; kataro katamo ' which ' ; 
 yataro yatamo ' which ? ' ; itaro ' other ' ; iittaro uttamo
 
 NUMERALS. 47 
 
 'higher'; adharo 'inferior'; iihhayo 'both'; aparo paro 
 ' other ' ; dakJihino ' right ' ; pubho ' former ' ; visso ' all ' ; 
 and sabbo ' all, every.' 
 
 Some few of these words form their cases also according 
 to the nominal declension. 
 
 § 20. NUMERALS. 
 
 Cardinals. 
 
 1 eko ekd ekam 
 
 2 dve dure ubho (for all 3 genders) 
 
 3 tayo tisso tini 
 
 4 cattdro (caturo) catasso cattdri 
 
 5 panca 
 
 6 cha {chat) 
 
 7 satta 
 
 8 attha 
 
 9 nava 
 
 10 dam 
 
 11 ekarasa ekddasa 
 
 12 bdrasa dvddasa 
 
 13 tedasa terasa telasa 
 
 14 catuddasa cuddasa coddam 
 
 15 paticadasa pannaram pannaraBa 
 
 16 so/asa so rasa 
 
 17 sattadasa sattarasa 
 
 1 8 attJi, ddasa atth d rasa 
 
 19 ekunansati ekunavlsam 
 
 20 rlsati nsam 
 
 21 ekavlsati ekavlsam 
 
 22 dvdrlsati bdvlsati 
 
 23 tevisati 
 
 24 catui'lsati 
 
 25 pancavlsati 
 
 26 chabblsati 
 
 27 sattablsati sattavlsati 
 
 28 atthavlsam
 
 48 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 Cardinals. 
 
 29 elxunatinmtm ekunatmsati 
 
 30 timsa timsati 
 
 31 ekatimsa 
 
 32 dvattiiiisa 
 
 40 cattdhsam cattdrlsam 
 
 tdlisam taJisa 
 
 50 j^anmsa pannasam pamiasa 
 
 60 satthi 
 
 70 sattati 
 
 80 aslti 
 
 90 navnti 
 
 100 s«^f/;/^ 
 
 200 bdmtain dcdsatani 
 
 1,000 sahassam 
 
 10,000 dasasa/tassafn nahutam 
 
 100,000 satasahassam lakkham 
 
 1,000,000 dasasatasahassam 
 
 100,000,000 kofl 
 
 From koti upwards eacli succeeding numeral is ten million 
 times the preceding one. After the combination with koti, 
 pxikoti kotippakoti and nahutani niiinaJmtam akkhohiiil and 
 hindu, the succeeding numerals are neuters in am. The last 
 numeral given is asahkheyya))) ^^10,^00,000-^. 
 
 In combination with una ' deficient, less,' the eka is in 
 some instances omitted, as unasattasatam ' 699.' 
 
 nddliiko 'exceeding, surpassing,' is used sometimes to 
 denote the higher number, e.g.: sattddhikavlaa '27,' i.e. 
 7 exceeding 20 ; affhdrasdd/i/'kam ddsatam *218.' 
 
 The following forms of numerals ought to be noticed. 
 25 pannavimti paucaclsati 
 
 44 ciiUdlUam cattahsani 
 
 56 chappatmasa 
 84 culklMi catio'dsifi 
 
 Fractionals are : 
 
 oddho addlio '|'; diyaddJio dkaddJio, 'Ij'; addhateyyo 
 addhatiyo ' 2^' ; addhndclho ' 3i.''
 
 NUIklERALS. 49 
 
 Other combinations with addlio are frequent, e.g. dasaddha- 
 sata ' 500 ' ; addhatelasasata * 1250.' 
 
 catutthamso ' i.' 
 
 For the other fractionals the ordinals are used. 
 
 To form the multiplicatives khattum is used : ehakkhattum 
 ' once,' solasakkhattum ' 16 times.' 
 
 To form adverbs from numerals the suffixes dhd and sa are 
 used : 
 
 ekadhd ' in one way ' ; ekasa 'one by one.' 
 
 Adjectives are formed with the suffixes r/f//^c>,^?^no and angiko'. 
 
 atthavidho ' eightfold ' ; navaviddho ' ninefold ' ; mttarjnm 
 ' sevenfold ' ; atthangiko * eightfold ' ; pancahgiko ' fivefold.* 
 
 Declension of the Cardinals. 
 eka. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 and Neut, 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 eko 
 
 ekam 
 
 eka 
 
 Voc. 
 
 eka 
 
 eka 
 
 eke 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ekam 
 
 ekam 
 
 ekam 
 
 Instr. 
 
 
 ekena 
 
 ekdya 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 ekassa 
 
 ekissa 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ekasmd 
 
 ekamhd 
 
 ekdya 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 ekassa 
 
 ekissa 
 
 Loc. 
 
 ekasmim 
 
 ekamhi 
 
 ekissam 
 
 ekdyam 
 
 The plur. eke ' some,' follows the analogy of sahha. 
 
 ublio 
 (For all three genders.) 
 Nom. Ace. Voc. ublio 
 Inst. Abl. iihhohi uhhelii 
 
 Dat. Gen. ubliinnam 
 
 Loc. uhhosu uhhesu 
 
 ublio is in form a dual corresponding to Skr. ubhau. The 
 declension is very irregular. 
 
 dve, duve. 
 Nom. Yoc. Ace. dve duve 
 
 Instr. Abl. dclhi dilhhi 
 
 Dat. Gen. dvinnam duvinnam 
 
 Loc. dvlsu
 
 50 
 
 
 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 
 Masc. and Xeut. 
 
 ti. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 
 tai/o 
 
 tini 
 
 tisso 
 
 Ace. 
 
 
 tayo 
 
 tlni 
 
 tisso 
 
 Instr. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Uhi 
 
 tlbhi 
 
 tlhi tibhi 
 
 Dat. Gen. 
 
 tinnam thpiannam 
 
 tissannam tissam 
 
 Loc. 
 
 
 tlsu 
 
 tissu 
 catur. 
 
 tlsu tissu 
 
 
 
 Masc. and Neut. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Worn. Voc. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 caffdro 
 
 caturo cattdri 
 
 catasso 
 
 Instr. Abl. 
 
 
 catnhhli 
 
 i catiihi catuhhi 
 
 catuhhhi catuhhi 
 
 Dat. Gen. 
 
 
 catunnam 
 
 catassannam 
 
 Loc. 
 
 
 catusu 
 
 catusu 
 poJica, cha. 
 
 catusu catusu 
 
 
 Masc. Fem. '. 
 
 Xeut. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 
 Norn 
 
 L. 
 
 panca 
 
 cha 
 
 
 Instr. Abl. 
 
 pancrihi 
 
 chahi 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 jjancannam 
 
 channam 
 
 
 Loc. 
 
 
 pancasu 
 
 chasu 
 
 All numerals ending in a are declined in like manner. 
 
 The numerals in i are declined like the fem. in /. 
 
 lohe ekasatthiyd arahantesu jdtesu ' when there were 61 
 arhats in the world ' ; satthim arahatim aka ' made sixty- 
 converts ' ; lendni atthasatthiyo * 68 cells.' 
 
 The gen. and dat. of risam, timsa, ^;f//5i?fZsrt are given 
 respectively as vlsdya, timsdya, paFiiidsdya. 
 
 safam and the higher numerals are declined like neuters in 
 am. In conjunction with nouns the following constructions 
 are frequent : — 
 
 1) With a noun in the gen. plur. : satam muldnam * a 
 huudred roots ' ; acchardnam sahassam * 1000 nymphs.' 
 
 2) As last part of a compound : (jdthdsatain ' a hundred 
 stanzas.' 
 
 3) "With a noun in the sing, in comp. : chachattdllsasatam 
 rassam atikkamma ' after the lapse of 146 years.' 
 
 4) As first part of a compound the whole in the plural : 
 sahassajatild * 1000 jatilas.'
 
 THE ORDINALS. 51 
 
 THE ORDINALS. 
 
 The ordinals are formed from the cardinals by means of 
 suffixes. They are declined like adjectives. The fem. ends, 
 with exception of the first four numerals which form their 
 stems in a diiferent way, in I, the neuter in am. 
 
 For the ordinal of onB, pathamo, pathamd, pathamam is used. 
 
 From dva and U we have dutiyo fem. dutiyd, neut. dutiyam ; 
 tatiyo fem. taiiyCi, neut. tatiyam 
 
 The cardinals for '4,' '5,' '6,' '7' form the ordinals by 
 adding tha : catuttho, pancatho, chaWio, saftho. 
 
 For ' 4 ' a form ttirlyo with the fem. tiinyd occurs. 
 
 Besides the form in tha the suffix ma is added to form the 
 ordinals, ' 5,' ' 6,' ' 7,' and onwards up to ' 99,' e.g. imncamo 
 *5th'; dasamo '10th' ; solasamo '16th'; ekunaclsatimo '19th'; 
 ekavisatimo * 21st ' ; timsatimo ' 3Uth ' ; saffhimo * 60th.* 
 
 Besides these longer forms from 10 upwards, we find an 
 ordinal made from the cardinal by the suffix a : — 
 
 pancadaso '15th'; mo '20th'; ehavlso * 21st ' ; tevlso 
 ' 23rd ' ; ekunatimso ' 29th ' ; timso ' 30th ' ; caUallso ' 40th ' ; 
 panmso ' 50th ' ; saftho ' 60th ' ; sattato ' 70th ' ; aslto ' 80th ' ; 
 navuto ' 90th.' 
 
 The ordinal for 100 is satamo, and with the fuller superlative 
 suffix satatamo, just as for 1000 sahassamo and sahassatamo. 
 
 The fem. of some of the ordinals is used to designate the 
 day of the month, e.g. : — 
 pahcaml ' the fifth day of the half month.' 
 chddasi ' the eleventh day of the half month.' 
 p>ancadasl ' the fifteenth day of the half month.' 
 
 § 21. THE VERB. 
 
 The native grammarians divide the verbs, according to the 
 manner in which the present^ and the tenses and modes which 
 belong to the present system, viz. imperfect, potential and 
 imperative, are formed^ into seven classes. These are called 
 from the verb which serves as prototype for the whole class :
 
 52 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 1) hharadi, i.e. ' bliu and tlie other verbs/ or 'having hhu 
 at the beginning.' 
 
 2) nidhddi. 
 
 3) divddi. 
 
 4) svddi. 
 6) JiiyadL 
 
 6) tanadi. , 
 
 7) curavddi. 
 
 First class : It consists of the following divisions : 
 
 1) The root ending in / or n is gunated, and a added : 
 ijhhu hJiava. 
 
 2) To the root ending in a consonant an a is added, 
 ۥ0- ^/pnc-\-a=^paca 'to cook'; further, ^Jtud 'to gnaw'; 
 y/)iud ' to remove ' ; \/li];h * to write ' ; \/phi(s ' to touch.' 
 
 3) To the root ending in a vowel, the personal endings are 
 added without intervening vowel, e.g. ij yd ' to go.' 
 
 The second class comprises those verbs in which a nasal 
 is inserted before the final consonant of the root. The 
 terminations are added with an intermediate a as in the first 
 class : \J rudh, rundhati ' to restrain.' 
 
 The third class adds ya to the root. The phonetic rules 
 regarding y are applied : ^dii\ dibbati ' to play.' 
 
 The fourth class adds nu nd una to the root : sunoti 
 pdpmidti. 
 
 The fifth class adds nd to the root which ends in a vowel : 
 kindti ' to buy ' ; dhundti ' to shake.' 
 
 The sixth class adds o or u to the root. The root 
 generall}^ ends in a nasal : tanoti, karoti. 
 
 The seventh class adds aya e i to the gunated root : corayati 
 
 Every verb is supposed to have two voices with separate 
 endings : the jjam^srqxidcnn or transitive, and attanopadam or 
 intransitive. The attanop)adam is very restricted in its use, 
 and it is therefore difficult to give the attanopadam for 
 every verb. 
 
 The passive verbs are formed through adding ya to the 
 root and affixing the ending of the attanopadam, or though 
 less frequently of the parassapadani to this base. 
 
 The tenses of the Piili verb are :
 
 THE VERB. 53 
 
 Special tense 
 
 1) Present {vattdmcind), and derived from it two modes: 
 
 Optative {sattaml) ; Imperative (jjancaml) ; and 
 the Participle Present as verbal adjective. 
 
 2) Imp)erfect {hvjattanl). 
 General tenses 
 
 1) Perfect (parok/ihd). 
 
 2) Aorid (ajjatanl). 
 
 3) Future (bhavissanti). 
 
 4) Conditional (kdldfipatti). 
 
 The general tenses often take the basis of the special 
 tenses, and vice versa, 
 
 A verb can appear in different classes without, however, 
 changing its meaning, e.g. tittJiati and thdti * to stand ' ; 
 daddti, deti and dajjati ' to give ' ; vadati, vadeti, vajjati and 
 vajjeti ' to speak.' 
 
 Other roots appear in different classes with a differentiation 
 of meaning, such as, e.g. : \/vid, vidati 'to know'; vindati *to 
 find, to get ' ; and vijjati ' to be, to exist.' 
 
 1) It is needless to advert to the fact that the classes have 
 been made up to a great extent to bring the conjugation of 
 Pali in a closer connection with that of Sanskrit. 
 
 2) The tenses of the Aorist and Imperfect are simply 
 tenses of the past, and it is therefore not advisable to take 
 the Imperfect separately from the Aorist. It is quite true 
 that originally there existed a difference in the meaning 
 between Aorist and Imperfect ; but in the Pali texts, as they 
 lie before us, no such difference can be traced. We shall 
 therefore consider the Imperfect simply as a tense of the past 
 not dependent on the Present system. 
 
 3) The Perfect tense is of rare occurrence. 
 
 I. The Present System. 
 The endings are the following : 
 
 PRESENT PARASSAPADAM. PRESENT ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 1) mi 
 
 1) ma 
 
 1) e 
 
 1) mhe 
 
 2) si 
 
 2) tha 
 
 2) se 
 
 2) vhe 
 
 3) ti 
 
 3) anti 
 
 3) te 
 
 3) ante are
 
 54 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 IMPERATIVE TARASSAPADAM. IMPERATIVE ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 1) mi V) mci \) e 1) dmase 
 
 2) — hi 2) tha 2) mi 2) rho 
 
 3) hi 3) aniu 3) tarn 3) antam 
 
 OPTATIVE PARASSAPADAM. OPTATIVE ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 1) e ojyCuni 1) ei/ijdina 1) cyyam 1) cyydmhe 
 
 2) (? cyydu 2) eyydtha 2) e^Ao 2) eyyavho 
 
 3) e f'y?/« 3) eyyum 3) e^Aa 3) era;« 
 
 We best divide the verbs into the following classes : 
 
 1) Verbs u-hich affix the endings given above tvithout 
 
 intervening rowel. 
 
 2) Reduplicating class. 
 
 3) Nasal class. 
 
 4) a- class. 
 
 5) ya- class. 
 
 I. The Root Class of Sanslcrit grammar. Through the 
 contraction of aya into e, of ava into o, many verbs follow 
 now the analogy of this class. These are either primitive 
 verbs such as j'cti for j'ayati, or derivatives sucK dpddeti for 
 dpddayati. Most of the verbs have forms in other classes. 
 A distinction between strong and weak forms takes place 
 only occasionally. 
 
 We give as paradigms : 
 
 s/i ^ya 
 
 Sing, emi Plu. ema Sing, ydmi Plu. ydma 
 
 „ esi „ etha „ ydsi „ ydtha 
 
 „ eti „ enti, yanti „ ydti „ yanti 
 
 Like emi, semi ' to lie down.' The third person attanopa- 
 dam occurs as 
 
 Sing, sete Plur. sente 
 
 Verbs following the analogy of ydti are, vdti * to blow ' ; 
 pdti ' to protect ' ; bhdti ' to shine.' 
 
 Besides the forms, according to the reduplicating class, 
 of ^/dd ' to give ' and t/id * to stand,' we have deti thdti, 
 which follow the analogy of ydti. 
 
 In the same way a contracted form of verbs in aya, ava 
 follows this class, e.g. :
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 55 
 
 Jioti, a contracted form of hhavati, \/l>hu 'to exist,' which 
 shows the following forms : 
 
 Sing, homi Plur. Jioma 
 „ hosi „ hotJia 
 
 „ hoti „ Jtoitti 
 
 yjhru *to speak' exhibits besides the form bravlti, a con- 
 tracted form hruti. 
 
 Sing, brumi Plur. bruma 
 „ brusi ,, brutlia 
 
 „ bruti „ bravanti 
 
 The jfrTANOPADAM is 
 
 Sing, brave Plur. brhnJie 
 „ bruse „ bruvhe 
 
 „ brute ,, bravante 
 
 The most important verb of this division is ^/as ' to be.' 
 Sing, mmi amhi Plur. asma amha 
 „ asi alii „ attha 
 
 „ atthi „ santi 
 
 Single forms following the first class are, e.g. : 
 III. p. sing, vatti V vac ' to speak,' at the side of vacati 
 and vadati. 
 
 III. p. sing, hanti, ^han * to strike.' 
 
 III. p. pi. duhanti, \J duh ' to milk.' 
 
 III. p. pi. Uhanti, ^Jlili 'to lick.' 
 
 III. p. sing. att. hanute, sjlinu ' to conceal oneself 
 
 II. Eeduplicatiisg Class. 
 
 The present form is formed by prefixing a reduplication 
 to the root. The rules of reduplication are : 
 
 1) The consonant of the reduplicating syllable is always 
 the first consonant of the root. 
 
 2) A non-aspirate is substituted in reduplication for an 
 aspirate. 
 
 3) A palatal is substituted for a guttural or /^.^ 
 
 1 The substitution of the palatals for the gutturals shows that the vowel of the 
 reduplication syllable was uniformly an c, as in Greek.
 
 56 PALI GRAMMAE. 
 
 4) A long Towel is shortened in the reduplicated syllable. 
 Examples of reduplication are : 
 
 daddti, i/dd 'to give.' 
 
 dadJidti, dahuti y/dhd ' to put.' 
 
 tiithdti, y/thd ' to stand.' 
 
 jahdti, y/hd ' to leave.' 
 
 juhoti, y/hu ' to sacrifice.' 
 
 jnbati, or jnrafi \/pd * to drink,' cpr. Lat. hibere. 
 The conjugation is as follows : 
 ' y/dd 
 
 Sing, daddmi 
 
 Plur. damma 
 
 „ daddsi 
 
 „ dattha 
 
 „ daddti 
 
 ,, dadanti 
 
 In analogy with the first pers. plu. a new singular was 
 created, viz. : dammi, dasi, dati. 
 
 Besides these forms we have : 
 
 dajjati according to the ya class. This formation is 
 probably due to the optative. The form deti was noticed 
 above. 
 
 Of the attanopadatn only a few forms can be quoted, viz. : 
 I. sing, dade and I. plur. daddmase. 
 
 yjthd 
 
 Sing, titthdmi Plur. titthdma 
 „ tifjjmsi „ tkdtha titthatha 
 
 „ titthati „ titthanti 
 
 III. The Nasal Class : In it we comprise the verbs of the 
 fourth, fifth and sixth classes of the native grammarians. 
 They form their present stem by adding in the fourth and 
 sixth class no if the root ends in a vowel, o if in n, or as in 
 the case of karoti in r. These verbs add arbitrarily also nd, 
 the class-sign of the fifth class. The few verbs belonging to 
 that class alwaj^s retain the class-sign na. 
 
 As paradigms may serve : 
 
 y/su ' to hear.' 
 Sing, siinomi, sundmi Plur. siinoma, snndma 
 
 „ swiosi, sunad stmdsi „ sunotha, sunatha 
 
 „ siinoii, stmaii „ sunanti
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 57 
 
 In the same way ^ftan 'to stretch.' is conjugated, of which 
 the attanopadam occurs as : 
 
 Sing, tanve Plur. tanumhe 
 
 „ taiiKse „ tanuvhe 
 
 „ tanute „ tanvante 
 
 y/ld ' to buy ' has only the forms in a kindmi. 
 The most important verb belonging to this class is ^/kar 
 * to make.' 
 
 Sing, karomi kummi Plur. karoma 
 
 „ karosi „ karotha 
 
 „ karoti „ karonti 
 
 The attanopadam shows the following forms: 
 Sing, kuhhe 
 
 Plur. 
 
 kuhhase 
 
 kuruse 
 
 kuhhate 
 
 kurute 
 
 kubhhnlie 
 
 kurumhe 
 
 kuhhhvhe 
 
 kiiruvhe 
 
 kuhhante 
 
 kurunte 
 
 kuhbati 
 
 lY. The a Class: The most numerous class of verbs is that 
 which, while gunating the root ending in i or u to ay or av 
 respectively, adds the personal endings with intervening a. 
 Closely connected with this class in Pali are those verbs 
 which add to a consonantal stem a before the endings. 
 Lastly, we have to count among this class those verbs which 
 strengthen the root by a nasal, and add the personal endings 
 with a or less frequently i. 
 
 The first two divisions belong to the first class of the 
 native grammarians, the last division forms the second class. 
 As paradigms we take : 
 
 ^/bhu ' to be, to exist,' 
 Sing, hhavdmi Plur. bhavdma 
 „ bharasi „ bharatha 
 
 „ bhavati „ bhavanti 
 
 The atianopadam is 
 
 Sing, bhave Plur. bhavdmhe 
 
 ,, bliavase „ bhavavhe 
 
 ,, bhavate ,, bJiavante
 
 58 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 A consonantal stem is ^tml 'to push,' which is conjugated 
 exactly like hhavati} 
 
 y/rudh * to restrain ' has the following forms : 
 Sing, rundhdmi and rundhlmi 
 „ rundhasi ,, rundhlsi 
 „ rimdhati „ rundhlti 
 Plur. rundhdma „ rundhlma 
 „ rundhatha „ rundlMha 
 „ rundhanti „ rioidhinti 
 A few verbs form their present tense by adding ccha to the 
 root, e.g. ^J gam 'to go,' gacchdmi. 
 
 There is, however, also a form gamati 'he goes' and 
 ghammati. This latter form can be substituted for all the 
 forms of the verb. Cpr. further hraviti. 
 
 The ya Class : The present tense of this class adds ya 
 to the root. These form the third class of the native 
 
 grammarians. 
 
 Ail tl 
 
 le 
 
 Dhon 
 
 etic rules re 
 
 applied, e.g. : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^Jdiv 
 
 + 
 
 ya 
 
 = dihhati 
 
 
 \/siv 
 
 + 
 
 ya 
 
 = sibhati 
 
 
 \Jyudh 
 
 + 
 
 ya 
 
 = yujjhati 
 
 § 22. MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 1) Imperative : It is formed by adding the endings given 
 on page 54 to the present stem. The second pers. sing. par. 
 sometimes show the mere stems without the characteristic 
 ending. As paradigms may serve : 
 
 ^i ' to go.' 
 I. sing, emi I. plur. ema 
 
 II. ,, ehi II. ,, ctha 
 
 III. „ ctu III. „ enta 
 
 ' The (lilTorcncc between these two conjugations can only be traced in 
 Sanskrit, where the accent is varying.
 
 MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE. 59 
 
 ^as ' to be.' 
 I. sing, asmi I. plur. asma 
 
 II. „ dhi II. „ attJia 
 
 III. „ attim III. „ santu 
 
 ^Jdd ' to give.' 
 An imperative can be formed from all the stems in 
 use, e.g. : 
 
 II. sing, dehi daddhi dajja II. plur. detha daddtJia 
 The attanopadam has the following forms : 
 
 I. sing, dade I. plur. daddmase 
 
 II. „ dadassu II. „ dadavJio 
 
 III. „ dadatam III. „ dadantam 
 
 \/l-r ' to make.' 
 II. sing, kuru karohi II. plur. karotha 
 
 III. 
 
 „ karotu hiirutu III. 
 
 „ kavontu kh 
 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 
 I. 
 
 sing, hihhe I. 
 
 plur. kuhbdmase 
 
 II. 
 
 „ kurussu II. 
 
 „ kunivJio 
 
 III. 
 
 ,, kurutam III. 
 
 „ kubhantam 
 
 II. sing, hhava hhai-dhi II. plur. hhavatha 
 
 III. „ hhavatu III. ,, hhavantu 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 II. sing, bhavassu II. plur. bhavavJio 
 
 III. „ bliamtam III. „ bhavantam 
 
 \Jgam ' to go.' 
 The imperative is formed also from all the stems in use, e.g. : 
 II. sing, gaccka, gaechdhi, gJiamma, ghammuld 
 
 2) Optative : It is formed by adding the endings given 
 on page 54. The endings showed originally only forms 
 commencing with ya. A combination, however, took place 
 in most cases with the final vowel of the stem. These forms 
 could again be contracted into e. 
 As paradigms may serve : 
 
 ■\/bhu. 
 I. sing, heyydmi, bhaveyya I. plur. heyydma 
 huveyya, bhave
 
 60 
 
 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 II. 
 
 sing. 
 
 heyydu 
 
 II. plur. 
 
 heyydtha 
 
 III. 
 
 }} 
 
 hcyya 
 
 III. „ 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 hey yum 
 
 I. 
 
 slug. 
 
 hhave, hhaveyydmi I. plur. 
 
 bhaveyydmhe 
 
 II. 
 
 >) 
 
 hhavetho 
 
 11. „ 
 
 bliaveyyavho 
 
 III. 
 
 » 
 
 hhavetha 
 
 III. „ 
 
 y/as. 
 
 hhaveram. 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 assam 
 
 I. plur. 
 
 assdma 
 
 11. 
 
 >) 
 
 assa 
 
 II. „ 
 
 assatha 
 
 III. 
 
 >> 
 
 assa, siyd 
 
 III. „ 
 
 V//.T- 
 
 assu siyum 
 
 I. 
 
 kare, 
 
 kareyya, k 
 
 ■nhbe, kuhheyya, 
 
 kayird, kayirdmi 
 
 II. 
 
 }) 
 
 kareyycm, 
 
 ,, kubbeyynsi, „ kayirdsi 
 
 III. 
 
 }) 
 
 kareyya, 
 
 „ kubbeyya, 
 
 „ kayird 
 
 I. 
 
 
 kareyydma, 
 
 kuhbeyydn 
 
 m, kayirdma 
 
 II. 
 
 
 kareyydtha, 
 
 kubbetJia, 
 
 kayirdtha 
 
 III. 
 
 
 kareyyam, 
 
 kubbeyam, 
 \/dd. 
 
 kayirum 
 
 Shows the forms 
 
 dajjd, dadeyya, dajjcyya, deyya. 
 
 y/Jnd. 
 jdniya, jamia, jdneyya. 
 
 ^ yarn. 
 gacche, gaccheyya. 
 
 % 23. GENERAL TENSES. 
 The Perfect System. 
 
 The formation of the Perfect is essentially alike in all 
 verbs. The characteristics of the formation are : 1) a stem 
 made by reduplication of the root and endings, unlike those 
 of the present and the other tenses. The rules for redupli- 
 cation are the same as those given for the second conjugation, 
 e.g. : \/ gam=^jagdma. 
 
 The perfect in published texts is of rare occurrence.
 
 GENERAL TENSES. Ql 
 
 The endlnffs are : 
 
 FOR THE PARASSAPADAM. FOR THE ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 I. sing, a I. plur. mha I. sing, i mhe 
 
 11. „ e II. „ ttha II. ,, ttho vJio 
 III. „ a III. „ u III. „ ttha re 
 
 Roots ending in consonants insert an i between stem and 
 consonantal endings. 
 As paradigms may serve : 
 
 ^JbJlU. 
 
 plur. bahhuvimha 
 „ hahhuvittha 
 ,, bahhiivu 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 hahJiiiva I, 
 
 II. 
 
 )f 
 
 hahhure IT, 
 
 III. 
 
 }) 
 
 hahhuca III. 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 hahhuvi 1 
 
 11. 
 
 )} 
 
 bahkurittho II, 
 
 III. 
 
 j> 
 
 hahhuvittha III. 
 
 plur. bahhuvimhe 
 „ babhucivho 
 „ babhuvire 
 
 PARASSAPADAM. 
 
 I. sing, papaca I. plur. papacimha 
 
 11. ,, papace II. „ papaciUha 
 
 III, „ papaca III. „ papacu 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 I. sing, papaci I. plur. papacimhe 
 
 II. „ papacittho II. „ papacivho 
 
 III. „ papacittha III. „ ptapacire 
 
 y/ah Ho speak' is only used in the III. per. sing, and plur. 
 of the perfect. 
 
 III. sing. dJia III. plur. dhamsu and a/m 
 
 § 24. AORIST AND IMPERFECT.^ 
 
 The aorist and imperfect are, as stated above (page 53), 
 blended into one form, partaking of the character of both. 
 The native grammarians are at great pains to give a paradigm 
 
 1 Cpr. H. Oldenberg, Kwhn's Zeitschrift, xsv, 319.
 
 62 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 for both forms, which, however, turns out futile. Moreover, 
 no difference can be made in the syntactic use of the two 
 tenses. 
 
 The paradigm of the native grammarians is for the 
 
 Jtlijattanl (imperfect) : 
 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 
 
 I. sing, a 
 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 am/id 
 
 n. „ 
 
 
 II. 
 
 >> 
 
 attha 
 
 III. „ a 
 
 
 III. 
 
 >> 
 
 u 
 
 
 PAKASSAPADAM. 
 
 
 
 I. sing, im 
 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 mhase 
 
 II. „ se 
 
 
 II. 
 
 j> 
 
 rJiam 
 
 III. „ ttha 
 
 
 III. 
 
 5J 
 
 tthum 
 
 For the ojjatani (aorist) : 
 
 
 
 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 
 
 I. sing, im 
 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 imJih 
 
 II. „ 
 
 
 II. 
 
 J) 
 
 ittha 
 
 III. „ l 
 
 PARASSAT 
 
 HI. 
 
 'ADAM. 
 
 » 
 
 urn imm 
 
 I. sing, a 
 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 imhe 
 
 II. „ ise 
 
 
 II. 
 
 >> 
 
 ivham 
 
 III. „ a 
 
 
 III. 
 
 >) 
 
 u 
 
 We can distinguish altogether three different formations 
 in Piili. The augment a is in prose generally put before the 
 verb. In verse it is omitted according to the exigencies of 
 the metre. "With the negative particle >nd the aorist is used 
 as an imperative. 
 
 First Formation. 
 
 
 
 
 PARA8SAPADAM. 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 am 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 amha 
 
 II. 
 
 j> 
 
 a, 
 
 II. 
 
 )} 
 
 attha 
 
 III. 
 
 » 
 
 a 
 
 III. 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 )) 
 
 nm 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 — 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 dmhase 
 
 II. 
 
 >> 
 
 ase 
 
 II. 
 
 >> 
 
 avham 
 
 III. 
 
 >» 
 
 attha 
 
 III. 
 
 )> 
 
 at t hum 
 
 The nasal in the first pers. sing. plur. is often omitted.
 
 AORIST AND IMPERFECT. 63 
 
 Only verbs in consonants form their preterite according to 
 this formation. Its use is very limited. This formation can 
 be considered as an imperfect if it is used with the present 
 stem. 
 
 Second Formation. 
 
 im 
 
 isum 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 IL 
 
 >) 
 
 III. 
 
 J5 
 
 I. 
 
 sing, 
 
 IL 
 
 jj 
 
 III. 
 
 j> 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 1 1)1 ha 
 
 II. 
 
 j> 
 
 ittha 
 
 III. 
 
 )i 
 
 inisu 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 imJie 
 
 II. 
 
 )> 
 
 ivham 
 
 .. - HI. ;; - 
 
 This form is regularly used for all stems ending in con- 
 sonants. For the first pers. sing, we find in verse some- 
 times the endings imm and ismm according to the analogy 
 of Sanskrit. 
 
 Thied Formation. 
 
 The third form of the aorist is an s aorist. The forms are : 
 
 PARASSAPADAM. 
 
 I. sing, mn simha 
 II. „ si siltka 
 
 III. „ si sum 
 
 This formation is used for the verbs ending in vowels. 
 Some verbs ending in consonants follow this analogy, 
 and then, of course, all phonetic change takes place. 
 Causatives follow the analogy of this aorist after contracting 
 aija into e. 
 
 Besides these some forms occur which date back to a 
 formation anterior to the fixing of Piili. 
 
 Many verbs appear in all the three formations. 
 The following paradigms will illustrate the different 
 formations : 
 
 ^/hJ^u. 
 I. sing, ahliavam I. plur. ahhavamhd 
 
 II. ,, ahhaco II. ,, ahhavatiha
 
 64 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 
 III. 
 
 sing. 
 
 abhaid 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 plur. 
 
 ahhavu 
 
 I. 
 
 )> 
 
 ahuvani 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 )> 
 
 aJiuvamhd 
 
 IL 
 
 )} 
 
 ahuvo 
 
 
 
 II. 
 
 5> 
 
 ahuvattha 
 
 III. 
 
 >> 
 
 aJiucd 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 )) 
 
 — 
 
 I. 
 
 )> 
 
 ahosim 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 >> 
 
 — 
 
 II. 
 
 >> 
 
 ahosi 
 
 
 
 II. 
 
 5> 
 
 — 
 
 III. 
 
 M 
 
 a/iosi 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 >> 
 
 a/iesum 
 
 I. 
 
 JJ 
 
 ahhanm 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 )> 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 >> 
 
 altumhd 
 
 III. 
 
 )> 
 
 ahu aha 
 
 before 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vowels aJiitd 
 
 
 III. 
 
 5> 
 
 ahum 
 
 
 
 
 
 y/dd 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 adadam, 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 )> 
 
 add, etc. 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 plur. 
 
 adiim 
 
 I. 
 
 i> 
 
 addsim 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 j> 
 
 adasimha 
 
 II. 
 
 }> 
 
 addsi 
 
 
 
 II. 
 
 >> 
 
 adasittha 
 
 III. 
 
 >j 
 
 addst 
 
 
 Vh 
 
 III. 
 
 )> 
 
 addsiim adamsu 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 akaram, 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 >j 
 
 akddm akdsi, 
 
 etc. 
 
 III. 
 
 plur. 
 
 alidsum 
 
 I. 
 
 jj 
 
 akd 
 
 
 { 
 
 II. 
 III. 
 
 
 akattha 
 akamsu 
 
 I. 
 
 )} 
 
 akarim, etc. 
 
 
 III. 
 
 J5 
 
 akarum akarimsu 
 
 
 
 
 
 \/as 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 dsitn 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 dsimha 
 
 IL 
 
 )> 
 
 dsi 
 
 
 
 II. 
 
 » 
 
 dsittha 
 
 III. 
 
 jj 
 
 dsi 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 >) 
 
 dsnm dsimsu 
 
 
 
 
 
 \/gam. 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 again 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 agumha 
 
 II. 
 
 >> 
 
 agd 
 
 
 
 II. 
 
 j> 
 
 aguttha 
 
 III. 
 
 }f 
 
 agd 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 >> 
 
 agum 
 
 I. 
 
 }> 
 
 agamd 
 
 agamim 
 
 
 
 
 II. 
 
 >> 
 
 
 agami 
 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 )) 
 
 agami 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 )> 
 
 agacchi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 j> 
 
 aganchhn 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 >> 
 
 aganchimhd
 
 AORIST AND IMrERFECT. 65 
 
 II. sing. (Kjahcld agancho II. plur. aganchiltha 
 III. „ (Kjanchi III. „ arjanchimsu 
 
 II. and III. sing, agacchisi 
 
 
 
 
 y/vac. 
 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 avacd 
 
 II. 
 
 per. plur. avacuttha 
 
 I. 
 
 j> 
 
 ai'ocam 
 
 11. 
 
 „ avocatha 
 
 III. 
 
 j> 
 
 avoca 
 
 III. 
 
 y/khh. 
 
 plur. avocum 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 alattham 
 
 I. 
 
 sing, alahhim 
 
 II. 
 
 3> 
 
 alattha 
 
 11. 
 
 „ alabhi 
 
 III. 
 
 J) 
 
 alattha 
 
 III. 
 
 „ alabhi 
 
 After contracting c/yrt into e, the aorist of the causatives is 
 also formed according to the third formation : — 
 
 I. sing, acoresim I. plur. acoresimha 
 
 II. ,, acoresi II. ,, acoresittha 
 
 III. ,, acoresi III. „ acoresiim 
 
 In roots ending in consonants s influences the last letter as 
 usual, e.g. : aclakkhi from passati ' to see,' but also ajxissi ; 
 ahhocchi from Icosati ' to revile,' but also akkosi. 
 
 Of forms in issam or isam, I. pers. sing, second formation, 
 we notice sandhdvissam, paccavekkhimm., gacchisam, vamlissam, 
 etc. 
 
 For the attanopadam the paradigm is the following : 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 — 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 abhavdmhase 
 
 II. 
 
 J) 
 
 abhavase 
 
 11. 
 
 
 ahhavham 
 
 III. 
 
 >j 
 
 abhavattha 
 
 III. 
 
 
 ahhamtthum 
 
 I. 
 
 )> 
 
 — 
 
 I. 
 
 
 ahhavimhe 
 
 II. 
 
 J) 
 
 ahhavise 
 
 II. 
 
 
 abhavivham 
 
 III. 
 
 >> 
 
 abhavittha 
 
 III. 
 
 
 — 
 
 The attanopadam is of rare occurrence, and only a few 
 forms can be given : 
 
 II. pers. sing, atimawuttho 
 I. pers. plur. akardmhase
 
 GG 
 
 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 § 25. FUTUEE. 
 
 The tense sign is ss, wliich is added to the root directly, or 
 by the auxiliary vowel i. The endings are : 
 
 FOR THE PARASSAPADAM. 
 
 I. sing, ssdmi I. plur. ssdma 
 
 II. „ ssasi II. „ ssafha 
 
 III. „ ssati III. ,, ssanti 
 
 FOR THE ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 I. sing, ssam I. plur. ssamhe 
 
 II. „ ssasse II. „ ssavhe 
 
 III. „ ssafe III. „ ssante (ssare) 
 
 The form to which these endings are added is mostly the 
 strengthened. They can, however, also be added to the 
 special base. 
 
 PARASSAPADAM. 
 
 I. sing. hJiavissdmi I. plur. hhavissdma 
 
 II. „ bhavissasi II. „ hhavissatlia 
 
 III. „ bhavissati III. ,, hhavissanti 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 I. sing, bhavissam 
 II. „ bbavissasse 
 III. ,, bhavissate 
 
 I. plur. bhavisshmhe 
 II. „ bhavissavhe 
 III. ,, bltavissante {bha' 
 fissarc) 
 The ss being added without intermediate vowel affects of 
 course the preceding consonant : dahhhati to passati ' to see ' ; 
 saMliitc to sahkoti ' to be able.' 
 
 A misunderstanding of these forms gave rise to the forma- 
 tions daJxkhissati and sahkJii ssati, with a double future sign. 
 
 Cpr. further lacchati to labhati 'to take'; chcccltati to chindati 
 * to cut ; ' bliejjati to bhindati * to break.' 
 
 Forms with auxiliary vowel are also in use, e.g. : labhissati. 
 From the special tense we have futures like gacchissati to 
 gacchati, but also gamissafi; juJiossati,juhissati to j'u/iotl. 
 karoti has besides the future karissati, a contracted form ; 
 I. sing, kdhdmi I. plur. kdhdma 
 
 II. ,, kdhasi kdhisi II. „ kdhatha 
 
 III. ,, kdkati kdhiti III. ,, kdhanti kahinti
 
 CONDITIONAL. 67 
 
 In the same way etl 'to go ' has, besides the future 
 essati, ehiti. 
 
 The contracted form hoti from hhavati shows the following 
 forms : 
 
 I. sing, hemi, hehdmi, hohCimi^ hessdmi, hehissdmi, hohismmi. 
 II. „ hesi, hehisi, Jiohisl, hessasi, he/ussasi, hohissasi, 
 III. „ heti, hetiti, Jiotiti, kessati, hehissati, hoJmsati. 
 
 I. phir. hema, lielidma., Jwhdma, hessdma, hehissdma, hO' 
 hissdma. 
 II. „ het/m, hehiffha, hohittha, hessatha, hehissatha, 
 Jiohismtha. 
 III. „ hentl, hehinti, hohinti, hessanti, hehissanti, Jiohissanti. 
 From ^/su ' to hear ' future att. sussam, -s/dd dassati and 
 att. dassam, 
 
 § 26. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 From the future stem is made an augment preterite by 
 prefixing the augment a and adding the secondary endings : 
 
 PARASSAPADAM. 
 
 I. plur. ssdnihd 
 II. „ ssatha 
 III. ,, ssamsii 
 
 1. 
 
 smg. 
 
 ssam 
 
 II. 
 
 j> 
 
 sse (ssa) 
 
 III. 
 
 » 
 
 ssd (ssa) 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 ssani 
 
 11. 
 
 >> 
 
 ssase 
 
 III. 
 
 )> 
 
 ssatha 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 I. plur. sschnhase 
 II. „ smvhe 
 III. ,, ssiinsu 
 The endings are added with or without intervening {. 
 The paradigm is : 
 
 
 
 PARASSAPADAM. 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 ahhavissam 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 abhavissdmhd 
 
 II. 
 
 >> 
 
 abhavissa °sse 
 
 II. 
 
 jj 
 
 ahhavissatha 
 
 III. 
 
 j> 
 
 abhavissa °ssd 
 
 III. 
 
 » 
 
 abhavissamsu 
 
 
 
 ATTANOPADAM. 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 sing. 
 
 abhavissam 
 
 I. 
 
 plur. 
 
 abhavissdmJtase 
 
 II. 
 
 j> 
 
 abhavissase 
 
 II. 
 
 >) 
 
 abhavissavhe 
 
 III. 
 
 >> 
 
 abhanssatha 
 
 III. 
 
 >> 
 
 nbhavissimsu
 
 G8 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 § 27. DERIVATIVE CONJUOATION. 
 
 The derivative conjugation may be divided under five 
 headings : 
 
 I. Passive: It is formed through adding ya to the weakest 
 form. The endings are those of the attanopadam, but also 
 those of the parmsajjadam occur, y aifects a preceding con- 
 sonant in the usual way. In a few instances iya is added 
 instead of ya, and the endings of the passives are added to 
 the present active. 
 
 Opr. e.g. : ucchate ruccati from y/vao * to speak ' ; russati 
 mslyati from v'rr/s * to dwell.' kayyati kariyati kariyyati 
 kayirati are given as passive to karoti. diyati from ^/dd ' to 
 give'; ihlyate from \/tJid 'to stand'; gconyate, gamiyaii 
 gacclnyate \J gam * to go ' ; gheppati and gayhati to ganhati 
 ' to take.' 
 
 II. The Intensive or Frequentative is formed by 
 reduplication. Its conjugation is in accordance with the 
 second conjugational class, the reduplication, however, is 
 peculiar. 
 
 The reduplicating syllable is composed of a single con- 
 sonant with a heavy vowel : Udappati ' to lament ' ; ddddallati 
 ' to blaze.' 
 
 The reduplicating syllable has a fiaal consonant taken from 
 the end of the root. This consonant is a nasal which 
 substitutes any other consonant ; cahkamati jaugamati 
 caucalati. 
 
 Not many instances of the intensive are met with. 
 
 III. The Desiderative : The desiderative stem is formed 
 from the simple root by the addition of a reduplication and 
 by an appended sa. This sa affects of course the preceding 
 consonants. Some roots form an abbreviated stem by a con- 
 traction of reduplication and root together in one syllable. 
 Examples are, huhJnikkati, y/hhiij; jncdsati, \Jpd\ nmammti 
 for m'lmams ; jigimscdi, \//ir ; dicc/iati, ^/dd. 
 
 IV. The Causative : From every root can be formed 
 a causative ; this is done by affixing aya to the strengthened
 
 TARTICirLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS. 69 
 
 root. The native grammarians range these verbs under the 
 seventh class. 
 
 This aya can optionally be contracted into e. Besides this 
 formation, another is in use : apaya contracted into ape is 
 added to the root. A differentiation of meaning is sometimes 
 to be traced. 
 
 If contracted into e, the conjugation follows of course the 
 first conjugational class; the forms in aya and apaya are 
 conjugated like bhavati 
 
 As causative of ^gam *' to go ' are given gamayati, gamcti 
 gacchapeti, gacchdpayati', ^ han 'to kill' has haneti, ghdteti. 
 
 Y. Denominatives : From every noun may be formed 
 a denominative. The sufiixes employed are : aya, aya, lya. 
 e.g. : ciccitdyati * to splash ' ; puttiyati ' to treat as a son.' 
 
 § 28. PARTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS. 
 
 1) The Participle Present is formed by the suffixes at 
 and anta, which are added to the present stem, e.g. : gacchanto 
 gaccham (see above, page 38). In the same way these suflB.xes 
 are added to the future stem, to form 2) Participle Future. 
 
 In the same way the suffixes mdna and ana are used for 
 the Present Participle Attanopada. 
 
 3) Of the Perfect Participle in vams only a few 
 doubtful traces are left, vidu and viddasu for vidvams. 
 
 4) The Past Participle Passive is formed by the suffixes 
 ta and na, which are added directly to the root or through 
 an intervening vowel i. Of course all phonetic changes 
 take place : — 
 
 hato 'made'; gato 'gone'; iechito 'wished'; phiiffho 
 ' touched ' ; laddho ' taken ' ; rufto * spoken ' ; vapito and vuffo 
 ' shaven' ; diiiiio ' given.' 
 
 5) From the Past Participle Passive is formed a 
 secondary derivative with the meaning of a Past Active 
 Participle by adding the suffixes mt, vant, e.g. : 
 
 hutavd hutavanto 'having sacrificed'; manditavd, mandita- 
 vanfo 'having adorned ' ; hhuttavd ' having eaten.' 
 
 II. Gerundives : The suffixes by which gerundives are
 
 70 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 regularly and ordinarily formed are : ya tavya {tahha tayya) 
 anlya. They are joined with or without intervening vowel /. 
 e.g.: bhabbo for bhavyo; karanlyo kdriyo kayyo kayiro kattabbo 
 * that ought to be done ' ; ddtayyo ddtabbo ddtabyo * that 
 ought to be given.' 
 
 III. Gerunds : The gerund is formed by the suffixes tvd 
 ya tvdna and tuna. They take arbitrarily the vowel i 
 between root and ending. Sometimes the suffixes ya and tvd 
 are united into one. 
 Eemarkable forms are : 
 
 datthu and disvd ' having seen.' 
 anuvicca „ ff>i7«vf///ra 'having known.' 
 dhacca „ dhanitvd ' having thrown.' 
 
 papptiyya „ jxlpayifvd * having obtained.' 
 vineyya „ fimiyitrd ' having laid aside.' 
 nicc/icyya * having ascertained.' 
 Cpr. further : passitvdna and passituna * having seen.' 
 
 afisitm and atikkamitrd 'having approached.' 
 datvd, ddya, dad i tvd * having given.' 
 katvdna, kdtuna ' having made.' 
 gayha, gaiihiya, ganJiitvd ' having taken.' 
 
 lY. Infinitives : They are formed by the suffixes tton 
 tave, and rarely tuye. The infinitive can be formed from the 
 special base, or from the root ; in both cases an i is 
 arbitrarily inserted : 
 
 e.g. gantum * to go ' ; laddhum * to take ' ; vadltum ' to 
 speak ' ; sunitum and sotave * to hear ' ; vippahatave * to give 
 up ' ; ganetuye ' to count.' 
 
 § 29. INDECLINABLES. 
 
 I. Adverbs. 
 
 ADVERBS formed' BY SUFFIXES. 
 
 Classes of adverbs are formed by the addition of adverbial 
 suffixes not onl}^ to pronominal roots or stems, but also to 
 noun and adjective stems.
 
 INDECLINABLES. 71 
 
 Most of these suffixes belong to a time anterior to the 
 fixing of the Pali, as a comparison with Sanskrit and the 
 cognate languages will show. 
 
 1) to standing for an original tas. It gives to the word 
 to which it is added mostly an ablative sense, but sometimes 
 also a local. It may be added to pronouns, prepositions 
 and nouns. In the last case it is regarded as the regular 
 substitute for the termination of the ablative (see page 41). 
 
 Examples are from pronominal stems : ato ' hence ' ; ito 
 
 * here ' ; tato ' from that place ' ; jjato ' from what ' ; etc. 
 
 2) From prepositions ; abhito * near ' ; parato ' further.' 
 
 3) From noun and adjective stems: aggato 'before'; 
 dalildihudo 'on the south'; sabbafo 'from every side'; 
 jnffhiio ' from the back ' ; 2^itifo 'on the father's side.' 
 
 II. Adverbs of a local sense are formed by an original ira. 
 This fra is either preserved or assimilated to tta or ttha 
 (page 16). It is added to pronominal roots and nouns. 
 Examples are : 
 
 1) atra, attJia ' here ' ; iatm and tattlia ' there ' ; hutra and 
 huttha ' where.' 2) annatra and annaWia 'elsewhere' ; ubha-, 
 yattha, ubhayatta ' in both places.' 
 
 dim and assimilated ha also form adverbs with a local sense. 
 The forms are used promiscuously: iha and idha 'here.' 
 
 Interchangeable with this last suffix are : ham and him 
 also forming local adverbs ; kiihim, kuham, kaham ' where ' ; 
 taham, tahim 'there'; yahim 'where.' 
 
 III. Adverbs of manner are formed by means of the 
 suffix thd mostly from pronominal roots : tatha ' so ' ; yathd 
 ' as ' ; but also from adjectives, e.g. sabbathd ' in every way ' ; 
 aJimthd ' in another way.' 
 
 By means of the suffix ti or iti. This adverb is very 
 extensively used in cases of indirect narrative, or of 
 enumeration, or of quoting the words and thoughts of others. 
 
 By means of the suffix va or iva ' like as.' By the side of 
 iva also viya and va. The former seems a metathesis of iva ; 
 eva and yeva, heva ' just, even ' ; evam related to eva 
 
 * thus ' ; kiva ' how ? ' 
 
 IV. Adverbs of time are formed by means of the suffix da : —
 
 72 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 licidd ' when ? ' ; yadd ' whenever ' ; sadd and sahhadd 
 ' always.' 
 
 Helated to da seems di in yadi ' if.' 
 
 2. By means of the compound suffix : ddni, ddnim for 
 ddnlm. iddni, iddnim ' now ' ; taddni, taddnim ' then.' 
 
 3. By means of the suffix rahi (Skr. rhi) : etarahi, and 
 seldom etarlii 'now ' ; tarahi 'then.' 
 
 V. By means of the suffix dhd are formed adverbs, 
 especially from numerals, signifying * fold, times.' 
 
 Cpr. e/xcid/id, etc. ' in one way ' ; hahudhd ' in many ways ' ; 
 sahhadJtd ' everywhere.' Sometimes we find the suffix dhi 
 used with the same sense : sabhadhi (see page 49). 
 
 VI. Adverbs of quantity, or measure, or manner, are 
 formed by means of the suffix so, Skr. cas. e.g. : ba/iuso 
 ' greatly ' ; paFicaso ' by fives ' ; akkharaso * letter by letter ' ; 
 atthaso ' according to the sense.' 
 
 YII. Case Forms used as Adverbs. 
 
 A large number of adverbs have case-suffixes, from stems 
 which are or are not otherwise in use. 
 
 1) The Accusative : yam with the meaning of ' that, as, 
 became ' ; ta)n {tad) ' there, thither ' ; Ja'm ' why ' ; idain 
 * here.' 
 
 Compounded with id we have cid=ca-\-id: ce 'even,' and 
 then after false analogy noce ' if not ' instead of ne. 
 
 Noun and adjective stems so used are : — 
 
 ndina ' by name ' ; raho ' secretly ' ; rattam * at night ' ; 
 saccam 'in truth'; niccam 'always'; ciram 'long'; hhtijo 
 'again.' 
 
 As accusatives of nouns and adjectives we must also con- 
 sider several adverbs of obscure connection which go back 
 like most of the preceding in their formation to a period 
 anterior to Pali. 
 
 e.g. : tunhl ' silently ' ; sdyam ' in the evening ' ; aram 
 ' speedily ' ; alam ' enough ' ; 7nit/io and mithit ' mutually ' ; 
 sammd ' fully ' ; sajju ' instantly ' ; lsa?n ' a little.' 
 
 2) The Instrumental : Most of the pronominal adjective 
 and noun-stems noticed under ace. occur in adverbial use : —
 
 INDECLINABLES. 73 
 
 yena 'because, for wliicli'; dakldmiena 'on the south'; 
 cirena ' after a long time ' ; died ' by day ' ; amd ' with.' 
 
 3) The Dative : It is less extensively used in an adverbial 
 sense, e.g. : cirdya ' for a long time ' ; sukhdya * for the 
 benefit' ; hitdya ' for the benefit.' 
 
 4) The Ablative : Most of the pronominal stems are 
 used adverbially, e.g. : yasmd ' because ' ; kasmd * why ? ' ; 
 durd, drd 'far oS"' ; hetthd 'under, below' ; pacchd ' behind.' 
 
 The original of the ablative d is of necessity lost in Pali. 
 
 5) The Genitive : Its use is very limited, e.g. : kissa 
 ' why ? ' ; cirassa 'long ' ; /tetu and heto ' on account of 
 
 6) The Locative : Forms adverbially used are, e.g. : hhim 
 ' on the earth ' ; are, dure ' after.' 
 
 II. Prepositions. 
 
 Under the name of upasagga (prepositions) the native 
 grammarians comprise a number of twenty words, which 
 modify the meaning of the verb or substantive to which 
 they are added. 
 
 Put in alphabetical order they are as follows : 
 
 •\dti 'over, beyond.' 
 
 fadhi 'above, over, superior to.' 
 
 fanu 'after, under, less than.' 
 
 f apa ' away, from.' 
 
 apt ' near, close by.' 
 
 abhi 'to, unto, against.' 
 
 am 'away, down, oft.' 
 fa ' until, as far as.' 
 
 u nd ' upwards, above.' 
 "[upa 'below, less.' 
 
 du 'hardly.' 
 
 nir ' downwards.' 
 
 ni {nir) ' outward.' 
 
 pa 'forward, onward.' 
 "f pa fi or paii 'towards.' 
 
 pard ' away, aside, back.' 
 
 2)ari ' around, about.'
 
 74 PALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 vi ' apart, asunder.' 
 sam * with, together.' 
 su ' well.' 
 To these words must be added a few others, which are 
 equally' combined with verbs and nouns, but are of a more 
 limited use, such as : 
 fanto antara 'within.' 
 t«a 'manifestly, close.' 
 ■\tiro ' across, beyond.' 
 
 pdtii * manifestly.' 
 These are mainly used irt composition with the verbs as, 
 l/iii, At. 
 
 All of the above-mentioned particles and adverbs 
 marked t are used as prepositions, and govern nouns. To 
 these must be added a few words, which are used like 
 modern prepositions and adverbs and only comparatively 
 seldom in combination with verbs and nouns, e.g. : 
 adho ' below.' 
 
 uddham iihbham ' upwards.' 
 tiriyam 'across.' 
 paccha 'behind.' 
 param 'beyond, after.' 
 purd ' before.' 
 bahi ' outwards.' 
 rite ' except.' 
 vind ' without.' 
 saha, samam, saddJiim ' with.' 
 
 § 30. COMPOUNDS. 
 
 1) Stems which admit of inflection are, as in other 
 languages, combined to form compounds, which are treated as 
 if simple in respect to inflection and construction.
 
 COMPOUNDS. 75 
 
 2) As regards compounds, seldom more than two or three 
 stems are combined in the older language ; but, as in 
 Sanskrit, the later the language is, the more compounds, 
 and cumbrous compounds prevail. 
 
 3) It is of course difficult to determine which compounds 
 Pali has formed itself, and which it has in common with 
 other Indian languages. A sort of criterion is, if we 
 find words compounded according to rules which are no more 
 in abeyance in Pali ; but even that does not prove con- 
 clusively that a compound belongs as commonwealth to the 
 Indian languages. 
 
 e.g. : sapjmnso Skr. satpurusha ' a good man * ; pulUhgam 
 Skr. pumlinga * manhood,' for which in later Pali we find 
 ^yumalingam. 
 
 4) These compounds may be divided into three principal 
 classes : 
 
 I. Copulative or Aggregative Compounds {dvandva). 
 
 The members are coordinate ; in uncompounded condition 
 they would be joined with ca ' and.' Examples are very 
 numerous. 
 
 The whole has the gender and declension of its last 
 member, and is in number a plural, e.g. : elaka-miga-sukara- 
 paJikhino. 
 
 The compound, without regard to the number denoted or 
 the gender of its constituents, becomes a singular collective. 
 The gender is mostly neuter. 
 
 e.g. : hiriottappam = hiri -f ottappam 
 ndmarujjam = ndmam + rupam 
 ^ dd^iddsam' = ddsi + ddso 
 
 ahoratto, alioratti, ahorattam 
 knsaldhusalam, dhanimddhammo, but also as a 
 plural dhammddhammd. 
 Pumd * a male ' has two bases in composition : puma and 
 piim : of the former we have itthipumam ' male and female ' ; 
 of the latter pumittJd 'masculine and feminine.' 
 
 Nouns, adjectives and particles are not infrequently
 
 76 TALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 repeated to give an intensive or distributive repetitional 
 meaning, e.g. : 
 
 divase divase ' day after day ' ; gamagdmam ' village after 
 ViW^^e^ \ anhamanham ' rmxtusMy' ; punajnimim 'again and 
 again.' 
 
 II. Determinative Compounds {tappurisd). 
 
 There are two divisions : 
 
 1) Dependent compounds = the tajijmrisa proper, in which 
 the prior member is a substantive word standing to the other 
 in the relation of a case dependent on it. 
 
 2) Descriptive com-ponnds^^l-ainmad/idrai/a, in which the 
 prior member is an adjective, or another word having the 
 value of an adjective qualifying a noun. 
 
 I. Dependent Compounds. 
 
 They can of course be used either substantively or 
 adjectively. The case relation may be of any kind. 
 
 brahmaloJiO ' Brahma world ' ; padodakam ' water for the 
 feet ' ; accharasamhhavo * descent from a nymph ' ; saccavddl 
 ' truthful ' ; dhammadharo ' versed in the law ' ; sarandgama- 
 nam * going for refuge ' ; veddgu * versed in the law ' ; 
 jaccandho ' born blind ' ; apahbcijitasadiso ' like one who has 
 given up the world ' ; tadiso * like him ' ; viddiso * like me ' ; 
 thdhpaMo ' cooked in a pot.' 
 
 The order of the members which form such compounds 
 may be inversed : addhaindso and mdsaddho * half a month ' ; 
 pitdmaJio * a grandfather.' 
 
 Rdjan, sakhd {sak/ii), if employed as last members of a 
 compound, exhibit all the forms known from the declension. 
 As first member of a compound rdJan has the base rdjd ; the 
 only form allowed in the nom. case as last member is rdJd : 
 rujab/iai/am ' fear from a king ' ; Komiardjd ' king of Kosala.' 
 
 Sometimes stems not in use as simple words are employed 
 as first members. This looks as if a declined stem has 
 been used ; but the dependency is not always such as to 
 favour such an explanation, e.g. : maiiasikdro ' attention.'
 
 COMPOUNDS. 77 
 
 II. Descriptive Compounds {kammadharaya). 
 
 It is of course sometimes difficult to say whether the com- 
 pound is tappurum or hammadhdrcuja. 
 
 mahanto 'great' takes in composition the weak forms mahd 
 and mahat, santo ' being, good, true,' the weak form sat. 
 
 Examples are : nlluppalam ' blue lotus ' ; sahbaseto * all 
 yflaiiQ' ', piyanivado 'speaking kindly'; rajassald 'amenstruous 
 woman'; sappiirt'so 'a good man'; saddhammo 'good doctrine' 
 mnliapphalo ' very fruitful ' ; mahdpunho ' great virtue ' 
 mahesi 'great sage'; hetup>pahhavo 'proceeding from a cause' 
 Mcchurakhasd ' scab.' 
 
 The adverbial words which are most frequently and 
 commonly used as prior members of compounds are : rr, an, 
 ana ' the negative particle ' ; su ' well ' ; dus ' badly ' ; sa 
 ' with.' e.g. : asankhato ' the unconditioned ' ; anano ' free 
 from debt ' ; duppuro ' difficult to fill ' ; sucinno ' well done ' ; 
 saseno ' with an army ' ; salajjo ' ashamed.' 
 
 kit as former part of many compounds designates inferiority. 
 It takes the forms : kud, kad, ku, e.g. : kunnadl ' an in- 
 significant river ' ; kadannam ' bad food ' ; kuditflil ' wrong 
 view.' 
 
 Closely related to the preceding class are III. the 
 Numeral Compounds {digu). The whole is made a neuter 
 singular. 
 
 A sample of this sort of compound is digit, 'itself worth 
 two cows ' ; further tidandam ' three staves ' ; tklvarani 
 ' three robes ' ; tlhani ' three days.' 
 
 IV. Adverbial Compounds {ahyaylbhdva). 
 
 They are also closely related to the Determinative com- 
 pounds. They are formed in joining prepositions and 
 adverbs to a noun, and are then used as abstracts, collectives, 
 and simply adverbially : yathdrucim ' according to one's 
 pleasure ' ; but yatJidnicito ' as liked, pleasant ' ; yaihdmato 
 
 * as if dead ' ; sampahdro ' wounding ' ; samjmja/imiii 
 
 * consciousness ' ; apacdro ' approach.'
 
 78 I'ALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 V. All the preceding compounds may be used adjectively, 
 and are then called: BaJinbhlJil, e.g.: rliardgo' ' hee from 
 passion ' ; but puruso vltardgo ' a man free from passion, an 
 arhat ' ; paficacakkhu ■ the five sorts of vision ' ; but as an 
 epithet of the Buddha, pancacakkhu ' man possessing the five 
 sorts of vision ' ; anupuhham ' regular succession ' ; but 
 anupuhbo * regular, successive' ; anupuhho nirodho 'successive 
 destruction.' 
 
 In a few cases compounds are formed from words not 
 usually put together, e.g. of adverbs. 
 
 vitatho 'false, unveai' =-vi-\-tatha ', yathdtatho 'real, true' = 
 yathd-\-tathd. e.g. of a phrase : itilidHO ' tradition'; itivuttam 
 or itivutta'kam ' name of a book, a legend ' ; ahamahamikam 
 * conceit of superiority '=zahain-\-aham. 
 
 All these compounds were formed before Pali became 
 a literary dialect.
 
 HANDBOOK OF PALI. 
 
 II. CHRESTOMATHY.
 
 THE PARITTAM, BEING EXTRACTS 
 FROM THE SUTTA PITAKAM. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Buddham saranam gacchami. 
 Dhammam saranam gacchami. 
 Saiigliam saranam gacchami. 
 Dutiyam pi Buddham saranam gaccliami. 
 Dutiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami. 
 Dutiyam pi Sanghara saranam gacchami. 
 Tatiyam pi Buddham saranam gacchami. 
 Tatiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami. 
 Tatiyam pi Sanghara saranam gacchami. 
 
 SARANAGAMAXAM. 
 
 1) Panatipata veramani sikkhapadam. 
 
 
 2) Adinnadana veramani sikkhapadam. 
 
 3) Abrahmacariya veramani sikkhapadam. 
 
 4) Musavada veramani sikkhapadam. 
 
 5) Sura-meraya-majja-pamadatthaaa veramani sikkha- 
 padam. 
 
 6) Vikalabhojaua veramani sikkhapadam. 
 
 7) Nacca-glta-vadita-visukadassana veramani sikkhapadam. 
 
 8) Mala-gandha-vilepana-dharana-mandana-vibhusanatthii- 
 na veramani sikkhapadam. 
 
 6
 
 82 SAMANERAPANHA. DYATTIMSAKARA. 
 
 9) UccJIsa)\ana-ma]iasaYana veramani sikkhiipadam. 
 
 10) JataiTipa-rajata-patiggahanii veramani sikkhiipadara. 
 
 D A S A S I K K 11 A P A D A N I . 
 
 * Eka nama kim ? ' " Sabbe sattii aliarattbitikii." 
 ' Dve niima kim ? ' " Niimafica iTipanca." 
 
 ' Tini nama kim ? ' " Tisso vedanii." 
 
 ' Cattari nama kim ? ' " Cattiiri ariyasaccilni." 
 
 * Pafica niima kim ? ' " Pane' upadiinakkhandba." 
 
 ' Cba nama kim ? ' " Cba ajjbattikani ayatanani." 
 
 * Satta niima kim ? ' " Satta bojjbariga." 
 
 ' Attba nama kim ? ' " Ariyo attbarigiko maggo." 
 *Nava nama kim ? ' " Nava sattii viisa." 
 
 * Dasa nama kim ? ' " Dasab' angebi samanniigato arabati 
 vuceati ti." 
 
 SAMANERAPANHAM. 
 
 Attbi imasmim kiiye : kesii, lomii, nakbii, dantii, taco, 
 mamsam, nabiiru, attbl, attbirainjii, vakkam, badayam, 
 yakanam, kilomakam, pibakam, pappbiisam, antam, antagu- 
 nam, udari^'ain, karlsara, pittam, sembain, pubbo, loliitara, 
 sedo, medo, assu, vasii, kbelo, singbiinikii, lasika, muttara, 
 mattbake mattbalungan ti. 
 
 D Y A T T I M S A K A R A M . 
 
 Patisankbii yoniso elvaram patisevilmi yiivad eva sitassa 
 patigbiitiiya unbassa patlgbiitiiya damsa-makasa-viitatapa- 
 sirimsapa-sampbassiinara patigbiitiiya yavad eva biri-koplna 
 paticcbadanattbam. || 1 1| 
 
 Patisankbii yoniso pindapiitam patiseviimi n'eva daviiya na 
 madiiya na mandaniiya na vibbusaniiya, yiivadeva imassa 
 kiiyassa tbitiyii yiipanaya vibiinsuparatiya brabmacariya- 
 nuggabiiya : iti puriinanca vedanam patisankbiimi navanca
 
 PACCAVEKKHANA. DASADHAMMASUTTA 83 
 
 vedanam na uppiidessiimi, yatra ca me bhavissati anavajjata 
 ca pbiisuviharo cati. ||2|| 
 
 Patisankhji yoniso seniisanam patisevami yiivadeva sitassa 
 patighJitaya unhassa patighatiiya darasaraakasavatatapasirim- 
 sapasamphassanam patighatiiya yiivadeva utuparissiiya vino- 
 danam patisalliinariiraattham. || 3 1| 
 
 Patisaukhii yoniso giliinapaccaya-bhesajjaparikkhiiram pa- 
 tiseviimi yiivadeva uppanniinam veyyiibiidhikiinam vedanii- 
 nam patighiitiiya abyapajjhaparamiitayati. ||4|| 
 
 PACCAVEKKHAxNTA. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekara saraayam Bhagava Siivattbiyam 
 vibarati Jetavane Aniitbapindikassa iiriinae. Tatra kbo 
 Bbagavii bhikkbu amantesi : * bbikkhavo ' ti ' bbadante ' ti. 
 Te bbikkbu Bbagavato paccassosura. Bbagavii etad avoca : 
 
 " Dasa ime, bbikkbave, dbammii pabbajitena abbinbam 
 paccavekkbitabba. 
 
 Katame dasa ? 
 
 1) Vevamiiyambi ajjbupagato ti pabbajitena abbinbam 
 paccavekkbitabbam. 
 
 2) Parapatibaddbii me jlvika ti pabbajitena abbinbam pacca- 
 vekkbitabbam. 
 
 3) Aiiiio me akappo karaniyo ti pabbajitena abbinbam 
 paccavekkbitabbam. 
 
 4) Kacci nu kbo me attasTlato na upavadatiti pabbajitena 
 abbinbam paccavekkbitabbam. 
 
 5) Kacci nu kbo mam anuvicca viiinil sabrabmaciiii sllato 
 na upavadantiti pabbajitena abbinbam paccavekkbitabbam. 
 
 6) Sabbebi me piyebi maniipebi niinilbbiivo vinabbavo ti 
 pabbajitena abbinbam paccavekkbitabbam. 
 
 7) Kammassa kombi kamma-diiyiido kamma-yoni kamma- 
 bandbu kamma-patisarano, yam kamraam karissarai kalyiinam 
 va piipakam va tassa dii3'ado bbavissamiti pabbajitena abbin- 
 bam paccavekkbitabbam. 
 
 8) Katham bhutassa me rattindivii vltipatantiti pabbaji- 
 tena abbinbam paccavekkbitabbam.
 
 84 MAIIAMAXGALASUTTA. 
 
 9) Kacci nu kho 'harp sufinagare abhiramamiti pabbaji- 
 tena abhinhara paccavekkhitabbam. 
 
 10) Attbi nu kho me uttariraanussadhammii alaraariya- 
 fianaclassanaviseso adhigato so 'hara pacchime kiile sabbrah- 
 maearl puttho na manku bhavissuiuiti pabbajitena abbinham 
 paccavekkhitabbam. 
 
 Ime kho bhikkhave dasa dhammii pabbajitena abhinhara 
 paccavekkhitabba ti. 
 
 Idam avoca Bhagavii : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato 
 bhasitam abhinandun ti. 
 
 D A S A D H A M M A S U T T A . 
 
 Evam me sutara : Ekara samayam Bhagavii Savatthiyam 
 viharati Jetavane Anilthapindikassa ariiine. Atha kho 
 annatarii devata abhikkantaya rattiya abhikkantavanna 
 kevalakappam Jetavanani obhasetvii, yena Bhagavii ten' 
 upasankami upasankamitva Bhagavantam abhiviidetva 
 ekamantam atthilsi. Ekamantam thitii kho sii devata Bhaga- 
 vantam gathii^'a ajjhabhasi : 
 
 " Bahii deva manussa ca mangalani acintayum 
 Akankhamiinii sotthanam : bruhi mangalara utta- 
 mam." || 1 1| 
 
 ' Asevana ca baklnam, panditananca sevanil, 
 Piijii ca piijanlyauam : etam mangalam uttaraam.' ||2|| 
 
 ' PatiiTipa desaviiso ca pubbe ca katapunnatii 
 Atta sammiipanidhi ca : etam mangalam uttamam.' || 3 1| 
 
 * Bahusaccanca sippafica vinayo ca susikkhito, 
 Subhiisita ca yii viicii : etam marigaUira uttamam.' || 4 1| 
 
 * Miltapitu upatthiinaTn putta-diirassa sarigaho 
 Anakula ca kammanta : etam mangalara uttamam.' ||5|| 
 
 * Dananca dhammacariya ca natakanaiica sangaho 
 Anavajjani kammiini : etam mangalara uttamam.' ||6|| 
 
 * Arati virati papa majjapiina ca sanfiamo 
 
 Appamado ca dhammesu: etaiu mangalam uttamam.' ||7||
 
 EATANASUTTA. 85 
 
 * Giiravo ca iilvato ca santuttlil ca katannuta 
 
 Kalena dliamma-savanam : etam maiigalara uttamam.' || 8|| 
 
 * KhantI ca sovacassata samananafica dassanara 
 
 Kalena dhamma-sakaccha: etam mangalam uttamam.' ||9 \\ 
 
 * Tapo ca brahmacariya ca ari^'asaccana' dassanam 
 Nibbana-sacchikiriya ca: etam mangalam uttamam.' || 10 1| 
 
 * Pliutthassa lokadhammehi cittara yassa na karapati 
 Asokam virajam kliemam: etam mangalam uttamam.' || 11 1| 
 
 * Etadisiiui katvana sabbattha-m-aparajita 
 
 Sabbatha sotthim gacchanti: tesam mangalam utamam 
 ti.' 111211 
 
 M A H A M A N G A L A S U T T A M. 
 
 Yanidha bhutani samagatani 
 bhuramani vii yani va antalikkbe 
 sabb' evabbuta sumana bhavautu 
 atbo pi sakkacca sunantu bhiisitam. || 1 
 
 Tasmahi bhiita nisiimetha sabbe 
 mettam karotba manusij'ii pajiiya 
 diva ca ratto ca haranti ye balim 
 tasmabi ne rakkhattha appamattii. ||2|j 
 
 Yam kinci vittam idba vil hurara va 
 saggesu va _yam ratanam panitam 
 na no samara attlii Tatbiigatena 
 idam pi buddbe ratanam panitam 
 etena saccena suvatthi botu. || 8 1| 
 
 Kbayam viragam amatam panitam 
 Yad ajjhaga Sakyamuni saraiibito 
 na tena dhammena sam' attbi kinci. 
 idam pi dbamme ratanam panitam 
 etena saccena suvatthi botu. ||4i|
 
 86 EATAXASUTTA. 
 
 Yam buddhasettho parivannayl sucira 
 saniadhim ariantarikan nam iihu 
 samadhina tena samo na vijjati 
 idam pi dliamme ratanaiii panltam 
 eteiia saccena suvatthi hotu. || 5 1| 
 
 Ye puggalil attha satam pasatthil 
 cattai'i etilni yugilni honti 
 te dakkhineyya Sugatassa savaka 
 etesu dinniini mahapplialani. 
 idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam 
 etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 6 1| 
 
 Ye suppayutta manasa dalhena 
 nikkiimino Gotama-sasanamhi 
 te pattipatta amatam vigayha 
 laddhii mudhii nibbutim bhunjamanii 
 idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam 
 etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 7 1| 
 
 Yath' indakhllo pathavim site siya 
 catubbhi viitebhi asampakampiyo 
 tathupamam sappurisara vadami 
 yo ariyasaccani avecca passati 
 idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam 
 etena saccena suvatthi hotu. ||8 !! 
 
 Ye ari3'a-saccani vibhiivayanti 
 gambhlra-pailnena sudesitani 
 kiiicapi te honti bhusappamatta 
 na te bhavam atthamam iidi^'anti 
 idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam 
 etena saccena suvatthi hotu. \\ 9 1| 
 
 Sahav' assa dassana-sampadiiya 
 tay' assu dhammii jahitii bhavanti 
 sakkaj^aditthi vicikicchitanca 
 sTlabbatara va pi yad atthi kinci 
 catuh' apayehi ca vippamutto
 
 RATAXASUTTA. §7 
 
 clia cabhitthanani abhabbo katum 
 idara pi sanghe ratanam panltara. 
 etena saccena suvatthi hotu. ||10|! 
 
 Kiiicapi so kammam karoti papakam 
 kayena vaca uda cetasji va 
 abhabbo so tassa paticchadaj^a 
 abhabbata ditthapadassa vutto 
 idam pi sangbe ratanam panltam 
 etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 11|| 
 
 Yanappagumbe yatha phussitagge 
 gimhana-mase pathamasmim gimhe 
 tathupamara dhammavaram adesayl 
 nibbJInagamim paramam hitilya 
 idam pi buddhe ratanam panitam 
 etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 12 1| 
 
 Varo varannu varado varaharo 
 anuttaro dhammavaram adesayi 
 idam pi buddhe ratanam panltara 
 etena saccena suvatthi hotu. ||13|| 
 
 Khlnam puranam navam n'atthi sambhavam 
 
 virattacittii ayatike bhavasmim 
 
 te khina-bija avirfilhicchanda 
 
 nibbanti dhlrii yathayam padlpo 
 
 idam pi sanghe ratanam panitam 
 
 etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 14 1| 
 
 Yanidha bhutiini samagatiini 
 bhummani va yani va antalikkhe 
 Tathiigatara deva-manussa-piijitam 
 Buddham namassiima suvatthi hotu. || 15 || 
 
 Yanidha bhutiini samiigatani 
 bhummani va yiini va antalikkhe 
 Tathagatam deva-manussa-pujitam 
 dhammam namassama suvatthi hotu. ||16l|
 
 88 KARANiYAMETTASUTTA. 
 
 Yaiiidha blifitani saraagatiini 
 bhunimani va yani va antalikkhe 
 Tathagatain devamanussa-pujitam 
 sangham namassiima suvatthi hotu. 1|17|| 
 
 R A T A N A S r T T A M . 
 
 Karani^'ara attliakusalena 
 
 yan tam santam padam abhisamecca 
 
 Sakko uju ca sfiju ca 
 
 suvaco c'assa mudu anatimanl. || 1 1| 
 
 Santussako ca subharo ca 
 appakicco ca sallahukavutti 
 santindriyo ca nipako ca 
 appagabbho ca kulesu ananugiddlio. ||2l| 
 
 Na ca kbuddani samacare kind 
 yena vinnQ pare upavadej'yum 
 sukhino va kbemino hontu 
 sabbe satta bhavantu sukbitatta. ||4|| 
 
 Ye keci panabbut' attbi 
 tasii va tbavarii vil anuvasesii 
 diglia va ye mahantii va 
 majjbima rassakii anukii tbiila. ||4|| 
 
 Dittbji vii ye va adittbii 
 
 ye ca diire vasanti avidure 
 
 bbutil vii sambbavesT va 
 
 sabbe sattii bbavantu sukkbitattii. ||5il 
 
 Na paro parani nikubbetba 
 natimannetba kattbaci nam kind 
 bvarosana patigba-safifia 
 nannamanfiasa dukkhara iccbeyya. ||G|j 
 
 Miitii yatba niyara puttara 
 aj'usa ekaputtam anurakkbe
 
 KnANDHAPARITTA. 89 
 
 evara pi sabbabliutesu 
 
 manasam bbavaye aparimanam. || 7 || 
 
 Mettanca sabbalokasmim 
 manasam bhavaye aparimanam 
 iiddham adho ca tiri^'anca 
 asambadbam averara asapattam. || 8 1| 
 
 Tittham caram nisinno va 
 
 sayano va yavat' assa vigatamiddbo 
 
 etam satim adbittbeyya 
 
 brabmam etam vibiiram idba-m-ahu. ||9|| 
 
 Dittbiiica anupagamma 
 
 sllava dassanena sampanno 
 
 kamesu vinej'^ya gedbam 
 
 uahi jatu gabbbaseyj^am punar etiti. |1 10 1| 
 
 KARANIYAMETTASUTTAM. 
 
 Evana me sutam : Ekam samayam Bbagava Savattbiyam 
 vibarati Jetavane Auiitbapindikassa arame. Tena kbo pana 
 samayena Savattbiyam annataro bbikkbu abinii dattbo 
 kalankato boti. Atba kbo sarababula bbikkbu yena Bba- 
 gava ten' upasankamimsu upasafikamitva Bbagavantam 
 abbivarietva ekamantam nisTdiinsu ekamantam nisinnji kbo 
 te bbikkbu Bbagavantam etad avocum : 
 
 ' Idba bbante, Savattbiyam annataro bbikkbu abinii dattbo 
 kalankato ti.' 
 
 "Na ha nuna so, bhikkbave, bbikkbu imiini catliiri 
 abivajakubTni mettena cittena pbari. Sace bi so bbikkbave 
 bbikkbu cattiiri abiriijakuhlni mettena cittena pbareyya : na 
 bi so, bbikkbave, bbikkbu abinii dattbo kiilam kareyya." 
 
 Katamiini cattari abiriijakuliini ? Virupakkbara abiriija- 
 kulam, Eriipatbam abiriijakulara Cbabyaputtam abiriija- 
 kulam Kanbiigotamakam abiriijakulam. 
 
 Na ba nuna so, bbikkbave, bbikkbu imiini cattili-i abiiiija- 
 kuliiui mettena cittena pbari. Sace bi so, bbikkbave, bbikkbu
 
 90 METTASUTTA. 
 
 imani cattiiri ahiiajukulani mettena cittena phareyj'a, na hi 
 so bhikkliave bhikkhu ahina dattlio kalam karej-ya. 
 
 Anujananii, bhikkliave, imiini cattari ahirajakulani mettena 
 cittena pharitiim : attaguttiyii attarakkhaya attaparittayati. 
 
 Idam avoca Bhagavii. Idara vatvii Sugato athaparani etad 
 avoca sattha : 
 
 Vii'iipakkhehi me mettara, mettam Eriipathehi me 
 Chabyaputtehi me mettam, mettam Kanhagotamakehi 
 
 ca. mil 
 
 Apiidakehi me mettara, mettam dvipildakehi me 
 eatuppadehi me mettam mettam bahuppadehi me. ||2|| 
 
 Mil mam apiidako himsi, mii mam himsi dvipadako 
 
 ma mam cattuppado himsi ma mam himsi bahuppado. || 3 1| 
 
 Sabbe satta sabbe pana sabbe bhuta ca kevala 
 
 sabbe bhadrani passantu, ma kifici papam agama || 4 1| 
 
 Appamano buddho, apparajlno dhammo, appamano sangho ; 
 pamanavantiini sirimsapani ahivicchikii satapadi unuaua- 
 bhisarabQ musikii. 
 
 Katii me rakkhii, kata me paritta, patikkamantu bhutani, 
 so 'ham namo Bhagavato name sattaunam sammasambuddha- 
 nara. 
 
 K H A N D H A P A R I T T A M. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekara samayam Bhagavii Savatthiyam 
 viharati Jetavane Anilthapindikassa iiriime. Tatra kho 
 Bhagavii bhikkhu iimantesi : "bhikkhavo" ti, "bhadante" ti. 
 Te bhikkhii Bhagavato paccassosuni. Bhagavii etad avoca : 
 *' Mettiiya, bhikkhave, cetovimuttiyii, iisevitiiya, bhiivitaya, 
 bahullkatiij'a, yiinikatiiya, vatthukatii3'a, anutthitiiya pari- 
 citiiya susamiiraddhiiya ekadasanisanisii piitikaiikhii. 
 
 Katame ekiidasa ? 
 
 1) Sukham supati. 
 
 2) sukham patibuj jhati. 
 
 3) na piipakara supinam passati.
 
 METTAXISAMSAM. 91 
 
 4) maniissanam piyo hoti. 
 6) amanussiinam piyo hoti. 
 
 6) devatii rakkhanti. 
 
 7) nassa aggi va visam vti sattham vii kamati. 
 
 8) tuvatam cittam samadhlj'ati. 
 
 9) mukhavanno vippasldati. 
 
 10) asammulho kiilam karoti. 
 
 11) iittarim appativijjhanto brahraalokupago hoti ti. 
 Metta3'a, bhikkhave, cetoviniuttiyii asevitaya bhavitiiya 
 
 bahullkataj'a yanikatilya vatthukataya anutthitaya paricitaya 
 susamaraddha3^a : ime ekiidasanisamsa piitikankha ti. 
 
 Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato 
 bhasitam abhinandunti. 
 
 M E T T A S U T T A M . 
 
 Pahuta-bhakkho bhavati vippavuttho saka ghara 
 bahii nam upajlvanti yo mittaaam na dubhati. ||1|| 
 
 Yam yam janapadam yiiti nigiime riijadhaniyo 
 sabbattha pQjito hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||2i| 
 
 Nassa cora pasahanti natimanneti khattij^o 
 sabbe amitte tarati yo mittanam na dubhati. ||3|| 
 
 Akkuddho sagharam eti sabhaya patinandito 
 natlnam uttamo hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. \\ 4 [[ 
 
 Sakkatva sakkato hoti garu hoti sagiiravo 
 \anna-kitti-bhato hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. || 5 1 
 
 Piijako labhate piijam vandako pativandanam 
 yaso kittiiica pappoti yo mittanam na dubhati, |) 6 1| 
 
 Aggi yatha pajjalati devata va virocati 
 
 sirij^a ajahito hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||7|| 
 
 Gavo tassa pajayanti khette vuttam viruhati 
 puttanam phalam asnati yo mittanam na dubhati. \\
 
 92 MOEAPARITTA. 
 
 Darito paLbatiito va rukkliato patito naro 
 
 cuto patittliam labhati yo mittauani na dubbati. ||9|| 
 
 Yirulhamulasantanam nigrodham iva raiiluto 
 amittii nappasahanti yo mittanara na diibbatiti. ||10i| 
 
 MET TAXI SAMS AM. 
 
 Udet' ay am cakkbumii ekaraja 
 
 harissa-vanno patbavippabhaso, 
 
 tarn tam naraassami barissavannam pathavippabbiisara, 
 
 tay' ajja guttii vibaremu divasani. || 1 \\ 
 
 Ye brabmana vedagu sabbadbamme 
 
 te me namo te ca mam palaj^antu, 
 
 Nam' attbu buddbiinara, nam' atthu bodhiyii ! 
 
 namo vimuttanam, namo vimuttiyii ! || 2 || 
 
 Imam so parittam katvii, moro carati esanii. 
 
 Apet' ay am cakkbuma ekaraja 
 
 barissavanno patbavippabbiiso, 
 
 tam tam namassami barissavannam patbavippabbasam 
 
 tay' ajja guttii vibaremu rattim. || 3|| 
 
 Ye briibraanii vedagii sabbadbamme 
 
 te me namo te ca mam piilayantu, 
 
 Nam' attbu buddbiinam, nam' attbu bodbiyii ! 
 
 namo vimuttanam, namo vimuttiyii ! ||4|| 
 
 Imam so parittam katvii, moro viisara akappayiti. 
 M R A P A R I T T A il. 
 
 Evam ne sutam : Ekam samaj'am Bbagavii Savattbiyam 
 vibarati, Jetavane Aniitbapindikassa iiriime. Tena kbo pana 
 samayena Candimii devaputto Riihunii asurindena gablto 
 hoti. Atba kbo Candimii devaputto Bbagavantam anussara- 
 mano tiiyam veliiyam imam giitbain abbiisi :
 
 CAXDAPARITTA. 93 
 
 'JN^amo te Buddha-vir' attliu ! 
 vippamutto 'si sabbadhi 
 sambadha-patipanno 'smi 
 tassa me saranam bhavati.' || 1 1| 
 
 Atha kho Bhagavil Candiraam devaputtam tirabbha Eiihum 
 asurindam gatha\'a ajjhabhiisi. 
 
 " Tathagatam arabantam 
 Candimii saranam gato 
 Rilhu ! Candam pamuncassu 
 Buddbii lokaniikampakati." ||2|| 
 
 Atha kho Rahu asurlndo Candimam devaputtam muncltva 
 taramiinarupo yena Yepacitti asurindo ten' upasaiikami 
 upasankamitvii samviggo loraahatthajiito ekamantara atthasi 
 ekamantam thitam kho Biihum asurindam Yepacitti asurindo 
 giithaya ajjhabhasi : 
 
 " Kin nu santaramano 'va 
 Piilhu ! Candam pamuncasi 
 samviggarupo agamma 
 kin nu bhito 'va titthasiti." ||3|| 
 
 * Sattadha me phale muddhii 
 jTvanto na sukham labhe. 
 Buddhagathabhiglto 'mhi 
 no ce munceyya Candiman ti. \\ 4 1( 
 
 C A X D A P A R I T T A M. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam 
 viharati Jetavane Auathapindikassa arame. Tena kho pana 
 8ama3'ena Suriyo devaputto Rahuna asurindena gahlto hoti. 
 
 Atha kho Suriyo devaputto Bhagavantam anussaramano 
 tayam velayam imam giitham abhasi : 
 
 ' Narao te buddha vir' atthu ! 
 vippamutto 'si sabbadhi 
 sambiidhapatipanno 'smi 
 tassa me saranam bhavati.' || 1 [|
 
 94 SURIYAPARITTA. 
 
 Atha klio Bliagavii Suriyam devaputtam arabbha Ralium 
 asurindam gatbiiya ajjbabbiisi : 
 
 " Tathagatam arabantam 
 Suriyo saranam gato 
 Eilbu ! Suriyam pamimcassu 
 Buddba lokanukampakati." ||2|| 
 
 " Yo andbakiire tamasi pabharikaro 
 
 verocano mandall uggatejo 
 
 mii Rjihu gili caram antalikkbe 
 
 pajara mama Rabu pamunca Suriyan ti." ||3|| 
 
 Atba kho Rabu asurindo Suriyam devaputtam — pe — 
 
 ' Sattadbii me pbale muddbii 
 jTvanto na sukbam labbe 
 Buddbiio^atbabbiwito 'mbi : 
 no ce muficeyj^a Suriyan ti.' || 4 1| 
 
 SURIYArARITTAM. 
 
 Evam me sutam. Ekam samayam Bbagavii Savattbiyam 
 vibarati Jetavane Aniitbapindikassa ariime. Tatra kbo 
 Bbagavii bbikkbu amantesi "bbikkbavo" ti, "bbadante" ti. 
 te bbikkbu Bbagavato paccassosum. Bbagava etad 
 avoca : || 1 1| 
 
 " Bbiitapubbam, bbikkliave, devasura-sarigamo samu- 
 pabbulbo abosi. Atba kbo, bbikkbave, Sakko deviinani 
 indo deve Tiivatimse amantesi : 
 
 " Sace, marisii, devanam sangamagatanam uppajjeyya bba- 
 yam vii cbambbitattam vii lomabamso vii mam eva tasmim 
 samaye dbajaggam uUokeyyiitba. Mamam bi vo dbajaggam 
 ullokayatam yam bbavissati bbaj^ain vii cbambbitattam vii 
 lomabamso vii so pablyassati. ||2|| 
 
 No CO mo dbajaggam uUokeyyiitba, atba kbo Pajiipatissa 
 devariijassa dbajaggam uUokeyyiitba. Pajiipatissa bi vo deva- 
 riijassa dbajaggam ullokayatam ; yam bbavissati bbayam 
 vii cbambbitattam vii lomabamso vii so pablyissati. || 3 1|
 
 DHA.JAGGA PARITTA. 95 
 
 No ce Pajiipatissa devariljassa dhajaggam ullokeyyatha, 
 atha Varunassa devariijassa dhajaggam ullokeyyatha. 
 Varunassa hi vo devarajassa dhajaggam ullokayatam yam 
 bhavissati bhayam Ya chambhi tattam va lomahamso xR so 
 pahlyissati. ||4|| 
 
 JSTo ce Varunassa devarajassa dhajaggam ullokej^yatha, 
 atha Isiiuassa devarajassa dhajaggam ullokeyyatha. Tsa- 
 nassa hi vo devarajassa dhajaggam ullokayatam yam bha- 
 vissati bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso va so 
 pahlyissati. ||5|| 
 
 Tarn kho pana bhikkhave Sakkassa va devjinam indassa 
 dhajaggam ullokayatam : Pajiipatissa va devanam rajassa 
 dhajaggam ullokayatam : Varunassa va devarajassa dhajaggam 
 ullokayatam : Isiiuassa vii devarajassa dhajaggam ulloka- 
 yatam : 3^am bhavissati bhayam va chambhitattam va loma- 
 hamso va so pahiyetha pi no pahiyetha. \\ 6 1| 
 
 Tarn kissa hetu ? 
 
 "Sakko, bhikkhave, devanam indo avitarago avitadoso 
 avitamoho bhirucchambhi uttrasi phalajati." (|7|| 
 
 Ahanca kho bhikkhave evam vadiimi : " Sace tumhiikara, 
 bhikkhave, arannagatanam va rukkhamulagatanam va suilfia- 
 garagatanam vii uppajjeyya bhayam va chambhitattam vii 
 lomahamso va mam eva tasmim samaye anussareyyiitha : 
 
 Iti pi so Bhagava araham samma-sambuddho vijja-carana- 
 sampanno sugato lokavidu anuttaro purisadamma-siirathi 
 sattha devamanussiinam buddho Bhagava ti. ||8|( 
 
 Mamam hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati 
 bhaj^am vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso pahij'issati. 
 
 No ce mam anussareyyiitha atha dhammam anussareyyiitha : 
 Sviikkhiito Bhagavatii dhammo sanditthiko akiiliko ehipassiko 
 opanayiko paccattam veditabbo vinfiuhiti. Dhammam hi vo 
 bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati bha3"am va chambhi- 
 tattam vii lomahamso va so pahlyissati. ||9|| 
 
 No ce dhammam anussareyyiitha atha sangham anussa- 
 reyyatha. Supatipanno Bhagavato savakasahgho, ujupati- 
 panno Bhagavato siivakasangho, niiyapatipanno Bhagavato 
 savakasangho, siimlcipatipanno Bhagavato siivakasangho ; 
 yadidam cattiiri purisayugiini attha purisapuggalii esa siiva-
 
 96 DHAJAGGA PAKITTA. 
 
 kasafigho : aliiineyyo pahuneyyo dakkliineyyo anjalikaranlyo 
 anuttaram punna-khettam lokassati. 
 
 Saiigham hi vo bliikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati 
 bhayam vil chambhitattam vii loinahamso vii so pabl- 
 yissati. || 10 1| 
 
 Tain kissa hetu ? 
 
 Tathagato hi, bhikkhave, araham sammasarabuddho 
 vltariigo vltadoso vltamoho abhiru acchainbhi anutrasi 
 aphalayiti. ||11|| 
 
 Idam avoca Bhagavil idam vatvana Sugato athaparatn 
 etad avoca satthii : 
 
 " Aranile rukkhil mfdeva sunilagareva bhikkhavo 
 anussaretha sambuddham bha^^am tuinliilkam no siyii." 1| 1 1| 
 
 " No ce Buddham sareyyatha lokajettham nariisabham : 
 atha dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikam sudesitam." i|2|| 
 
 " No ce Dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikam sudesitam 
 atha sahgham sareyyatha punfiakkhettam anuttaram." || 3 1| 
 
 " Evam Buddhain sarantanam dhammam sahghauca 
 bhikkhavo 
 bhayam vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso na hessa- 
 
 titi>i|4|| 
 
 DHAJAGGA PARITTAM. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavil E-iljagahe 
 viharati Veluvane Kalandakanivilpe. Tena kho pana sama- 
 yena iiyasmii Mahiikassapo pipphaliguhiiyam viharati, 
 tibiidhiko dukkhito billhagiliino. Atha kho Bhagavil siiyan- 
 hasamayam patisaUiinii vutthito, yen' iiyasmii Mahiikassapo 
 ten' upasahkarai upasaiikamitvil pannatte ilsane nisldi. 
 Nisajja kho Bhagava iiyastnantam Makiikassapam etad 
 avoca : 
 
 " Kacci te Kassapa kharaanl3''am. kacci yilpanlyam, kacci 
 dukkhiivedanii patikkamanti no abhikkamanti. Patikkamo 
 'sanam pariniiya ti no abhikkamo " ti.
 
 MAHAKASSAPABOJJHANGA. 97 
 
 'Na me, bhante, kharaanlyam na yapanlyam balliil me 
 dukkbavedana abbikkamanti no patikkamanti. Abbikkamo 
 'sanam paniiayati do patikkamo ti. 
 
 " Satt' ime, Kassapa, boj jbarigii mayii saramiid-akkbata bbii- 
 vitii babullkata abbinniij^a sambodbiiya nibbanaya samvattanti. 
 
 1) Satisambojjbango kbo, Kassapa, maya sammiid-akkbato 
 bbiivito babullkato abbinniiya sambodbiiya nibbanaya 
 samvattati. 
 
 2) Dbammavicayasambojjbango — pe — nibbanaya sam- 
 vattati. 
 
 3) yiriyasambojjbango — pe — nibbanaya samvattati. 
 
 4) Pitisambojjbango — pe — nibbanaya samvattati. 
 
 5) Passaddbisambojjhango — pe — nibbanaya samvattati. 
 
 6) Samiidbisamboijbango — pe — nibbanaya samvattati. 
 
 7) TJpekbasambojjbango — pe — nibbiinaj^a samvattati. 
 Ime kbo Kassapa satta bojjbanga mayii sammadakkbiita 
 
 bbavitji babulikatji abbinnaya sambodbiiya nibbanaya sam- 
 vattanti ti. 
 
 ' Taggba, Bbagava, bojjbanga, taggba, Sugata, bojjbanga 
 ti.' 
 
 Idam avoca Bbagava : — attamano iiyasmii Mabakassapo 
 Bbagavato bbjisitam abbinandi. 
 
 Vutthjibi cayasma Mabakassapo tamba abadba tatba pahino 
 cayasraato Mabakassapassa so iibadbo abositi. 
 
 MAHAKASSAPATTHEEABOJJHANGAM. 
 
 Tbe MahdmoggaUdnaUhera hojjhangam and tbe Mahd- 
 cundatthera hojjhangam agree witb tbe preceding sutta in all 
 but tbe name. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bbagava Savattbiyara 
 vibarati Jetavane Aniitbapindikassa anlme. Tena kbo pana 
 samayena ayasma Girimiinando abadbiko boti dukkbito 
 balbagiliino. Atba kbo ayasma Anando yena Bbagava ten' 
 upasamkami upasamkamitva Bbagavantam abbivildetva 
 ekamantam nisTdi ekamantam nisinno kbo ayasma Anando 
 Bbagavantam etad avoca : 
 
 7
 
 98 GIRIMANANDASUTTA. 
 
 Ayasmii, bliante, Girimanando abildliiko dukkhito balhagi- 
 lano. Siidhu bliante Bhagava ; yen' ayasmii Girimanando 
 ten' upasaiikamatu anukampam upadilyati. 
 
 Sace kho tvam Ananda Girimiinandassa bliikkhuno 
 upasankamitvil dasa sanuii bhiiseyyasi. Thilnam kho 
 pan' etam vijjati yam Girimiinandassa bhikkhuno dasa 
 safinii sutvii so iibiidho thiinaso patippassambheyya. 
 
 Katame dasa sanfiii ? 
 
 " Aniccasannii, anattasanna, asubhasafina, iidlnavasannii, 
 pahiinasannii, viriigasannii, nirodhasafinii, sabbaloke anabhi- 
 rati safina, sabbasankhiiresu aniccasannii, iiniipiinasati." 
 
 Katamii ca Ananda aniccasannii ? 
 
 " Idh' Ananda bhikkhu, aranfiagato vii rukkbamiilagato 
 vii sunniigiiragato vii iti patisancikkhati : — 
 
 Rupam aniccam, vedana anicca, safinii aniccii, sankhiirii 
 anicca, virlniinam aniccan ti. Iti imesu pailcas' upiida- 
 nakkbandhesu aniccanupassi viliarati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda 
 aniccasannii. || 1 1| 
 
 Katamii ca Ananda anattasaiiim ? 
 
 Idh' Ananda — pe — patisancikkhati : — 
 
 Cakkhum anattii, rOpam anattii, sotam anattii, jivhii anattii, 
 rasii anattii, kiiyo anattii, photthabbii anattii, mano anattii, 
 dhammii anattii ti. 
 
 Iti ime chasu ajjhattika-biihiresu iij^atanesu anattanupassi 
 viharati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda anattasafinii. ||2|| 
 
 Katamii ca Ananda asubhasaniiii ? Idh' Ananda bhikkhu 
 imam eva kiiyam uddham piidatahT, adho kesamatthakii taca- 
 pariyantam pilram niinappakiirassa asucino paccavekkhati. 
 
 Atthi imasmim kaye : kesii — pe — matthalungan ti. (See 
 page 82). 
 
 Iti imasmim kii3'e asubhanupassi viharati. Ayam vuccat' 
 Ananda asubhasanriii. ||3|| 
 
 Katamii ca Ananda adlnavasafina ? Idh' Ananda — pe — 
 patisancikkhati.
 
 GIKIMAXANDASFTTA. 99 
 
 Bahu dukkho kho ayam kayo, bahu iidinavo iti imasmim 
 kiiye vividhii abadhii uppajjanti seyyathidam : — 
 
 Cakkhurogo, sotarogo, ghiinarogo, jivharogo, kiiyarogo, 
 sTsarogo, kannarogo, mukliarogo, dantarogo, kiiso, siiso, 
 piniiso, daho, jaro, kucchirogo, mucchii, pakkhandikii, sulo, 
 visucika, kuttham, gando, kiliiso, soso, apam;Tro, daddu, 
 kandu, kacchura-khasa, vitacchika, lohitam, pittam, madhu- 
 melio, amsii, pilaka, bhagandala, pitta-samutthana-iibadha, 
 semha-samutthana-abadha, vata-samuttbaaa-abadhji, sanni- 
 patika-abildha, utu-viparinamaja-abadha, visama-pariharaja- 
 tibadha, opaka-abadhii, kammavipaka-abiidha, sitam, unham, 
 jighaccha, pipasii, uccaro, passiivo. 
 
 Iti imasmim kaye adinavanupassi viharati. Ayam vuccat' 
 Ananda, admavasauiia. || 4 1| 
 
 Katama ca Ananda pahiinasanna ? Idh' Ananda bhikkhu 
 uppannam kama-vitakkam nadhivaseti pajahati, vinodeti 
 byantikaroti anabhavam gameti. 
 
 Uppannam byapadavitakkam nadhivaseti pajabati vinodeti 
 byantikaroti anabhavam gameti. 
 
 Uppannam vihimsavitakkam nadhivaseti pajahati vino- 
 deti byantikaroti anabhavam gameti. 
 
 Uppannam uppanne piipake akusale dhamme nadhivaseti 
 pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhavaiii gameti. 
 
 Ayam vuccat' Ananda pahanasaiina. ||5|| 
 
 Katama c' Ananda viragasanna ? 
 
 Idh' Ananda bhikku — pe — patisancikkhati. 
 
 Etam santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankhara- 
 samatho sabbupadhi patinissago tanhakkhayo virago nibbii- 
 nan ti. 
 
 Ayam vuccat' Ananda viragasanna. ||6[| 
 
 Katama ca Ananda nirodhasannii ? 
 Idh' Ananda bhikkhu — pe — patisancikkhati : 
 Etam santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankharasaraatho 
 sabbupadhi patinissaggo tanhakkhayo nirodho nibbanan ti. 
 Ayam vuccat' Ananda nirodhasanna. ||7||
 
 100 GIEIMANANDASUTTA. 
 
 Kutama c' Ananda sabbaloke anabhiratisanfia ? 
 
 Idli' Ananda bbikkhu ye loke upayupadanii cetaso 
 adhittbanabhinivesanusaj'ii te pajahanto viraraati na upadi- 
 yanto, Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabba loke anabbirati sannii. || 8 1| 
 
 Katama c' Ananda sabbasankbjiresu aniccasanna ? 
 
 Idh' Ananda bbikkbu sabbasarikbaresu attbiyati hariiyati 
 jiguccbati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabbasaiikbiiresu anicca- 
 sanna. II 9 II 
 
 Katama c' Ananda anapilnasatl? 
 
 Idb' Ananda bbikkbu arannagato vil rukkbamiilagato vii 
 sunnagaragato \R nisldati pallarikam abbujitvii ujura kayam 
 panidbiiya parimukkbam satim upattbapetva so sato \R 
 assasati sato passasati: 
 
 Digbam vji assasanto digbam assasaraiti pajiinati. 
 
 Digbam vii passanto digbam passasilmiti pajiinati. 
 
 Rassam va assasanto rassam assasamiti pajiinati. 
 Rassam vii passasanto rassam passasiimiti pajiiuiiti. 
 
 Sabbakayam patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 Sabbakiij'am patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 
 Passambbayam kilyasaiikbiiram assasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 Passambbayaiu kilyasaiikbiiram passasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 
 Piti-patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 Piti-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 
 Sukba-patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkbati, 
 Sukha-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 
 Citta-saiikbilra-patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 Citta-saiikbilra-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 
 Passambbayam cittasankbiiram assasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 Passambbayam cittasankbiiram passasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 
 Citta-patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 Citta-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 
 Abbippamodayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkbati. 
 Abbippamodayam cittam passasissiimiti sikkbati.
 
 ATAXATIYASUTTA. 101 
 
 Samadayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati. 
 Samacla3'am cittam passasissiiraiti sikkhati. 
 
 Yiraoca\'am cittam assasissamiti sikkhati. 
 Yimocayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati. 
 
 AniccanupassI assasissamiti sikkhati. 
 AniccanupassI passasissiiaiiti sikkhati. 
 
 VimganupassI assasissamiti sikkhati. 
 ViraganupassI passasissamiti sikkhati. 
 
 Nirodhanupassi assasissamiti sikkhati. 
 NirodhanupassI passasissamiti sikkhati. 
 
 Patinissagganupassi assasissamiti sikkhati. 
 PatinissagganupassT passasissamiti sikkhati. — 
 
 Ayam vuccat' Ananda anapaniisati. || 10 Ij 
 
 Sace kho tvam Ananda Girimanandassa bhikkhum ima 
 dasa saiinii sutva so iibadho thanaso patippassambheyyati. 
 
 Atha kho ayasmii Anando Bhagavato santike imii dasa 
 sannil uggahetva : yen' ayasmii Girimiinando ten' iipasaiakami 
 upasarikaraitva ayasmato Girimanandassa ima dasa sanna 
 abhiisi. 
 
 Atha kho a3^asmato Girimiinadassa ima dasa sannii sutvii 
 so abiidho thanaso patippassambhi. 
 
 Vutthiihi cayasmji GirimJinando taraha abadhii tatha 
 pahino ca panayasmato Girimanandassa so iibadho ahositi. 
 GIEIMANANDASUTTAM. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA- 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Evara me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Riijagahe 
 viharati Gijjhakute pabbate. Atha kho cattiiro maharaja 
 mahatiya ca Yakkha-senaya mahati)'a ca Gandhabba-seniiya 
 mahatiya ca Kumbhanda-senaya mahatiya ca Naga-senaj'a 
 catuddisam rakkham thapetvii catuddisam gumbam thapetva 
 catuddisam avaranam thapetva abhikkantaya rattiya abhik-
 
 102 ATANATIYASUTTA. 
 
 kantavannil kevalakappam Gijjhakutani obhasctva : yena 
 Bhagavii ten' upasankamirnsu : upasaukamitva Bhagavantani 
 abhivadetva ekamantam nisldimsu. [| 1 \\ 
 
 Te.pi kho Yakkha app' ekacce Bhagavantam abhivadetvii 
 ekamantam nisldimsu ; app' ekacce yena Bhagavatii saddhim 
 sammodimsu sammedanlyara katham saranlyam vltisiiretva 
 ekamantam nisldimsu; app' ekacce yena Bhagava ten' anjalim 
 panilmetva ekamantam nisldimsu ; app' ekacce niiraa gottam 
 silvetva ekamantam nisldimsu ; app' ekacce tunhlbhuta eka- 
 mantam nisldimsu. |1 '2 \\ 
 
 Ekamantam nisinno kbo Yessavanno mabarajii Bhaga- 
 vantam etad avoca : — 
 
 Santi hi, bhante, ularii Yakkha Bhagavato appasanna : 
 santi hi, bhante, uhTrii Yakkha Bhagavato pasannii : santi 
 hi, bhante, majjhimii Yakkha appasanna : santi hi, bhante, 
 majjhima Yakkha pasannii: santi hi, bhante, nica Yakkha 
 Bhagavato appasanna: santi hi, bhante, nlcii Yakkha Bha- 
 gavato pasannii. ||3|| 
 
 Yebhuyyena kho pana bhante Yakkhii appasannii yeva 
 Bhagavato tam kissa hetu ? 
 
 "Bhagavii hi, bhante, pilniltipiitii veramanlj'ii dhammam 
 deseti ; adinniidiina veramanlyil dhammain deseti ; kiimesu 
 micchaciirii veramanlyil dhammam deseti ; musavadii vera- 
 manlyil dhammam deseti ; suriimeraj'^amajja-pamiidatthanii 
 veramanlyil dhammam deseti." || 4 1| 
 
 "Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, Yakkhii appativiratil yeva 
 piiniitipiltii, appativiratil adinnildiiiiil, appativirata kiimesu 
 micchiicilrii, appativiratil musiiviidii, appativiratil surii- 
 merayamajjapamiidatthiinii, tesam tam hoti appiyam amanii- 
 pam."||5|| 
 
 "Santi hi bhante Bhagavato savaka aranne vanapanthani 
 panthiini seniisaniiui patisevanti appasaddiini appanigghosiini 
 vijanaviitiini manussa-rahaseyyakiini patisallana-siiruppani : 
 
 Tattha santi uliliii Yakkhii niviisino, ye imasmim Bhagavato 
 piivacane appasannii. Tesam pasiidilya ugganhiitu, bhante, 
 Bhagavil Atiiniitiyam rakkham bhikkhunain, bhikkhunlnara, 
 upiisakilnarn. upiisikilnam guttiyii rakkliiiya avihimsiiya 
 phiisuvihiiriiyati." Adhiviisesi Bhagavii tunhlbhiiveua. Atha
 
 ATANATITASUTTA. 103 
 
 kho Yessavano maharaja Bhagavato adhivilsanam viditva 
 tjijam veliiyam imam AtcTnatiyam rakkham ab-hasi : || 6 1| 
 
 Yipassissa nam' atthu cakkhumantassa sirimato ! 
 Sikkhissa pi nam' atthu sabba-bhutanukampino ! || 1 1| 
 
 Yessabhussa nam' attbu nahiitakassa tapassino ! 
 
 Nam' atthu Kakusandhassa Milra-sena-pamaddino ! || 2 1| 
 
 Konagamanassa nam' atthu brahmanassa Yuslmato ! 
 Kassapassa nam' atthu vippamuttassa sabbadhe ! || 3 1| 
 
 Ahgirasassa nam' atthu Sakyaputtassa sirimato ! 
 
 Yo imam dhammam adesesi sabba-dukkha pan udanam! ||4|| 
 
 Ye capi nibbutii loke yathabhiitara vipassisum 
 
 Te janii apisunii ca mahantii Yltasaradii 
 
 Hitam devamanussanam yam namassanti Gotamam 
 
 Yij jacarana-sampannam mahantam vltasaradam. || 5 1| 
 
 Yato uggacchati suriyo adicco mandall maha, 
 Yassa c'uggacchamanassa samvarl pi nirujjhati, 
 Yassa c'uggate surij^e divaso ti pavuccati. ||6|| 
 
 Rahado pi tattha gambhiro samuddo saritodako 
 Evam tarn tattha jananti samuddo saritodako 
 Ito sa purimii disa iti nam iicikkhati jano. ||7|| 
 
 Yam disam abhipiileti maharaja yassasi so 
 Gandhabbanam adhipati Dhatarattho iti namaso 
 E,amuti naccagltehi Gandhabbehi purakkhato. ||8|| 
 
 Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam 
 Asltim dasa eko ca Indanama mahabbala. ||9|| 
 
 Te ca pi Buddham disviina Buddham adiccabandhunam 
 Durato va namassanti mahantam vltasaradam. || 10 1| 
 
 Namo te purisajaiina ! namo te puris' uttama ! 
 Kusalena samekkhesi amanussil pi tarn vandanti ! 
 Sutam n'etam abhinhaso tasma evam vademase. ||11|| 
 
 Jinam vandatha Gotamam ! jinam vandaraa Gotamam, 
 Yijjacaranasampannam Buddham vandiima Gotamam! || 12 1 
 
 Yena Peta pavuccanti pisuna pitthimamsika 
 Panatipatino ludda cora nekatika jana. II 13 1|
 
 104 AT4NATITASUTTA. 
 
 Ito sa dakkhinii disii iti nam acikkhati jano 
 Yam disam abhipiileti mahiiriija yasasslso 
 Kurabhandanam adhipati Yirulho iti naraa so 
 Ramati naccagltehi Kumbhandehi pur' akkhilto. || 14 1| 
 
 Puttil pi tassa bahavo eka naraii ti me sutam 
 Asitim dasa eko ca ludauamii mahabbalii || 15 1| 
 
 Te ca pi Buddham disvana Buddham iidicca bandhunam 
 DQrato va namassanti mahantam vltasaradam. i|16|| 
 
 Namo te purisajanna ! namo te puris' uttama ! 
 Kusalena samekkhasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti ! 
 Sutam n' etam abbinhaso tasmii evam vandemase. ||17|| 
 
 Jinam vandatba Gotamam, jinam vandama Gotamam, 
 Vijjacaranasampannam Buddham vandama Gotamam I || 18 1 
 
 Yatha c' uggacchati suriyo ildicco mandall maha 
 Yassa c' uggacchamanassa divaso pi nirujjhati 
 Yassa coggate suriye samvanti pavuccati 
 Habado pi tattba gambhiro samuddo saritodako 
 Evam tarn tattha jananti samuddo saritodako. || 19 1| 
 
 Ito sii paccbima disii iti nam acikkbati jano 
 Yam disam abhipiileti mahaiilja yasassi so 
 Kagiinam ca adhipati Viriipakkho iti niimaso 
 Bamati naccagltehi Nagebi purakkhato. ||20|| 
 
 Putta pi tassa bahavo eka niimii ti me sutam 
 Asitim dasa eko ca Indauamii mababbala. ||21|| 
 
 Te capi Buddham disvana Buddham adiccabandhunara 
 Durato va namassanti mahantam vltasaradam. || 22 1| 
 
 Kamo te purisajanna, namo te puris' uttama 
 Kusalena samekkhasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti 
 Sutam n'etam abbinhaso tasmii evam vandemase ! || 23 1| 
 
 Jinam vandatba Gotamam ! jinam vandiima Gotamam 
 Yijjilcaranasampannam Buddham vandiima Gotamam ! 
 Yena Uttara-kurilrammil Mahilmern Sudassano 
 Manussa tattha jiiyanti amamii apariggaha. ||24||
 
 ATANATIYASUTTA. 105 
 
 Na te bijam pavapanti na pi nlyantl nangala 
 Akattha-pakimam salim paribhunjanti manussii. ||25|| 
 
 Akanam athusam suddham sugandham tanclulapphalam 
 Tundlkire pacitviina tato bbunjanti bbojanam. ||26|| 
 
 Gavim ekakhuram katvii anuyanti diso disam 
 Pasum ekakburam katva anuyanti diso disam 
 Ittbi va vabanara katva anuyanti diso disam 
 Purisavabanam katvii anuyanti diso disam 
 Kumarivabanam katva anuyanti disa disam 
 Kumaravabanam katva anuyanti diso disam. ||27|| 
 
 Te yane abbiriibitvii sabbadisa anupariyanti pacarii tassa 
 
 rajino 
 Hattbi-yiinam assa-yanam dibba-yanam upattbitam 
 Piisada sivika c' eva mabiirajassa yassasi so 
 Tassa ca nagara iibu antalikkbe sumapita 
 Atiinata Kusinata Parakusinata Natapuriya Parakusita- 
 
 nata. II 28 II 
 
 Uttarena Kuplvanto Janogbam aparena ca 
 Navanavatiyo Ambara-ambaravatiyo Alakamanda niima 
 rSjadbani. ||29|i 
 
 Kuverassa kbo pan a, miirisa, mabiirajassa Visana niima 
 
 riijadbani 
 Tasma Kuvero mabiiraja Vessavano ti pavuccati. ||30|| 
 
 Paccessanto pakiisenti Tatobl Tattala Tatotalii 
 Ojasi Tejasi Tatojasi Siiroraja Arittbo Nemi 
 Pabado pi tattba DbaranI niima yato megba pavassanti 
 Yassii yato patiiyanti sabbapi tattba Bbagalavatl nama 
 Yattba Yakkba payirupasanti. ||31 1| 
 
 Tattba niccapbala rukkba nama dijaganayutii 
 Mayura-koncabbi rudii-kokiladlbi vaggubbi 
 Jivara-jlvaka sadd' ettba, atbo ottbiiva-cittaka 
 Kukuttbaka kullrakii vane pokkbarasiitaka. || 32 1| 
 
 Sukasiilika-sadd' ettba, dandamiinavakani ca 
 Sobbati sabbakiilam sa Kuvera-nalini sada. II 33 1|
 
 lOG ATANATIYASUTTA. 
 
 Ito sa uttara disii iti nam ilcikkhati jano, 
 Yam disam abbipilleti mabarajii j^asassl so 
 Yakkhanam adhipati Kuvero iti niimaso 
 Eamati nacca-gltehi Yakkhehi pur' akkhilto. ||31|| 
 
 Puttii pi tassa bahavo eka namil ti me sutam 
 Asltim dasa eko ca Inda namii mababbalii. ||35|| 
 
 Te capi Buddbam disvilna Buddbara ildicca bandbunani 
 Durato va namassanti mabantam vltasaradam. ||36|| 
 
 Namo te puris' ajaniia, namo te puris' uttama 
 
 Kusalena samekkbasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti 
 
 Sutam n' etam abbinbaso : tasma evam vandemase ! ||37 1 
 
 Jinam vandatba Gotamam ! Jinam vandama Gotamam ! 
 Vijjacarana-sampannam Buddbam vandama Gotamam! 
 
 Ayam kbo sa, mili'isa, Atanatiya rakkbii, bbikkbunam 
 bbikkbunlnam upasakiinam upiisikanam guttiya, rakkbiiya, 
 avibimsaya, pbasu vibaraya ti. \\ 7 1| 
 
 Yassa kassaci, miirisa, bbikkbussa ya bbikkbuniya va 
 upjisakassa vii upasikaya va : ayam Atanatiya rakkba sugga- 
 bita bbavissati samatta pariyaputa tance amanusso Yakkbo va 
 YakkbinI vii Yakkbapotako vii Yakkbapotikii vil Yakkba- 
 mabilmatto vii Yakkbapiirisajjo vii Yakkbapaciiro vii ||8|| 
 
 Gandbabbo vii Gandbabbl vii — pe — || 9 1| 
 
 Kumbbando vii Kumbbandl vii — pe — IIIOII 
 
 Niigo vii Niiglnl vii — pe — II 11 II 
 paduttbacitto gaccbantam vii anugaccbeyya tbitarp. va 
 upatittbeyya, nisinnam vii upanisldej'^ya, nipannam vii 
 upanipajjeyya. || 12 II 
 
 Nam eso, miirisa, amanusso labbeyya giimesu vii nigamesu 
 vii sakkiiram vii garukaram yU. 
 
 Nam eso, miirisa, amanusso labbeyya Alakaraandiiya riija- 
 dbiiniyii vattbum vii viisam vii. 
 
 Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labbeyya Yakkbiinam samitim 
 gantum. II 1311 
 
 Api ssu nam, miirisa, amanussii anavaybara pi nam 
 kareyyum avivayham. Api ssu nam, miirisa, amanussii attabi
 
 ATANATIYASUTTA. 107 
 
 pi paripimnahi paribhasahi paribhaseyyum. Api ssu nam, 
 miirisa, amanussa rittam pi pattam sise nikkujjeyyum 
 Api ssu nam, miirisa, amanussa sattadlia pi assa muddham 
 phaleyyum. ||14[| 
 
 Santi hi, miirisa, amanussii, candil, ruddii, rabhasil, te n' eva 
 mahiiriijiinam iidiyauti ; na mahiiriljiinam purisakiinam adi- 
 yanti ; na mahiiriijiinam. purisakanam purisakanam adiyanti. 
 Te kho te, miirisa, amanussa mahiiriijiinam avaruddhii niima 
 vuccanti, seyyathiipi miirisa, ||15|| 
 
 "rafino Miigadhassa vijite corii : te n' eva ranfio Miigadhassa 
 adiyanti ; na raiino Miigadhassa purisakiinam iidiyanti ; na 
 rafino Miigadhassa purisakiinam iidiyanti. Te kho te, miirisa, 
 mahacora pi raililo Miigadhassa avaruddha nama vuccanti. 
 Evam eva kho, miirisa, santi hi amanussa candii, ruddii, 
 rabhasii : te n' eva mahiiriijiinam iidij-anti ; na mahiiriijanani 
 purisakanam iidiyanti, na mahiiriijiinam purisakanam adi- 
 yanti. Te kho 'te, marisa, amanussa avaruddha niima 
 vuccanti. ||16|| 
 
 Yo hi koci, miirisa, araanusso Yakkho vii YakkhinI — 
 pe- 111711 
 
 Gandhabbo va GandhabbI — pe — II18|| 
 
 Kumbhando va Kumbhandl — pe — ||19|i 
 
 Niigo va jN^iiginl vii — pe — || 20 1| 
 padutthacitto bhikkhum va bhikkhunira vii upiisakam vii 
 upiisikiinam vii gacchantam va anugacchey3'a, thitam vii 
 upatittheyya, nisinnam va upanisideyya, nipannam vii upani- 
 pajjeyj'a, imesarn Yakkliiinam Mahii^'akkhiinam seniipatlnam 
 mahaseniipatlnani upajjhiipetabbam vikkanditabbam viravi- 
 tabbam: ||21|| 
 
 Ayam Yakkho ganhiiti, aj'am Yakkho avisati, ayam 
 Yakkho hetheti, ayam Yakkho himsati, ayam Yakkho 
 vihimsati, ayam Yakkho na muricatiti. || 22 1| 
 
 Katamesam Yakkhanara Mahiiyakkhanam sena-patinam, 
 maha-sena-patlnam ? 
 
 Indo Some Yaruno ca Bhiiradviijo Pajiipati 
 Cando Kiimasettho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca 
 Paniido Opamaiiiio ca Devasiito ca j\Iiitali
 
 108 ATANATIYASUTTA. 
 
 Cittaseno ca Gandhabbo Nalarajii Janesablio 
 Siitagiro Ilemavato Punnako Karatiyo Gulo 
 Sivako Mucalindo ca Yessiiraitto Yugandbaro 
 Gopillo Suppagedbo ca Hirl NettI ca Mandiyo 
 Pancillacando Alavako Pajjuno Sumano Sumukho 
 Dadbimukho Maiii Miiuicaro Digho Atho Serissako 
 saha. II 23 II 
 
 Iraesam Yakkbanam raabaj^akkbiinain senapatlnam maba- 
 senapatlnam ujjbapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravitabbam 
 Ayam Yakkbo ganbiiti — pe — na muncatiti. ||24|| 
 
 Ayam kbo sii, miirisa, Atiinatiya rakkbii bbikkbunara 
 bbikkhunlnaip upasakanam upasikiinam guttiya rakkbilya 
 avibimsaya pbasuvibilrayati. 112511 
 
 Handa ca' dani mayam marisa gaccbama babukicca mayam 
 babukaranlyati. ||26|| 
 
 Yassa diini tumbe mabiirajano kalam manfiatbati. ||27|| 
 
 Atba kbo cattaro mabarajano uttbayasana, Bbagavantam 
 abbivadetvii padakkbinam katva tattb' ev' antaradbii- 
 yimsu. 112811 
 
 Te pi kbo Yakkba uttbayasana app ekacce Bbagavantam 
 abbivadetvii padakkbinam katvji tattb' ev' antaradbayirasu. 
 
 App' ekacce Bbagavatil saddbim sammodimsu saramodanl- 
 yam katham saranl^^am vltisaretvii tath ev' antaradbayimsu. 
 
 App' ekacce yena Bbagava, ten* arijalim panametvii tattb' 
 ev' antaradbayimsu. 
 
 App' ekacce niima gottam siivetva tattb' ev' antaradbayimsu. 
 
 App' ekacce tunblbbutii tattb' ev' antaradbayimsuti. 112911 
 
 " Ugganbiltba, bbikkbave, Atiinatiyam rakkbam ! Pariyii- 
 punatba, bbikkbave Atiinatiyam rakkbam ! Dbiiretba, bbi- 
 kkbave, Atiinatiyam rakkbam ! Attbasambitiiya, bbikkbave, 
 Atilniitiyii rakkba bhikkbunam bbikkbunlnara upiisakiinam 
 upiisikiinam guttiyii rakkbiiya avibimsilya pbiisu vibiiriiyati. 
 
 Idam avoca Bbagavii : attamanii te bbikkbii Bbagavato 
 bbiisitam abbinandun ti. II 30 II 
 
 A T A X A T I Y A S U T T A M.
 
 DHAMMACAKKA. 109 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AEAHATO SAMMA- 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Baranasiyam 
 vibarati Isipatane Migadilye. Tatra kho Bhagava pafica- 
 vaggiye bliikkhu amantese: || 1 1| 
 
 " Dve 'me, bhikkbave, antii pabbajitena na sevitabbii. 
 Katame dve? 
 
 ' Yo cayam karaesu karaasukballikanuyogo bino gammo 
 potbujjaniko anariyo anattbasambito ; yo cayam atta-kilama- 
 tbanuyogodukkboanariyoanattbasambito; — etekbobbikkbave 
 ubbo ante anupagamma majjbimii patipadii Tatbiigatena 
 abbisambuddha cakkbukarani nanakarani upasamaya abbi- 
 finaya sambodbaya nibbanaya samvattati.' ||2|| 
 
 Katamii ca sii bbikkbave majjbima patipada Tatbagatena 
 abbisambuddbii cakkbukarani fianakarani upasamaya abbi- 
 nniiya sambodbaya nibbanaya samvattati ? 
 
 " Ayam eva ariyo attbangiko maggo, seyyatbidam : Sam- 
 mildittbi, saramasankappo, sammavaca, sammakaramanto, 
 samniiiajlvo sammavayiimo, sammiisati, sammasamiidhi. ||3|| 
 
 Ayam kbo sa, bbikkhave, majjbima patipada Tatbagatena 
 abbisambuddba cakkbukarani nanakarani upasamaya abbin- 
 niiya sambodbaya nibbiina^^a samvattati. ||3|| 
 
 Idam kbo pana, bbikkhave, dukkbam ariyasaccam : jiiti pi 
 dukkbii, jara pi dukkbii, vyiidbi pi dukkbii, maranam pi 
 dukkbam, appiyebi sampayogo dukkbo, piyebi vippayogo 
 dukkbo, yam pi iccbam na labbati tarn pi dukkbam — 
 sankbittena pane' upadanakkhandhii dukkba. ||4|| 
 
 Idam kbo pana, bbikkhave, dukkbasamudayarn ariya- 
 saccam: yayam tanhiiponobbbavika nandi-raga-sabagatii tatra 
 tatrabbinandini, seyyatbidam : KamatanbcT,bbavatanba, vibha- 
 vatanba. ||5 || 
 
 Idam kbo pana, bhikkbave, dukkbanirodham ariyasaccam, 
 yo tassa yeva tanhaya asesa-viraga-nirodbo cago patinissago 
 mutti analayo. II (5 II
 
 110 DHAMMACAKKA. 
 
 Idara kho pana, bliikkliave, dukkhanirodhagaminl pati- 
 padil ariyasaccam. 
 
 A3'am eva ariyo atthangiko maggo : seyyathidam samma- 
 ditthi — pe — sammasaruadbi. ||7|| 
 
 Idam dukkham ariyasaccan ti me, bhikkhave, 
 pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhum udapildi, nii- 
 nam udapadi, pannii udapildi, vijjii udapjidi, aloko 
 udapSdi. II 8 II 
 
 Tain kho pan' idam dukkham ariyasaccam parinfieyan ti 
 me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu — pe — 
 parinfiatan ti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu 
 cakkhum udapadi, fianam udapadi, pannii udapadi, vijjii 
 udapadi, aloko udapadi. ||9|| 
 
 Idam dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam ti me, bhikkhave, 
 
 — pe — aloko udapiidi. || 10 1| 
 
 Tarn kho pan' idam dukkhasamudaj^am ariyasaccam 
 pahiitabban ti me bhikkhave — pe — pahlnan ti me bhi- 
 kkhave — pe — Uloko udapadi. ||11|| 
 
 Idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam ti me bhikkhave 
 
 — pe — illoko udapildi. ||12|| 
 
 Tarn kho pan' idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam sacchi- 
 katabban ti me bhikkhave, — la — sacchikatan ti me, bhi- 
 kkhave, — pe — illoko udapildi. ||13|| 
 
 Idani dukkhanirodhagilmini patipadii arij'asaccan ti me, 
 bhikkhave, — pe — illoko udapiidi. || 14 1| 
 
 Tarn kho pan' idam dukkhanirodhagilmini patipadii 
 ariyasaccan bhiivetabban ti me, bhikkhave, — pe — bhilvitau 
 ti me, bhikkhave, — pe — illoko udapildi. ||15|| 
 
 Yava klvanca me, bhikkhave, imesu catusu ariyasaccesu 
 evain ti-parivattam dviidasii-kilram yathiibhutam fliinadassa- 
 nara na suvisuddhara ahosi : n'eva tiivaham bliikkhave 
 sadevake loke samiirake sabrahmake, sassamanabriihmaniyti 
 pajilya sadevamanussilya anuttarara saramiisambodhim abhi- 
 sambuddho paccanfiiisim. ||1G|| 
 
 Yato ca kho me, bhikkhave, imesu catusu ariyasaccesu 
 evam tiparivattam dvildasilkiiram yathilbhiltara nilnadassanam 
 suvisuddluim ahosi, athahara, bhikkhave, sadevake loke samii- 
 rake sabrahmake sassaraanabriihmanlyii pajiiya sadevama-
 
 DHAMMACAKKA. 211 
 
 nussaya anuttaram sammasambodhira abhlsambuddho ti 
 paccanfiasim. ||17|| 
 
 Nananca pana me dassanam udapadi : ' Akuppii me 
 ceto-vimutti, ayam antima jati, n'atthi diini punabbhavo 
 ti.' II 18 II 
 
 Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana pancavaggiyii bhikkliu 
 Bbagavato bliiisitam abhinandanti. ||19|| 
 
 Imasmim ca pana veyyakaranasmim bhanfiamane jiyasraato 
 Kondanfiassa virajam vltamalam dhammacakkhuni udapadi : 
 * Yam kifici samudaya-dhammam sabbam tarn nirodha- 
 dhamraan ti.' ||20|| 
 
 Pavattite ca pana Bhagavata dhammacakke Bhumma devji 
 saddam anussavesum : ' Evam Bhagavata Baranasiyam Isi- 
 patane Migadiiye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam, 
 appativattiyam samanena \R brahmanena va devena va 
 Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci lokasmin ti.' ||21 1| 
 
 Bhvimmanam devanam saddam sutva Catumabarajika deva 
 saddam anussavesum — pe — . ||22 1| 
 
 Catumabarajikilnam deviinara saddam sutvii, Tavatimsa 
 deva saddam anussavesum — pe — . ||23|| 
 
 Yiima deva — pe — . || 24 1| 
 
 Tusitii deva — pe— . ||25|| 
 
 Nimmanarati devil — pe — . ||26 1| 
 
 Paranimmitavasavattino deva — pe — . ||27|| 
 
 Brahmaparisajja deva — pe — . ||28|| 
 
 Brabmapurohita devJi — pe — . ||29 || 
 
 Mahabrahma deva — pe — . || 30 1| 
 
 Parittjibba deva — pe — . || 31 1| 
 
 Appamanabba devii — pe — . ||32|| 
 
 Abbassarii deva — pe — . ||33|| 
 
 Parittasubha deva — pe — . ||34|| 
 
 Appamanasubba deva — pe — . || 35 1| 
 
 Subbakinna devii — pe — . ||36|i 
 
 Vebappbalii devii — pe — . || 37 II 
 
 Asafinasatta devii — pe — . || 38 1| 
 
 Avibii deva — pe — . ||39|| 
 
 Attappii devii — pe — . ||40|| 
 
 Sudassa deva — pe — . ||41||
 
 112 MAUASAMAYASUTTA. 
 
 SudassT devil — pe — . ||42|| 
 Akanitthil devil — pe — . ||43|| 
 
 Evani Bliagavatii Biiiiinasiyam Isipatane Migadil^-e anutta- 
 rara dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam samanena vii 
 briihmanena vii devena \a. Miirena vii Brahmunii va kenaci 
 vii lokasmin ti. ||44|| 
 
 Iti ha tena klianena tena layena tena mukuttena yava 
 Brahmalokii saddo abbhugganchi, ayafica kho dasasabassi- 
 lokadhiltu sankampi, sampakarnpi, sarapavedhi ; appamiino ca 
 uliiro obhiiso loke piiturahosi atikkamma devilnam devanu- 
 bbiivan ti. ||45|| 
 
 Atha kbo Bhagavii udiinam udiinesi : "Anniisi vata bbo 
 Kondanno, afiniisi vata bho Kondunno ti," ||46|| 
 
 Iti hi' dam iiyasraato Kondafifiassa Anniitakond.aririo tv eva 
 niiinam ahosi. \\ 47 II 
 
 DHAMMACAKKAM. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA- 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Sakkesu 
 viharati Kapilavatthusmim raahiivane mahatii bhikkhu- 
 sarighena saddhim paiicamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeh' eva 
 arahantehi dasahi ca lokadhiitiihi devatii yebhuyyena sanni- 
 patitil honti, Bhagavantam dassaiiiiya bliikkhusanghariea. || 1 1| 
 
 Atha kho catunnam Suddhaviisa-kiiyikiiuarn devanam etad 
 ahosi : — 
 
 " Ayam kho Bhagavii Sakkesu viharati Kapilavatthusmim 
 mahiivane mahatii bhikkhu-saiighena saddhim paficamattehi 
 bhikkhusatehi sabbeh' eva arahantehi, dasahi ca lokadhiituhi 
 devatii yebhuyyena sanuipatitii honti, Bhagavantam dassa- 
 niiya bhikkhu-sahghauca. Yan nuna mayam pi yena Bha- 
 gavii ten' upasasahkaraeyyiima, upasahkamitvii Bhagavato 
 santike paccekam giitham bhiiseyyiiniati." ||2|| 
 
 Atha kho tii devatii seyyathiipi niima balavii puriso
 
 MAHASAMAYASUTTA. II3 
 
 samminjitam va baham pasiireyya pasaritam Ta biiham 
 samraifijeyya evam evam kho Suddhaviisesu devesu antara- 
 hita Bhagavato purato pilturahamsu. || 3 1| 
 
 Atha kho ta devatii Bhagavantam abhiviidetvii ekam- 
 antam atthamsu : ekamantam thita kho eka devatii Bha^a- 
 vato santike imam giithara abhiisi : 
 
 " Mahasamayo pavanasmiin 
 deva-kayii samagatii ! 
 Agatamhii imam dhammasamayam 
 dakkhitiiye aparajitasanghan" ti. \\ 1 1| 
 
 Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham 
 abhasi : 
 
 " Tatra bhikkhavo samadahamsu 
 cittam attano ujukam akamsu 
 Sarathi va nettiini gahetva 
 
 indriyiini rakkhanti pandita " ti. || 2 1| 
 
 Atha kho aparii devata Bhagavato santike imam gilthara 
 abhasi : 
 
 *' Chetva khilam chetva paligham 
 indakhllam uhaccam anejii 
 Te caranti suddhji vimala 
 cakkhumata sudanta susuniiga " ti. \\ 3 \\ 
 
 Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam giitham 
 abhasi : 
 
 " Ye keci buddham saranam gatase 
 na te gamissanti apayam 
 Pahaya mauusam deham 
 devakayara paripuressanti " ti. || 4 1| 
 
 Atha kho Bhagavii bhikkhu amantesi : 
 
 " Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, dasasu lokadhatiisu devata 
 sannipatita Tathagatam dassaniiya bhikkhu sangharica. Ye 
 pi te, bhikkhave, ahesum atltam addhanam arahanto samma- 
 sambuddha, tesam pi Bhagavantanam ete parama yeva devata 
 sannipatita ahesum, seyyatha pi mayham etarahi. Ye pi te, 
 bhikkhave, bhavissanti anilgatara addbiinam arahanto samma- 
 sambuddha, tesam pi Bhagavantanam ete parama yeva 
 
 8
 
 114 MAHASAMAYASUTTA. 
 
 devatii sannipatltii bhavissanti, sej'jatha pi mayham eta- 
 
 rahi."||5|| 
 
 " Acikkhissiimi, bhikkhave devaka^iinara niimani, kltta- 
 yissumi, bhikkhave, devakilyanam iiiiiuani, desissiimi, bhi- 
 kkhave, devakayanam namani. Tarn suniitha, sadhukam 
 manasikarotha bhasissilmiti. || 6 1| 
 
 " Evam bhante ! " ti. Te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccasso- 
 sum. Bhagavii etad avoca : ||7|| 
 
 " Silokam anukassami, yatlia bhurama tad assita 
 Ye sitii girigabbhjiram pahitattil samahita 
 Puthu siha va sallina lomahamsabhisambhuno 
 Odiita manasil saddhil vippassanam aniivila 
 Bhiyo panca-sate natva vane Kiipilavattliave. || 1 1| 
 
 Tato ilmantayi satthii siivake sasane rate : 
 Devakaya abhikkanta te vijjinatha bhikkhave ? 
 Te ca iltappam akarum sutva Buddhassa siisanam 
 Tesam patur iihu nanani amanussana dassanam. ||2|| 
 
 App' eke satam addakkhum sahassam atha sattati 
 Satam eke sahassanam amanussanam addamsu 
 App eke 'nantam adakkhura disa sabbil phutii ahii 
 Tailca sabbam abhinna^'a pavakkhitviiua eakkhuma 
 Tato iimantayi satthii siivake siisane rate : 
 Devakiiyii abhikkantii te vijiiniitha bhikkhave ? 
 Ye vo 'ham kittayissiimi giriihi anupubbaso. ||3|| 
 
 Sattasahassii Yakkhii ca bhummii Kiipikvatthavii 
 Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino 
 Modainiinii abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim va- 
 nam. ||4|| 
 
 Cha sahassii Hemavatii Yakkhii niinatta-vannino 
 Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino 
 Modamiina abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim va- 
 nara. I|5|| 
 
 Silt iigira ti-sahassii Yakkhii — pe — . ||6|| 
 
 Ice ete solasa sahassa Yakkhii — pe — . ||7|| 
 
 Vessiimittii pafica satii Yakkhii — pe — . ||8||
 
 MAHASAMAYASUTTA. 1 15 
 
 Kumbhiro Eajagahiko Yepullassa nivesanara, 
 Bhiyo nam satasahassam Yakkhiinani payirupiisati, 
 Kumbhiro Eajagahiko so p' iiga samitim vanam, ||9|| 
 
 Puriraanca disam rajii Dhatarattho tarn pasasati 
 Gandhabbanam adhipati mahiiraja yasassi so. 
 Putta pi tassa bahavo indanamii mahabbah^ 
 Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino 
 Modamanii abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim va- 
 nam. II 1011 
 
 Dakkhinafica disam rajii Yirulho tarn pasasati 
 Kumbhandanam adhipati mahiiraja yasassi so 
 Putta pi tassa — pe — . II 11 II 
 
 Pacchimafica disam riijil Yiriipakkho tarn pasiisati 
 Niigiinaiica adhipati mahiiriij il yasassi so. 
 Puttii pi tassa — pe — . || 12 il 
 
 TJttaranca disam rajii Kuvero tarn pasiisati 
 Yakkhiinam adhipati mahiirilja yasassi so 
 Putta pi tassa — pe — . || 13 1| 
 
 Purimam disam Dhatarattho, dakkhinena Yirulhako 
 Pacchimena Yirupakkho, Kuvero uttaram disam 
 Cattaro te mahariija samanta eaturo disii 
 Daddallamana atthamsu vane Kapilavatthave. ||14|| 
 
 Tesam miiyiivino dilsii ilgu vancanikii sathil 
 Mii^'ii Kutendu Yetendu Yitucca Yitucco sahii 
 Candano Kamasettho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca 
 Paniido Opamanno ca devasuto ca Miltali 
 Citta-Seno ca Gandhabbo Nalarajii Janesabho 
 Agum Paucasikho ceva Timbaru Suriyavaccasa 
 Ete c' anile ca riljiino Gandhabbii saha riijubhi 
 Modamanii abhikkiimum bhikkhiinam samitim va- 
 nam. II 1511 
 
 Athagu Niibhasa Naga Yesala saha Tacchaka 
 Kambalassatarii ilgu Piiyiigii saha iiiitibhi, 
 Yilmuuii Dharatthil ca iigu Niigii yasassino 
 Eriivano Mahaniigo so p' iigu samitim vanam. ||16||
 
 116 MAHASAMAYASUTTA. 
 
 Ye nagaraje sahasa haranti 
 
 dibbil dvijil pakkhl visuddhacakkbu 
 
 vehasayii te vana-majjha-patta 
 
 Citta Supanna iti tesam namam 
 
 abhayam tadii Nagarajanam asi 
 
 Supannato kbemam akasi Buddbo 
 
 Sanbilhi vilcahi upavbayantii 
 
 Nagii Supanna saranam agamsu Buddham. 1117 1| 
 
 Jita vajira-battbena samuddara asurii sita. 
 Bbataro Yilsavas' ete iddbimanto yasassino. 
 Kiilakanja raababimsa asurii Diinavegbasa 
 Vepacitti Sucitti ca Pabariido Narauci sabii 
 Satanca Baliputtanam sabbe Terocanaraakii 
 Sannaybitva balim senam Riibubbaddam upagaraum 
 Samayo diini, bbadante, bbikkbiinam samitim va- 
 nam. II18II 
 
 Apo ca devil Patbavl Tejo Yilyo tad iigaraura 
 Yarunii Yilrunii devii Somo ca Yasasii saba 
 Mettiikarunii-kiiyikii iigu devii yasassino 
 Das' ete dasadhiikii^'ii sabbe niinatta-vannino 
 Idbimanto — pe — samitim vanam ||19|| 
 
 Yenbu ca devii Saball ca Asamii ca duve Yamii 
 Candass' upanissii devii candam iigu purakkbatvii 
 Surij'^ass' upanissii deva suriyam iigu purakkbatvii 
 Nakkbattiini purakkbatvii iigu mandavablbakii 
 Yasiinam Yiisavo settbo Sakko p' iigu Purindado 
 Das' ete dasadbiikiiyii sabbe niinatta-vannino 
 Iddbimanto — pe — samitim vanam. II 20 II 
 
 Atb' iigu Sababbii devii jalam aggi sikbii-r-iva 
 Arittbakii ca Rojii ca Ummii-puppba-nibbiisino ; 
 Yarunii saba Dbamraii ca Accutii ca Anejakii 
 Suleyya Rucirii iigu, iigu Yiisavanesino 
 Das' ete dasadbii kiiyii — pe — samitim vanam. 1121 II 
 
 Samiinii Mabiisamiinii Miinusiiiniinusuttaraa 
 Kbiddiipadusikii iigu, iigu Munopudusikii
 
 MAHASAMAYASUTTA. 117 
 
 Athagu Harayo devil ye ca Lohitavasino 
 
 Piiragii Mahiipiiragil iigu cleva yasassino 
 
 Das 'ete dasadhii kiiyii — pe — saraitim vanam. || 22 1| 
 
 Sukha Karumha Aruna agu Yeglianasa saha 
 Odiitagayha Piimokkha iigu devii Yicakkhana 
 Sadiimatta Haragajii Missakii ca yasassino 
 Thanayam iigu Pajjunno yo disii abhivassati : 
 Das' ete dasadha kayii — pe — samitim vanam. II 23 II 
 
 Khemiyii Tusitii Yiiraii Katthaka ca yasassino 
 
 Lambitaka Liimasetthii Joti niiraa ca Asava 
 
 Nina man aratino iIo:u ath' iisru Paranimmita 
 
 Das' ete dasadha kiiyii — pe — samitim vanam. II 24 II 
 
 Satth' ete deva-nikayii sabbe niinatta-vannino 
 Niima-dvayena aganchum ye c' aiifie sadisii sahii : 
 ' Pamutthajiitim akhllara oghatinnam anasavam 
 Dakkhem' oghataram Niigam candam va asitatigam.' II 25 II 
 
 Subrahmii Paramatto ca putta iddhimato saha 
 
 Sanam kumaro Tisso ca so p' iigu samitim vanam. ||26|| 
 
 Sahassa Brahmalokiinam Mahiibralima bhititthati 
 TJpapanno jutimanto bhismiikiiyo yasassi so. ||27|| 
 
 Das' ettha issara iigu pacceka-vasavattino ; 
 Tesanca majjhato agu Harito parivarito. ||28|| 
 
 Te ca sabbe abhikkante sa-Inda-deve sa-brahmake 
 Marasenii abhikkiimi : Passa kanhassa mandiyam. || 29 1| 
 
 * Ettha ganhatha bandhatha riigena bandham atthu ve 
 Samanta parivarethii mii vo muilcittha koci nam.' ||'30|| 
 
 Iti tattha mahiiseuo kanhasenara apesayi 
 Piininii talam iihacca saram katviina bheravam 
 Yathii piivussako megho thanaj^anto savijjuko 
 Tada so paccudiivatti saiikuddho asayam vasi. ||31 1| 
 
 Tanca sabbam abhinniiya pavakkhitvana cakkhuma 
 Tato iimantayi satthii siivake siisane rate : 
 Miirasena abhikkantii te vijiiniitha bhikkhavo ?
 
 118 ALAYAILiSUJITA. 
 
 Te ca atappam akarum sutvil Buddhassa siisanam. 
 Vitarageh' apakkamum na sam lomam pi iiljayura. || 32 1| 
 
 Sabbe vijita sangama-bhayabhltii j'^asassino 
 Modanti saha bhutehi sii vakil te jane sutati. ||33|| 
 
 MAHASAMAYASUTTAM. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA- 
 SAMBUDHASSA. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam saraayam Bhagava Alaviyam 
 viharati Alavakassa Yakkhassa bhavane. Atha kho Alavako 
 Yakkho yena Bhagava ten' upasankami upasankamitva Bha- 
 gavantam etad avoca : 
 
 ** Nikkhama samana " ti. 
 
 " * Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava nikkhami. 
 
 " Pavisa samana " ti. 
 
 " * Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava pavisi. 
 
 Dutiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca : 
 " Nikkhama samana " ti. 
 
 " ' Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava nikkhami. 
 
 " Pavisa samana " ti. 
 
 " 'Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava pavisi. 
 
 Tatiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca : 
 " Nikkhama samana " ti. 
 
 " ' Sadhavuso ' " ti, Bhagava nikkhami. 
 
 " Pavisa samana " ti. 
 
 " 'Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava pavisi. 
 
 Catutthara pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad 
 avoca : " Nikkhama samana " ti. 
 
 " 'Na kho panahara avuso nikkhamissiimi. Yan te karanl- 
 yam tarn karohi ' " ti. 
 
 " Panham tarn samana pucchissilmi. Sace me na bya- 
 karissasi, cittam vii te khipissilmi, hadayara va te phillessami, 
 pjidesu va gahetvJi pjiram Gafigilya khipissaini ti."
 
 ALAVAKASUTTA. U9 
 
 " ' Na khviiham tarn, iivuso, passiimi sadevake loke, sama- 
 rake, sabrahmake, sassamana brahmaniya pajiija sadevama- 
 nussaya, yo me cittam vii khipeyya, hadayam va plialej^ya, 
 padesu vil gahetvii pa ram Gangaya khipeyj^a. Api ca tvam 
 avuso puccha yadii kankhasi ' " ti. 
 
 " Kim sudha yittam purlsassa settham ? kimsu sucinno 
 sukham avahati ? 
 Kimsu have sadhutaram rasanam ? katham jlvim jivitam 
 ahu setthan?" ti. ||l|i 
 
 " ' Saddh' idha vittam purisassa settham, dhammo sucinno 
 sukham iivahati, 
 Saccam have sadhutaram rasanam, paniia jlvim jivitam 
 
 ahu setthan ' " ti. ||2|| 
 
 " Kathamsu tarati ogham ? katham tarati annavam ? 
 Kathamsu dukkham acceti ? kathamsu parisujjha- 
 
 titi?"||3|| 
 
 " ' Saddhiiya tarati ogham, appamadena annavam, 
 
 Yiriyena dukkham acceti, parinaya parisujjhati. ' " ||4|| 
 
 " Kathamsu labhate pailnam ? kathamsu vindate dhanam? 
 Kathamsu kittim pappoti ? katham mittani gantheti ? 
 Asma loka param lokam katham pecca na socati ? " || 5 1| 
 
 " ' Saddahiino arahatam dhammam nibbanapattiya 
 Sussiisam labhate panfiam appamatto vicakkhano. 
 Patirupakari dhuravii vutthatii vindate dhanam 
 Saccena kittim pappoti dadam mittani ganthati, 
 Asma loka param lokam evam pecca na socati. 
 Yass' ete caturo dhamma saddhassa gharamesino 
 Saccam dhammo dhiti cago sa ve pecca na socati. 
 Ingha aniie pucchassu puthu samanabrahmane 
 Yadi sacca damii cagii khantyabhiyyo' dha vijjati. ' " ||6|| 
 
 " Katham nu diini puccheyyam puthu samanabrahmane 
 Svaham ajja pajanatni so attho saraparayiko. 
 Atthaya vata me Buddho vasayalavim agato
 
 120 PARABHAVASUTTA. 
 
 Yo' liam ajja pajaniimi yattha dinnain rnabapplialain 
 So aham vicarissami garnagamam purapuram 
 Namassaraano sarabuddliam dhammassa ca sudham- 
 matan" ti. ||7II 
 
 A L A V A K A S U TT A M . 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavti Siivatthiyam 
 viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa iirame. Atlia kho afiua- 
 taril devatfi abhikkantilya rattiyii abhikkantavannii kevala- 
 kappam Jetavanam obhasetvil, yena Bbagava ten' upa- 
 sarikami upasarikamitva Bhagavantam abhiviidetvii ekaman- 
 tam attbasi, ekaraantam tbitii kbo sa devatii Bbagavantam 
 gatbaya ajjbabbasi. 
 
 *' Parabbavantam purisam mayam puccbama Gotaraaip 
 Bbagavantam puttbum iigamma kim parabbavato 
 mukbam ? " || 1 1| 
 
 " * Suvljano bbavam boti, suvijano parabbavo 
 
 Dbammakamo bbavam boti, dbammadessi pariibba- 
 
 vo.'"||2|| 
 
 " Iti b' etam vijanama : patbamo so parabbavo 
 Dutiyam Bbagavii brubi : kim parabbavato mu- 
 kbam?" II 3 II 
 
 " ' Asant' assa piya bonti, sante na kurute piyam 
 
 asantam dbammam roceti tarn parabbavato mu- 
 kbam.'" II 4 II 
 
 " Iti b' etam vijanama : dutiyo so parabbavo 
 tatiyam Bbagava brubi: kim parabbavato mukbam?" || 5 1| 
 
 " * Niddiislll sabiislll anuttbatii ca yo naro 
 
 alaso kodbapanniito, tarn parabbavato mukbam.' " || G 1| 
 
 " Iti b' etam vijanjima : tatiyo so parabbavo 
 eatuttbani Bbagava brubi : kiin parabbavato mu- 
 kbam?" ||7||
 
 PARABHAVASUTTA. 121 
 
 " ' Yo miltaram va pitaram \R jinnakam gata-yobbanam 
 pahusanto na bbarati, tam parilbhavato mukham.' " ||8|| 
 
 " Iti h' etam vijanama : catuttho so parabhavo 
 paiicamam Bhagava briihi : kim parabhavato mu- 
 kham?"!! 9 1| 
 
 " ' Yo brahmanam va samanam va anfiam va pi vanibba- 
 kam 
 musavadena vanceti, tam parabhavato mukham.' " ||10|| 
 
 " Iti h' etam vijanama : pancamo so parabhavo 
 chattham Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu- 
 
 "kham?" ||ll!| 
 
 " * Pahuvitto puriso sa-hiranno sa-bhojano 
 
 eko bhufijati sadhuni, tam parabhavato mukham.'" ||12|| 
 
 " Iti h' etam vijanama : chattho so parabhavo 
 sattamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu- 
 kham?" ||13!| 
 
 " * Jatitthaddho, dhanatthaddho, gottatthaddho ca yo naro 
 tam iiatim atimanfieti, tarn parabhavato mukham.' " !| 14 1| 
 
 " Iti h' etam vijanama : sattamo so parabhavo 
 Attham Bhagava bruhi: kim parabhavato mukham?" ||15|| 
 
 " ' Itthidhutto, suradhutto, akkhadhutto ca yo naro 
 
 laddham laddham vinilseti, tam parabhavato mu- 
 kham.' "!! 16*!! 
 
 "Iti h' etam vijanama : atthamo so parabhavo 
 navamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu- 
 kham?" ||17!| 
 
 * " Sehi darehi santuttho vesiya upadissati 
 
 dissati paradaresu, tam parabhavato mukham."' ||18|| 
 
 " Iti h' etam vijanamo : navamo so parabhavo 
 dasamam Bhagava bruhi : kiui parabhavato mu- 
 kham?" || 19 1| 
 
 " * Atita-yobbano poso iineti timbarutthanim 
 
 tassa issa na supati, tam parabhavato mukhain.' " !|20||
 
 122 VASALASUTTA. 
 
 ** Iti h' etam Tijiinama : dasamo so parabhavo 
 ekJIdasamam BhagavJi briihi : kim parilbbavato mu- 
 
 kham?" ||21|| 
 
 " * Ittbl-sondim vikiranim purisam vil pi tadisam 
 
 issariyasmim tbapeti tarn pariibbavato mukbam.' " 1|22|| 
 
 " Iti h' etam vijanama : ekildasamo so pariibbavo 
 dvadasamaru Bbagavii brQbi : kim parabbavato mu- 
 kbam?" II 23 II 
 
 " * Appabbogo mahatanbo kbattiye jiiyate kule 
 
 so 'dba rajjam pattbayati : tarn parabbavato . mu- 
 kbam.' "|| 24 1| 
 
 " ' Ete parabbave loke pandito samavekkbiya 
 
 ariyo dassana-sarapatto salokam bbajate si van'" ti. ||25|| 
 
 PARABHAVASUTTAM. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AUAHATO SAMMA- 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekara samayam Bhagavii Savattbij^am 
 vibarati Jetavane Auatbapindikassa cTriiine. Atba kko 
 Bbagava pubbanba samaj^am nivasetva pattaclvaram iidaya 
 Savattbiyam pindiiya piivisi. Tena kbo pana samayena 
 Agglka-Bbaradvajassa briibmanassa nivesane aggi pajjalito 
 hoti Jibuti paggabitii. || 1 1| 
 
 Atba kbo Bbagava Savattbiyam sapadiinara pindiiya cara- 
 milno, yena Aggika-Bbiiradvajassa brabmanassa nivesanam, 
 ten' uppasankarai. i|2|| Addasii kbo Aggika-Bbiiradvajo 
 briibmano Bbagavantara diirato agaccbantam disviina Bba- 
 gavantam etad avoca : 
 
 " Tatr' eva mundaka, tatr' eva samanaka, tatr' eva vasalaka 
 tittbabi ti." || 3 1| 
 
 Evam vutte Bbagava Aggika-Bbiiradvajum briibraanam 
 etad avoca :
 
 VASALASUTTA. 123 
 
 " ' Janiisi pana tvam briihmana, vasalam vii vasala-karane 
 va dhamme ti.' " ||4|| 
 
 " Na khvaham, bho Gotaraa, janarni vasalam va vasala- 
 karane vii dhamme ti. Sadhu me bhavam Gotamo tathil 
 dhammam desetu : j^atliaham jiineyyam vasalam va vasala- 
 karane va dhamme ti." 
 
 ** ' Tena hi, brahmana, suniihi sadhukam manasikarohi 
 bhSsisscTmi ti.' " || 5 f| 
 
 "Evam bho" ti kho Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmano Bha- 
 gavato paccassosi. BhagavJi etad avoca : ||6|| 
 
 Kodhano upanahi ca pJipamakkhT ca yo naro 
 vipannaditthi mayavl, tarn jafina vasalo iti. || 1 1| 
 
 Ekajam va dijam va pi yo 'dha piinani himsati. 
 yassa pane dayii n'atthi, tam janna vasalo iti. \12\\ 
 
 Yo hanti parirundhati gamiini nigamiini ca 
 niggiihako samailnato, tam jafina vasalo iti. ||3|| 
 
 Game va yadi vara fine yam paresam mamayitam 
 theyya adinnam adiyati, tam janna vasalo iti. ||4|| 
 
 Yo have inam adiiya vuccamano palaj'ati 
 
 na hi te inam atthiti, tam janna vasalo iti. ||5|| 
 
 Yo ve kincikkha-kamyata panthasmim vajatam janam 
 hantvii kincikkham iideti, tam jafina vasalo iti. |)6|| 
 
 Yo attahetu parahetu dhanahetu ca yo naro 
 sakkhiputtho musiibriiti, tam jafifia vasalo iti. |)7|| 
 
 Yo fiiitinam sakhiinam vii diiresu patidissati 
 sahasa sampiyena va, tam janria vasalo iti. ||8l| 
 
 Yo mataram va pitaram vii jinnakam gatayobbanam 
 pahiisanto na bharati, tam jafina vasalo iti. ||9 || 
 
 Yo mataram vii pitaram vii bhiitaram va bhaginim 
 sassum hanti roseti vii, tam jafifiii vasalo iti. |) 10 1| 
 
 Yo atthara pucchito santo anattham anusiisati. 
 paticchautena manteti, tam jafifiii vasalo iti. || 11 1|
 
 124 YASALASUTTA. 
 
 Yo katvji papakam karamam * raa mam jafina ' ti icchati 
 so paticchanna-kammanto, tam jafinii vasalo iti. || 12 || 
 
 Yo ve parakulam gantvii bhutvana sucibhojanam 
 agatam na patipiijeti, tam jail fiil vasalo iti. ||13j| 
 
 Yo brabmanam vii samanara vii annam vii pi vanibbakam 
 musiivadena vanceti, tam janfiii vasalo iti, ||14|| 
 
 Yo brabmanam vii samanam vii bbattakiile upattbite 
 roseti vaca na ca deti, tam jafifia vasalo iti. || 15 1| 
 
 Asatam yo 'dba pabriiti mobena paliguntbite 
 kincikkbam nijigimsiino, tam jarina vasalo iti. ||16|| 
 
 Yo c'attanain samukkamse paranca avajiinjiti 
 nibino sena milnena, tam jafina vasalo iti. ||17|| 
 
 Rosako kadariyo ca piiijiccbo maccbarl satbo 
 abiriko anottapl, tam jannii vasalo iti. ||18j! 
 
 Yo buddbam paribbasati atba va tassa sjivakam 
 paribbiijam gabattbam va, tam jannii vasalo iti. ||19|| 
 
 Yo ve anaraba santo, arabam patijiiniiti 
 coro sabrabraake loke esa kbo vasaladbamo ! 
 ete kbo vasalii vuttil mayii vo ye pakiisitii. ||20|| 
 
 Na jaccii vasalo boti, na jaccii boti briibmano 
 kammanii vasalo boti, kammanil boti briibmano. ||21|| 
 
 Tadamina pi jiiniitba yatba me 'dam nidassanam : 
 " Candiilaputto Sopiiko Miitango iti vissuto. ||22|| 
 So yasam paramam patto IMiltango yam sudullabbam 
 agancburn tass'upattbilnamkbattiyiibriibmanilbabn. H23|| 
 So devayiinam iiruyba virajam so mabiipatbam 
 kilmariigam viriijetvii brabmalokupago iihu. ||24|| 
 Na nam jiiti niviiresi brabraalokupapattiyil, 
 ajjbiiyakiikule jiita brilbmanii mantabandbuno : ||25 1| 
 Te ca piipesu kammcsu abbinbam upadissare 
 dittb 'eva dbamrae giiraybii samparilye ca duggatim 
 na te jiiti niviireti duggaccii garabiiya vii: " l|26[|
 
 KASIBHARADVAJASUTTA. 125 
 
 Na jaccii vasalo hoti, na jacca hoti brahmano 
 kammana vasalo hoti, kammana hoti brahmano. ||27|| 
 
 Evam vutte Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmano Bhaga van tarn 
 etad avoca : 
 
 " * Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam bho Gotama ! 
 nikkujjitam vii ukkujjey3^a, paticchannam va vivareyya, 
 mulhassa va maggam iicikkheyya, andhakare vii telapajjotam 
 dhareyya cakkhumanto rfipani dakkhinantiti : evam eva 
 bhota Gotamanena aneka pariyiiyena dhammo pakasito. 
 Esaham Bhagavantam Gotamam saranam gacchami dham- 
 manca bhikkhusanghanca ! Upasakam mam bhavam Gotamo 
 dharetu, ajjatagge panupetam saranam gatan ti ' " ! || 7 || 
 
 VASALASUTTAM. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Magadhesu 
 viharati Dakkhiniigirismim Ekaniilayara briihmanagame. || 1 1| 
 Tena kho pana samayena Kaslbharadviijassa bnThmanassa 
 pancamattani nahgala-satani payuttiini honti vappakiile. |(2|| 
 Atha kho Bhagava pubbanhasamayam nivasetva patta-civa- 
 ram iidaya yena Kaslbharadviijassa briihmanassa kammanto, 
 ten' upasahkami. || 3 1| Tena kho pana samayena Kaslbhii- 
 radviijassa briihmanassa parivesanii vattati. |(4|| Atha kho 
 Bhagavii yena parivesanii ten' upasahkami upasahkamitvii 
 ekamantam atthiisi. addasii kho Kaslbhiiradviijo briihmano 
 Bhagavantam etad avoca : 
 
 " Aham kho, samana, kasiimi ca vapami ca, kasitvii ca 
 vapitvii ca bhufijiimi. Tvam pi samana kasassu ca vapassu 
 kasitva ca vapitva ca bhunjassu ti." 
 
 " ' Aham pi kho, briihmana, kasiimi ca vapiimi ca kasitvii 
 ca vapitvii ca bhufijiimi ti.' " 
 
 " Na kho pana mayam passiima bhoto Gotamassa yugam 
 vii nahgalam va phalam vii piicanam va balivaddam vii."
 
 126 * kasTbhaeadvajasutta. 
 
 Atha ca pana bhavain Gotamo evam ilha : — 
 
 " ' Aham pi kho biahmana kasilini ca vapiimi ca kasitva 
 
 ca vapitva ca bhunjatniti.' " 
 
 Atha kho Kaslbharadviljo brahmano Bhagavantam gathaya 
 
 ajjhabhiisi: \\b\\ 
 
 "Kassako patijiinasi na ca passama te kasim 
 kasino pucchito bruhi, yathii janemu te kasim." 1| 1 1| 
 
 " * Saddhii bijam, tapo vutthi, pannii me yuga-nangalara 
 hirira Tsii, mano yottam, sati me phiilapacanam. ||2|| 
 Kayagutto vaclgutto ahiire udare yato 
 saccam karomi tiddanam soraccam me pamocanam. ||3|| 
 Virij'am me dhura-dhorayham yogakkhemadhivahanam 
 gacchati ativattanam yattha gantvii na socati. |)4|| 
 Evam esa kasi katthii sa hoti amatapphalji 
 etam kasim kasitviina sabbadukkha pamuccatiti.' " ||5|| 
 
 Atha kho KasTbharadvajo brjlhraano mahatiya kamsiipatiya 
 piiyasam vaddhetvii Bhagavato upanamesi : 
 
 " Bhunjatu bhavam Gatarao piiyasam ! Kassako bhavam, 
 yamhi bhavam Gotamo amatapphalam kiisim kiisatiti." i|6|| 
 
 " ' Giithabhigltam me abhojaneyyam 
 sampassatam brahmana n' esa dharaino 
 giithabhigltam panudanti buddhil 
 dhamrae sati, biahmana, vutti-r-esil.' " ||6|| 
 
 " ' Aiiiiena ca kevalinam mahesim 
 khlnasavam kukkuccaviipasantam 
 annena piiuena upatthahassu 
 khettam hi tarn puniiapekhassa hotiti.' " ||7|| 
 
 " Atha kassa cahara bho Gotama imam piiyiisam dammiti." 
 " ' Na khvaham tarn, brilhmana, passilmi sadevake loke 
 saraiirake sabrahmako sassamanabriilimaniya pajilya sadeva- 
 manussiiya, yassa so pilyiiso bhutto saramil pariniiraam 
 gaccheyya, annatra Tathiigatassa vii Tathilgatasilvakassa vii : 
 tena hi tvara, briihmana, tarn piiyiisam appaharite vii chaddeti 
 appilnake vii udake opiliipehiti. || 7 \\ 
 
 Atha kho Kaslbharadviijo briihmano tarn piiyiisam appii-
 
 SACCAVIBHANGA. 127 
 
 nake udake opiliipesi. Atha kho so piiyaso udake pakkhitto 
 ciccitaj^ati ciccitayati sandhupayati sampadhiipayati : seyya- 
 thapi niima phiilo divasii santatto udake pakkhitto ciccitayati 
 ciccitayati sandhiipil^^ati sampadliQpaj'ati : evam eva so 
 pilyiiso udake pakkhitto ciccitayati ciccitiiyati sandhupayati 
 sampadhupayati. ||8|| 
 
 Atha kho Kaslbharadviijo briihmano samviggo loraahattha- 
 jiito yena Bhagavii ten' upasankami upasankamitvii Bhaga- 
 Yato padesu sirasii nipatitvii Bhagavantam etad avoca : 
 
 " Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam, bho Gotama ! 
 seyyathapi bho Gotama nikkujjitam vii ukkujjey3'a, pati- 
 channam va vivareyya, mulhassa vii maggam acikkheyya, 
 andhakare Ya telapajjotam dhiireyya cakkhumanto rfipani 
 dakkhintiti : Evam eva, bho Gotama, aneka pariyayena 
 dhammo pakiisito. Esahara bhagavantam Gotamam sara- 
 nam gacchiimi dhammanca bhikkhu-sanghailca. Labheyyam 
 aham bhoto Gotamassa sautike pabbajjam labheyyam upa- 
 sampadan ti." |i9|| 
 
 Alattha kho Kaslbhiiradvajo briihmano Bhagavato santike 
 pabbajjam, alattha upasampadam. Acirupasampanno kho 
 pan' aj'asma Bharadvajo eko vupakattho appamatto iitilpl 
 pahitatto viharanto na cirass' eva yass' atthti^^a kulaputta 
 sammad eva agarasma anagariyam pabbajanti, tad anutta- 
 ram brahmacari3"a-pari3'osiinam ditth' eva dhamme sayam 
 abhinna sacchikatvii upasampajja vihiisi. 
 
 " KhTnii jiiti, vusitam brahmacariyam, katam karanlyam, 
 naparam itthatta3'ati," abhififia annataro ca kho pan' ayasma 
 Bharadvajo arahataiu ahositi. ||10|| 
 
 KASIBHARADVAJASUTTAM. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA- 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Evam me sutain : Ekam samaj'am Bhagava Bariinasi3'am 
 viharati Isipatane Migadaye. Tatra kho Bhagava bhikkhu 
 amantesi : 'bhikkhavo' ti, 'bhadante' ti. Te bhikkhu Bha- 
 gavato paccassosuin. Bhagava etad avoca : || 1 1|
 
 128 SACCAVIBHANGA. 
 
 " Tathiigatena, bhikkhave, arahatii saramasambuddhena 
 Bariinasiyam Isipatane Migadilye anuttaram dhamraacakkam 
 pavattitam appativattiyam samanena vii brahmanena \R 
 devena vii Miirena vil Brahmunii vii kenaci vii lokasmin ti. 
 Yad idam catunnara ariyasaccauam acikkhatii desatii panna- 
 patil patthapatii vivarana vibhajanji uttanakammam. 
 
 Katamesam catunnam ? 
 
 Dukkhassa ari3^asaccassa iicikkhata — pe — . 
 
 Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — . 
 
 Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — 
 
 DukkhamrodbagaminIpatij)ada ariyasaccassa acikkhata 
 — pe— .11211 
 
 Tathagratena, bhikkhave, arahata saramasambuddhena 
 Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadiiye anuttaram dhamraacakkam 
 pavattitam appativattiyam samanena vii brahmanena vii 
 devena va Miirena vii Brahmuna va kenaci va lokasmim : 
 yad idam iraesam catunnam ariyasaccanara iicikkhatii 
 — pe—. 11311 
 
 " Sevetha, bhikkhave, Siiriputta-MoggalhHne, bhejatha, bhi- 
 kkhave, Siiriputta-Moggalliine panditii bhikkhii anuggiihakii 
 brahmaciirinam : sey3'athapi bhikkhave, janetti evara Siiri- 
 putto : seyyathapi jatassa iipiideta evam Moggallano. Siiri- 
 putto, bhikkhave, sotiipatti-phale vineti ; Moggallano ntta- 
 matthe vineti ; Siiriputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattiiri ariya- 
 sacciini vittharena iicikkhitum desetum paiinapetum vivaritum 
 vibhajitum uttiiniikiitun ti, 
 
 Idam avoca Bhagavii : idam vatvii Sugato utthiiyasanii 
 vihiiram pavisi. ||4|| 
 
 Tatra kho iiyasmii Siiriputto acirapakkantassa Bhagavato 
 bhikkhu iimantesi : 
 
 'Avuso bhikkhavo' ti 'iivuso' ti kho. te bhikkhii iiyasmato 
 Silriputtassa paccassosum : Ayasraii Siiriputto etad avoca: 
 
 " Tathiigatena, iivuso, arahatii saramiisarabuddhena Biirii- 
 nasiyam Isipatane Migadiiye anuttaram dhamraacakkam 
 pavattitam appativatti^'am samanena vii briihraanena vii 
 devena vii Miirena vii Brahmunii vii kenaci vii lokasmim: 
 yad idam catunnam ariyasacciiaam iicikkhatii — pe — . ||5||
 
 SACCAVIBHANGA. 129 
 
 Katamesam catunnam ? 
 Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa iicikkhatii — pe — 
 Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatii — pe — . 
 Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa iicikkhata — pe — . 
 Dukkhanirodhagiiminlpatipadassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatii 
 — pe— . II6II 
 
 Katama ca, avuso, dukkham ariyasaccam ? 
 
 " Jfiti pi dukkha, jarii pi dukkhii, vyiidhi pi dukkhii, mara- 
 nam pi dukkham, soka-parideva-dukkha-domanass-upjiyasa 
 dukkha : yam p' iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham, san- 
 khittena pailc' upadanakkhandhji dukkha. 
 
 Katamii ca avuso jiiti ? 
 
 Ya tesam tesam sattanam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jati 
 saiijiiti okkanti abhinibbatti khandbanam patubhavo ayatina- 
 nam patiliibho. — Ayam vuccat' iivuso jiiti. ||1|| 
 
 Katama ca avuso jara ? 
 
 Ya tesam tesam sattanam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jara, 
 jTranata, khandiccam, paliccam valittacata ayuno samhiini 
 indriyanam paripako. — Ayam vuccat' avuso jara. ||2|| 
 
 Katama ca avuso maranam ? 
 
 Yil tesam tesam sattanam tamhii tamha sattanikaye cuti 
 cavanatii bhedo antaradhanam maccu maranam kalakiriya 
 khandbanam bhedo kalebarassa nikkhepo. — Idam vuccat' 
 avuso maranam. ||3|| 
 
 Katama ca a^vuso soko ? 
 
 Yo kho jivuso aiinataraiinatarena byasanena samanncTga- 
 tassa annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa soko 
 socanii socanattam antosoko antoparisoko. — Ayam vuccat' 
 avuso soko. ||4|| 
 
 Katama ca iivuso paridevo ? 
 
 Yo kho iivuso annatarannatarena byasanena samanniiga- 
 tassa annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa iidevo 
 paridevo iidevo paridevo iidevanii paridevana iidevitattam 
 paridevitattam, Ayam vuccat' iivuso paridevo. ||5|| 
 
 Katamii ca dukkham? 
 
 Yam kho iivuso kiiyikam dukkham kiiyikam kiiya- 
 samphassajam dukkham asiitam vedayitam. — Idam vuccat' 
 avuso dukkham. II 6 II
 
 130 SACCAYIBHANGA. 
 
 Katamii ca iivuso domanassam ? 
 
 Yam klio iivuso cetasikara dukkham cetasikam asiitam ma- 
 nosampliassajam dukkham asiitam vedayltam. — Idam vuccat' 
 avuso domanassam. ||7|| 
 Katamii ca iivuso upiiyiiso ? 
 
 Yo kho iivuso annataraniiatarena byasanena samanniigatena 
 annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa iiyiiso upii- 
 yaso ayiisitattam upayaisitattam. Ayam vuccat' iivuso upa- 
 yiiso. II 8 II ' 
 
 Katamii ca iivuso yam p' icckam na labhati tarn pi 
 dukkham ? 
 
 Jiitidhammiinam iivuso sattiinam evam iccha uppajjati : 
 " aho vata mayam na jatidhamma assama, na ca vata no jiiti 
 iigaccheyyati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." — Idam 
 pi yam p' iccham na labhati, tam pi dukkham. 
 
 Jariidhammiinam avuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati : 
 " aho vata mayam na jariidhammii assiima, na ca vata no jara 
 iigacche3^yati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." — Idam 
 pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham. 
 
 Byiidhidhammanara avuso sattanam evam iccha uppajjati : 
 " aho ca vata mayam na byiidhidhammii assiima, na ca vata no 
 byadhi agaccheyyati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." 
 — Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham. 
 
 Maranadhammiinam iivuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati : 
 " aho ca vata mayam na maranadhamma assiima, na ca vata no 
 maranam agaccheyyati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." 
 — Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham. 
 
 Soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass-upiiyiisii dhammiinam avuso 
 sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati : " aho vata mayam na soka- 
 paridevadukkhadomanassupiiyiisii dhammii assiima, na ca vata 
 no sokaparidcvadukkhadomanassupiiyiisii iigaccheyum: na kho 
 pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." — Idam pi yam p' iccham na 
 labhati tam pi dukkham. || 9 || 
 
 Katamii cavuso sankhittena paficupiidiinakkhandhii dukkhii? 
 
 Seyyathidam : HiipupiidiinaOvkhandho, vcdanupiidiinakkha- 
 
 ndho, safiuupiidiinakkhandho, sankhiirupiidiinakkhandho, vi- 
 
 iinanupiidiinakkhandhii. — Tme vuccat' iivuso sankhittena 
 
 paficupiidiinakkhandhii dukkhii. || 10 1|
 
 SACCAVIBHANGA. 131 
 
 Tdam vuccat' avuso dukkham ariyasaccam. ||7|| 
 
 Katama ca avuso dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam ? 
 
 Yayam tanha ponobbhavikanandlraga-sahagata tatra tatra- 
 bhinandini : seyyathldam : 
 
 Kamatanha bhavatanlia vibhavatanha. — Idam vuccat' avuso 
 dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam. ||8|| 
 
 Katama ca avuso dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam ? 
 
 Yo tassji yeva tanhaya asesaviraganirodho cago patinissago 
 mutti analayo. — Idam vuccat' avuso dukkhanirodham ariya- 
 saccam. (19 II 
 
 Katama ca iivuso dukkhanirodhagamini patipada ariya- 
 saccam ? 
 
 Ayam eva ariyo atthangiko maggo : seyyathldam : samma- 
 ditthi, sammasarikappo, sammjivaca, sammakammanto, samma- 
 ajlvo, samma-vayamo, sammasati, sammasamadhi. 
 
 Katama ca avuso sammaditthi ? 
 
 Yam kho avuso dukkhe-nanam, dukkhasamudaye-nanam, 
 dukkhanirodhe-nanam, dukkhanirodha-gaminlpatipadaya-iia- 
 nam. — Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammaditthi. || 1 1| 
 
 Katama ca avuso sammasarikappo ? 
 
 Nekkhammasankappo abyiipadasaiikappo avihimsasan- 
 kappo. — Ayam vuccat' avuso sammasarikappo. || 2 1| 
 
 Katama ca avuso sammavacii ? 
 
 Musavadii veramani pisunavjicaya veramanl pharusiivacaya 
 veramani saraphappaliipaya veramaiil. — A3'am vuccat' avuso 
 sammavaca. ||3|| 
 
 Katama ca avuso sammakammanto ? 
 
 Panatipata veramani adinnadiina veramani kamesu miccha- 
 cara veramani. — Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammakammanto. ||4|| 
 
 Katama ca avuso saramii-iljlvo. 
 
 Idh' avuso ariyasiivako micchii iijivam pahiij'a, samma- 
 ajlvena jivikam kappeti. — Ayam vuccat' iivuso samma 
 ajivo. II 5 II 
 
 Katama ca avuso saramiiviiyiimo ? 
 
 Idh' avuso bhikkhu anuppannanam papakiinam akusalanam
 
 132 SACCAVIBHANGA. 
 
 dhammanam anuppiidaya chandam janeti vayamati virlyam 
 jirabhati cittam pagganhilti padahati. 
 
 Uppannanam pilpakanam akusalilnam dhammanam paha- 
 naya chandam janeti — pe — padahati. 
 
 Anuppannanam kusaLTnam dhammanam uppaday a chandam 
 janeti — pe — padahati. 
 
 Uppannanam kusaliinam dhammanam thitiya asammohiiya 
 bhlj^o bhavaya vepuUaj'a bhavanaya paripuriyii chandam 
 janeti vayamati viriyam arabhati cittam padahati. — Ay am 
 vuccat' avuso sammava3'amo. i|6|| 
 
 Katama ca avuso sammiisati ? 
 
 Idh' avuso bhikkhu kiiye kiiyanupassl viharati iltapl sarapa- 
 jano satima vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassani. 
 
 Vedana vedananupassi viharati atapl — pe — abhijjha- 
 domanassani. 
 
 Citte cittanupassi viharati atapl — pe — abhijjhiido- 
 manassam. 
 
 Dhamme dhammanupassi viharati atiipl sampajano satima 
 vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassani. 
 
 Ayam vuccat' avuso sammasati. || 7 1| 
 
 KatamJi ca iivuso sammasamiidhi ? 
 
 Idh' iivuso bhikkhu vivicc' eva ktimehi vivicca akusalehi 
 dhammehi savitakkam savicaram vivekajam pitisukham 
 pathamajjhilnam upasampajja viharati. 
 
 Yitakkavicaranam vfipasamii ajjhattam sampasadanam 
 cetaso ekodibhiivam avitakkam aviciiram samildhijam piti- 
 sukham dutiyajjhanam upasampajja viharati. 
 
 Pltiyii ca viragii upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajano 
 sukhailca kiiyena patisamvedeti yan tam ariya iicikkhanti 
 upekkhako satima sukhaviharl ti tatiyajjhanam upasampajja 
 viharati. 
 
 Sukhassa ca pahanii dukkhassa ca pahiina pubbe ca soma- 
 nassa-domanassanam atthagamii addukkham asukham upe- 
 kkhilsati-parisuddhiin catutthajjhjinam upasampajja viharati. 
 — Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammiisamiidhi. ||8|| 
 
 Idam vuccat' iivuso dukkhanirodhagiiminlpatipada ariya- 
 saccam. IIIOII
 
 ARUNAVATISUTTA. 133 
 
 Tathiigatena iivuso arahata sammasambuddhena Baranasi- 
 yam Isipatane Migadiiye anuttaram dhamraacakkam pavatti- 
 tam appativattiyam samanena vii brahmanena va devena va 
 Marena vii Brahmuna va kenaci va lokasmim acikkhata 
 desata paiiilapata patthapata vivarana vibhajana uttana- 
 kamman ti. II 11 II 
 
 Idam avoca ay asm a Sariputto attamana te bhikkhu iiyas- 
 mato Sariputtassa bhasitam abhinandun ti. 
 
 SACCAVIBHANGA. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA- 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savattbiyam 
 viharati Jetavane Aniitbapindikassa ariime. Tatra kho 
 Bhagava bbikkbu iimantesi ' bbikkhavo ' ti ' bbadante ' ti. 
 Te bhikkhii Bbagavato paccassosum : Bhagava etad avoca: II 1 1| 
 
 " Bhntapubbam, bhikkhave, raja abosi Arunava. Rafino 
 kbo pana bhikkhave Arunavato Ariinavati nama rajadhani 
 abosi. II 2 II 
 
 Ariinavatiyam kho pana bhikkhave rajadhanlyam Sikhl 
 Bhagava Araham Sammasambuddho upanissjiya vihasi. ||3|| 
 
 Sikhissa kho pana bhikkhave Bbagavato Arahato Samma- 
 sambuddhassa Abhibhii Sambhavam nama savakayugam 
 abosi aggam bhaddayugam. ||4|| 
 
 Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sikhl Bhagavii Araham Samma- 
 sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum jimantesi: ||5|| 
 
 *' Ayama brahmana yena afinataro brahmaloko : ten' upa- 
 safikamissiima yava bhattassa kalo bhavissati." || 6 1| 
 
 Evam bhante ti kho te bhikkhave Abhibhii bhikkhu 
 Sikhissa Bbagavato Arahato Sammiisambuddhassa pacca- 
 ssosi. II 7 II 
 
 Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sikhl Bhagava Araham Samma- 
 sambuddho Abhibhii ca bhikkhu seyyathapi nama : balava
 
 134 ARUNAVATISUTTA. 
 
 puriso sammifijitam va baham pasareyya pasaritam va 
 baham samminjeyya. ||8I| 
 
 Evam evam Arunavatiya riijadlianiya antarahita tasmim 
 brahmaloke piiturahesum. 
 
 Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sikhi Bhagava Araham Samma- 
 sambuddho Abhiblium bhikkhum amantesi : " Patibbiitu 
 brabmana tarn brabmuno ca brabma-parisa ca brabmapari- 
 sajjiinam ca dbamml katbii ti." \\ 9 1| 
 
 Evam bbante ti kbo bbikkbave Abbibbu bbikkbu Sikhissa 
 Bbagavato Arabato Sammasambuddbassa patissutva brabma- 
 nafica brabmaparisanca brabmapiirisajje ca dhammiya katba3'a 
 sandassesi saraiidapesi samuttejesi sampabamsesi. ||10|| 
 
 Tatra sudam bbikkbave brabmii ca brabmaparisa ca 
 brabmapiirisajja ca ujjba^'anti kbiyanti vipiicenti. 
 
 Accbariyam vata bbo abbbiitam vata bbo kathafibi niima 
 sattbari saminukblbbiite siivako dbammam desessatiti. ||11|| 
 
 Atha kbo bbikkbave Sikbi Bhagava Araham Samma- 
 sambuddbo Abbibbum bhikkhum amantesi : — 
 
 " Ujjhayanti kho te brahmana brahmji ca brabmaparisa ca 
 brabmaparisajja ca : accbariyam vata bho abbhutam vata 
 bbo — kathafihi niima sattbari sammukhibhute savako 
 dhammam desessatiti." 
 
 Tena hi tvam brabmana bhiyj^'o so mattiiya brabmanca 
 brabmaparisaiica brabmapiirisajje ca saravejehiti. I|12|| 
 
 Evam bbante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhii bhikkhu 
 Sikhissa Bbagavato Arabato Sammasambuddbassa patissutvii 
 dissamiinena pi kayena dhammam desesi adissamiinena pi 
 kayena dhammam desesi : dissamiinena betthimena upaddha- 
 kiiyena, adissamilnena uparimena upaddhakayena dhammam 
 desesi : dissamanena pi uparimena upaddhakiiyena, adissa- 
 manena betthimena upaddhakayena pi dhammam desesi. ||13|| 
 
 Tatra sudam bhikkhave brahraii ca brahmaparisii ca brahma- 
 piirisajjii ca acchariyabbhuta-citta-jiltii ahesura. Accbariyam 
 vata bho abbhutam vata bho samanassa mabiddhikatii maha- 
 nubbiivatati. ||14|| 
 
 Atha kbo Abhibliu bhikkhu Sikbim Bbagavantaip Ara- 
 hantara Sammiisambuddbaiu etad avoca :
 
 ARUNAVATISUTTA. 135 
 
 " Abhijanami khvaham bhante bbikkbusaiighassa maj jhe 
 evariipam vilcani bhasitii, pahomi khvaham avuso brahmaloke 
 thito sahassllokadhatum sarena viiinapetun ti. Etassa brahma- 
 nii kiilo yam tvam brahmana brahmaloke thito sahassi-loka- 
 dhiitum sarenavinuapeyyasiti. ||15|| 
 
 Evam bhante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhii bhikkhu Sikhissa 
 Bhagavato Arahato Sammjisambuddhassa patissutva brahma- 
 loke thito ima gathiiyo abhasi : 
 
 Arabhatha, nikkaraatha, yufijatha Buddhasasane 
 Dhuniitha maccuno senam nalikeram va kuiijaro. || 1 1| 
 
 Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto vihassati 
 Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam karissatiti. ||2|| 
 
 Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhi ca Bhagava Araham Samma- 
 sambuddho Abhibhu ca bhikkhu brahmanca brahmaparisafiea 
 brahmaparisajje ca samvejetva seyyathapi nama : balava pu- 
 riso samminjitam va baham pasareyya pasaritam va baham 
 samminjeyya : evam eva tasmim brahmaloke antarahita Arii- 
 navatiya rajadhaniya paturahesum. ||16|| 
 
 Atha kho bhikkhave 8ikhi Bhagava Araham Sammasam- 
 buddho bhikkhil amantesi : — 
 
 " Assuttha no tumhe bhikkhave Abhibhussa bhikkhuno 
 brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti." ||17|| 
 
 '"Assumha kho may am bhante Abhibhussa bhikkhuno 
 brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti.' " l|18|| 
 
 " Yatha katham pana tumhe bhikkhave assuttha Abhi- 
 bhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa 
 ti." 1119 II 
 
 " * Evam kho mayarn bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhi- 
 kkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa : 
 
 " Arabhattha, nikkamatha, yufijatha Buddhasasane 
 Dhunatha maccuno senam nalikeram va kuiijaro. Ill || 
 
 " Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto vihassati 
 Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam karissati ti. ||2||
 
 136 DEVADAHASUTTA. 
 
 " * Evaip kho mavam bhante assumha Abliibhussa bhi- 
 kkhuno brabmaloke thitassa giithayo bhasamanassa ti.'" ||20|| 
 
 "Siidbu, siidhu, bhikkhave, sudhu kho tumbe bbikkbave 
 assuttba Abbibbussa bbikkbuno brabmaloke tbitassa gatbiiyo 
 bbasamanassii ti. I|21|| 
 
 Idam avoca Bbagavii : attamanii te bbikkbii Bbagavato 
 bbiisitam abbinandun ti. II22|| 
 
 ARUNAYATISIJTTAM. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAOAVATO AHAHATO SAMMA- 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bbagava Sakkesu viba- 
 rati Devadaban niima Sakyiiuam nigamo. Tatra kbo Bbagava 
 bbikkbu amantesi : — 
 
 " Nabam bbikkbave sabbe sanfieva bbikkbuaam cbasa 
 pbassayatanesu appamiidena karanlyau ti vadami." 
 
 "Na ca panabam bbikkbave sabbe sanneva bbikkbunam 
 cbasu pbassayatanesu nappamiidena karanlyan ti vadami." 
 
 "Ye te, bbikkbave, bbikkbu aralianto kblniisava vusitavanto 
 katakaraniyii obitabharii anupattasadattbii parikkblna bbava- 
 samyojanii sammad-anfiavimutta : sobam bbikkbunam cbasu 
 pbassayatanesu nappamiidena karanlyan ti vadami. \\ 1 1| 
 
 " Tarn kissa betu ? Katan tesu appamildena abbabbate 
 pamajjitura. Ye ca kbo te, bbikkbave, bbikkbu sekbjl 
 appattamanasa anuttaram yogakkbomam pattha^'amilnu vi- 
 haranti ; nesabam bbikkbave bbikkbunam cbasu pbassaya- 
 tanesu appamildena karanlyan ti vadiirai." ||2|| 
 
 " Tarn kissa betu ? Santi bbikkbave cakkbuvinneyyii, 
 riipii manoramii pi amanoramii pi. Tyassa pbussa cittam na 
 pariyiidilj'a tittbati cetaso apariyildiinii iiraddhara boti viri- 
 j-am asalllnain upattbitii sati apamuttbii passaddbo kilyo asii- 
 raddbo samiibitam cittam ekaggam : imam khvabam, bbi-
 
 DEYADAHASUTTA. 137 
 
 kkhave, appamadassa phalam samphassa-miino tesam bhi- 
 kkhiiiiam chasu. phassayatanesu appamadeua karanlyaa ti 
 vadami. || 3 || 
 
 Santi bhikkhave gbaaavinneyya gandha manorama pi 
 amanorama pi. || 4 || 
 
 Santi bbikkhave jivbavififiey^y^a rasa manorama pi amano- 
 rama pi. II 5 II 
 
 Santi bbikkhave kayavinfieyya phottbabba manorama pi 
 amanorama pi. || 6 || 
 
 Santi bbikbbave manovifineyya dbamma manorama ama- 
 norama pi. 
 
 Tyassa pbussa cittam na pariyiidaya tittbati cetaso 
 apariycTdanii araddbam boti : viriyam asalllnam upattbitii sati 
 apamuttba passaddbo kayo asiiraddbo samabitam cittam 
 ekaggarn : imam kbvabam bbikkbave appamadapbalam 
 sampbassamiino tesam bbikkbiinam cbasu pbassiiyatanesu 
 appamiidena karanlyan ti vadami, || 7 1| 
 
 Labba vo bbikkbave suladdbam vo bbikkbave kbano vo 
 patiladdbo brabmacariya vasiiyati. 
 
 Dittba mayii bbikkbave cba pbassayatananika niima niraya. 
 
 Tatba : yam kinci cakkbuna rUpam passati anittbaru- 
 pafi iieva passati neva itthariipam akantarOpail iieva passati 
 no kantarupam amanaparupan neva passati no manaparupam. 
 
 Yam kiiici sotena saddam sunati — pe — . 
 
 Yam kinci gbanena gandbam gba3^ati — pe — . 
 
 Yam kinci jivbaya rasam siiyati — pe — . 
 
 Yam kiiici kayena pbottbabbam pbusati — pe — . 
 
 Yam kinci manasii dbammam vijanati anittbarQpam yeva 
 vijanati, no ittbariipam akantarupam yeva vijanati, no kanta- 
 rupam amanaparupam yeva vijanati no manaparupam. ||8|| 
 
 Labba vo, bbikkbave, suladdbam vo, bbikkbave, kbano vo, 
 bbikkbave, patiladdbo brabmacariyaviisaya. 
 
 Dittba mayii, bbikkbave, cba-pbassayatanika nama sagga. 
 
 Tattba : yam kinci cakkbuna riipam passati ittbarupam
 
 138 DEVADAHASUTTA. 
 
 yeva passati no anittliarupam : kantarupam yeva passati no 
 akantam iTipam : mauapaiTipam yeva passati no amauapa- 
 rupara. 
 — pe— . 
 
 Yam kiiici manasa dhammam vijanuti itthariipam yeva 
 vijaniiti, no anittharilpain : kantarupam yeva vijaniiti, no 
 akantaiTipam : mauaparupam yeva vijiinati, no amanapa- 
 rupam. ||9|| 
 
 Labhii vo bhikkliave, suladdham vo bhikkhave, kbano vo 
 patiladdho brabraacariya vasiiyati. 
 
 E-fiparamii, bhikkhave, devamanussii ruparata, rilpasarau- 
 dita riipavipai'inama-viraganirodha dukkhu bhikkhave 
 devamanussa viharanti. 
 
 Saddilrama, bhikkhave, — pe — . 
 
 Gandhiirama, bhikkhave, — pe — . 
 
 Rasariima, bhikkhave, — pe — . 
 
 Photthabbarama, bhikkhave, — pe — . 
 
 Dhammaramil, bhikkhave, devamanussa dharamarata 
 dhammasamuditii dhammaviparinama viraganirodha du- 
 kkha, bhikkhave, devamanussa viharanti. I|10|| 
 
 Tathjigato ca kho, bhikkhave, Araham Sammiisambuddho 
 rupanam samudayanca atthagamanca assadarica adlnavanca 
 nissaranafica yathabhiitam viditvii na ruparamo, na ruparato 
 na rupasamudito na rupaviparintima viraganirodha sukho 
 bhikkhave Tathiigato viharati. 
 
 Saddtiuam — pe — . 
 
 Gandhanam — pe — . 
 
 Rasanara — pe — . 
 
 Photthabbanam — pe — . 
 
 Dhammanam samudayanca atthagamanca assadanca adlna- 
 vanca nissarananca yathabhiitam viditvii : na dhammaramo, 
 na dharamarato, na dhammasamudito, na dhammaviparinama 
 viraganirodho sukho bhikkhave Tathiigato viharatiti. I|ll|| 
 
 Idam avoca Bhagavii. Idam vatvii ca Sugato : athiiparam 
 etad avoca satthii : —
 
 DEYADAHASUTTA. 139 
 
 E,upa sadda gandha rasa phassa dhamma ca kevalii 
 Ittha kanta manapa ca yiiva tattha ti vuccanti. || 1 1| 
 
 Sadevakassa lokassa ete vo sukhasammata 
 Yattha ce te nirujjhanti tarn tesam dukkham samma- 
 tam. II 2 II 
 
 Sukham tarn ditthamarlyehi sakkayassa nirodhanam 
 Paccanlkam idam hoti sabbalokena passatam. jj 3 1| 
 
 Yam pare sukhato ahu tad ariya ahu dukkhato 
 Yam pare dukkhato ahu tad ariya sukhato vidu. ||4|| 
 
 Passadhammam duvijanam sammulhettha aviddasu 
 Nivutanam tamo hoti andhakaro apassatam. || 5 1| 
 
 Satanca vivatam hoti aloko passatam iva 
 
 Santike na vijananti maggadhammassa kovida. ||6|| 
 
 Bhavariiga-paretebhi bhavayoganusaribhi 
 Maradheyyanupanuebhi nayamdhammosusambuddho. ||7|| 
 
 Ko nu annatram ariyebhi padi sambuddham arahati 
 Yam padam sammadaiinaya parinibbanti anasava ti. || 8 |I 
 
 DEVADAHASUTTAM. 
 
 PARITTAM NITTHITAM.
 
 A COLLECTTOI^ OF KAMMAVACAS. 
 
 NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA- 
 SAMBUDDHASSA. 
 
 Chap. I. 
 
 THE ORDINATION OF A PEIEST. 
 
 Pathamam upajjham giihapetabbo, upajjham gahapetva 
 pattacivaram acikkhitabbam : 
 
 * Ayan te patto ? ' " Ama bbante." 
 
 * Ayam sanghati ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Ayam uttarasango ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Ayam antaravasako ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Gaccha amumhi, okase titthahi ! ' 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ndgo ayasmato Tissassa upa- 
 sampadapekho. Yadi sahghassa pattakallam, aham Ndgam 
 auusaseyyam. 
 
 Sunasi Ndga ! ayan te paccakalo bhutakiilo. Yam jfitam, 
 tarn sanghamajjhe pucchante : santam atthiti vattabbam, 
 asantam natthiti vattabbam. 
 
 Ma kho vitthasi ! ma kho manku ahosi ! 
 
 Evam tarn pucchissan ti. 
 
 Santi te evarupa iibadha ? 
 
 * Kuttham ? ' " Natthi bhante." 
 
 * Gando ? ' " Natthi bhante." 
 ' KilSso ? ' " Natthi bhante." 
 *Soso?' " Natthi bhante." 
 
 ' Apamiiro ? ' " Natthi bhante."
 
 142 UrASAMPADA KAMMAVACA. 
 
 * Manusso' si ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Puriso' si ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 ' Bhujisso' si ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Anano' si ?' " Ama bbante." 
 
 * Na' si riijabhato ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Anunuato' si miitapitubi ?' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Paripimna-Tlsati-vasso 'si ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Paripunnan te patta-clvaram ?' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Kinniimo 'si ?' " Aham bhante Ndgo niima." 
 
 'Ko niimo te upajjhayo ?' "TJpajjhayo me bhante dyasmd 
 Tissathero niima." 
 
 Suniitu me bhante sangho ! Ndgo dijasmato Tissassa 
 upasampadjipekho. Anusittho so maya. 
 
 Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, Ndgo agaccheyya. 
 
 Agacchjihiti vattabbo : 
 
 Sahgham. bhante upasampadam yiicami : TJllumpatu mam 
 bhante sangho, anukampam upadaya ! 
 
 Dutiyam pi bhante sangham upasampadam yiicami : TJllum- 
 patu mam bhante sangho, anukampam upildilyii ! 
 
 Tatiyam pi bhante sangham upasampadam yiicami : TJllum- 
 patu mam bhante sangho, anukampam upildiiya ! 
 
 Suniitu me bhante sangho ! ayam Ndgo dyasmato Tissassa 
 upasampadiipekho. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam aham Ndgam 
 antariiyike dhamme puccheyj^am : 
 
 Sunasi Ndga ! ayan te saccakiilo bhutakiilo. Yam jiitam 
 tam pucchiimi : Santam atthiti vattabbara, asantam natthiti 
 vattabbam. 
 
 Santi te evarilpii ilbiidhii : 
 
 ' Kuttham ? ' " Natthi bhante." 
 
 * Gando ?' " Natthi bhante." 
 ' Kiliiso ? ' " Natthi bhante." 
 *Soso?' " Natthi bhante." 
 
 ' Apamaro ? ' " Natthi bhante." 
 
 * Manusso' si ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Puriso' si ?' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Bhujisso' si ? ' " Ama bhante.' 
 
 * Anano' si ? ' " Ama bhante."
 
 UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA. 143 
 
 ' Na' si riijabhato ? ' " Ama bliante." 
 
 * Anuniiato' si matapituhi ? ' " Ama bliante." 
 
 * Paripunna-visati-vasso' si ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Paripunnan te pattacivaram ? ' " Ama bhante." 
 
 * Kinnamo' si ? ' " Aham bhante Ndgo nama." 
 
 * Ko namo te upajjhiiyo ? ' " XJpajjha^'-o me bhante dyasmd 
 Tissatthero nama." 
 
 Suniitu me bhante sangho ! Ayam Ndgo ayasmato Tissassa 
 npasampadapekho, parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi, pari- 
 punn' assa patta-clvarani Ndgo sahgham upasampadam yiicati 
 dyasmatd Tissena upajjhiiyena. 
 
 Yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho Ndgam upasampadeyya 
 dyasmatd Tissena upajjhuyena. 
 
 Esd Natti : 
 
 SunJitu me bhante sangho ! Ayam Niigo ayasmato 
 Tissassa upasampadiipekho parisuddho antarayikehi dham- 
 mehi paripunn' assa pattacivaram Nago saiigham upasampa- 
 dam yiicati ayasmatii Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagam 
 upasampadeti ayasmatii Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato 
 khamati Niigassa upasampada iiyasmatii Tissena upajjhayena, 
 so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya. 
 
 Dutiyam pi etam attham vadami : 
 
 Suniitu me bhante sangho ! ayam Nago ayasmato Tissassa 
 upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi pari- 
 punn' assa pattacivaram Nago sangham upasampadam yiicati 
 iiyasmata Tissena upajjhiiyena. Sangho Niigam upasampil- 
 deti ayasmata Tissena upajjhiiyena. Yassayasmato khamati 
 Nagassa upasampada ayasmatii Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh' 
 assa. Yassa na kkhamati, so bhilseyya, 
 
 Tatiyam pi etam attham vadilmi. 
 
 Suniitu me bhante sangho ! ayam Nilgo ilyasmato Tissassa 
 upasampadapekho parisuddho antariiyikehi dhammehi pari- C^ 
 punn' assa pattacivaram Niigo sangham upasampadam yiicati 
 iiyasmata Tissena upajjhiiyena. Sangho Nagam upasampii- 
 deti ayasmatii Tissena upajjhiiyena. Yassayasmato khamati 
 Nilgassa upasampadil iiyasmatii Tissena upajjhiiyena, so tunh' 
 assa. Yassa na kkhamati so bhilseyya.
 
 144 UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA. 
 
 Upasampanno sahghena Niigo ilj'^asmatji Tissena upajjha- 
 yena : khamati saiighassa : tasmii tunhi evara etam dhilra- 
 yilmiti. — 
 
 Tavadeva chaya metabba ; 
 TJtupatnanam acikkhitabbam ; 
 Divasabhiigo acikkhitabbo ; 
 Sangiti acikkhitabba. — 
 
 Cattaro nissaya acikkhitabba 
 
 Cattari ca akaranlyani acikkhitabbani : 
 
 1) " PindiydJopahhojanam nissaya pahhajja : tattha te yiiva- 
 jlvam ussaho karanlyo. Atirekalabho : Sanghabhattam, 
 uddesabhattam, nimantanam, salakabhattam, pakkhikam, 
 uposathikam, patipadikam." " " Ama bhante ! " " 
 
 2) " Pamsukuhiclvaram nissdya pabbajjd : tattha te yiiva- 
 jlvam ussaho karanlyo. Atirekahlbho : khomam, kappilsi- 
 kam, koseyyam, kambalara, sanam, bhangam." " " Ama 
 bhante."" 
 
 3) " Riikkhamulasendsanajn nissdya pabbajjd : tattha te 
 yiivajlvam ussaho karanlyo. Atirekahibho : vihiiro addha- 
 yogo, pasiido, hammiyam, guha." " " Araa bhante ! " " 
 
 4) " Putimutiahhesajjam nissdya pabbajjd : tattha te yiiva- 
 jlvam ussaho karanlyo. AtirekaLubho : Sappi, navanltam, 
 telam, madhu, phanitam." " " Ama bhante ! " " 
 
 1) " Upasampannena hhilihhund methuno dhammo na patisevi- 
 tabbo antamaso tiracchdnagatdya jji. Yo bhikkhu methunam 
 dhammam patisevati assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyya- 
 thapi niiraa : Puriso sisacchinno abhabbo tena sarirabandha- 
 nena jlvitum, evam eva bhikkhu methunam dhammam pati- 
 sevitva assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yiivajlvam 
 akaranlyani." " " Ama bhante ! " " 
 
 2) " Upasampannena bhikliJinnd adinnam tlieyyasahhhdtam 
 na dddtahbam antamaso tiiiasaldkam apdddya. Yo bhikkhu 
 piidam vii padiiraham vii atirekapiidam vii adinnam theyya- 
 sankhatam iidiyati, assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Se3^yatbapi 
 niima : Pandupahaso bandhanil pamutto abhabbo haritattaya 
 evam eva bhikkhu padara va padiiraham vii atirekapiidam va
 
 TICIVARENA AVIPPAVASA. 145 
 
 adinnam tliey3^asankhatam adiyitvii, assamano hoti asakya- 
 puttiyo. Tan te yavajivaru akaranlyam." " " Atua 
 bhante!"" 
 
 3) " UjMsampannena hhikkhimd saticicca pdiiojlvitd na voro- 
 petahho antamaso kifnthcikipillikam updddya : Yo bhikkhu 
 sancicca raanussaviggaham jivita voropeti antamaso gabbha- 
 patanam upiidaya assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyatbapi 
 nama puthu sila dvedha bhinnii appatisandhika hoti, evam eva 
 bhikkhu sancicca manussaviggaham jivita voropetva assamano 
 hoti, asakyaputtiyo. Tan te y a vajivam akaranlyam." ""Araa 
 bhante."" 
 
 4) " Upasampannena hhikkhund uttan-manussa-dhammo na 
 uUapitahbo antamaso sunndgdre ahhirdmiti. Yo bhikkhu pii- 
 piccho icehapakato asantam abhutam uttari-manussa-dhara- 
 mam ullapati jbiinara va viraokkham vji samadhim va sama- 
 pattim va maggam vii phalam \^ assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. 
 Seyyathiipi nama : talo matthakii chinno, abhabbo puna vi- 
 rulhaya evam eva bhikkhu papiccho icehapakato asantam 
 abhutam uttari-manussa-dhammam ullapitva, assamano hoti 
 asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajlvam akaranlyam." " " Ama 
 bhante."" 
 
 Chap. II. 
 
 THE INVESTITURE OF A PRIEST WITH THE 
 THREE ROBES. 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho. Yo so sanghena ticTvarena 
 avippavJiso sammato. Yadi sahghassa pattakallam sangho 
 tarn ticlvarena avippaviisam samiihaneyya. 
 
 Esd natti : 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho : Yo so sanghena ticlvarena 
 avippavaso sammato, sangho tam ticlvarena avippaviisam 
 samiihanati. Yassayasmato khamati etassa ticlvarena avippa- 
 
 10 
 
 A/iJ^ , -y'/
 
 146 ITOSATHA KaM:\[AYACA. 
 
 vasassa samuggliilto, so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati so 
 bhiiseyya. Samuhato so sangliena ticlvarena avippaviiso. 
 Khamati sangliassa tasma tunhl evam etam dliiirayamiti. 
 
 Chap. III. 
 
 THE FIXING OF A BOUNDAHY FOR THE PER- 
 FORMANCE OF THE UPOSATHA. 
 
 Simatu me bhante sangho ! Ya sii sangbena sima sarama- 
 nnitii saraanasamvasa ek' uposatbii : yadi sangbassa patta- 
 kallam sangbo tam simam saraubaneyya. 
 
 £sd natti : 
 
 Sunatu me bbante sangbo ! ya sa sangbena simii samma- 
 nnitii samanasamvasil ek' uposatbii, sangbo tam sImam samil- 
 hanati. Yassayasmato kbamati etissa simaya samanasamvii- 
 ScTya ek' iijjosatbaya samuggbato so timb' assa. Yassa na 
 kkbamati, so bbaseyya. Samubata sa slmii sangbena samana- 
 saravasa ek' uposatha. Kbamati sangbassa tasmil tunbl eyam 
 etam dbarayamiti. 
 
 * Purattbiraaya disiiya kin nimittara ?' " Pasiino bbante ! " 
 
 * Eso pasano nimittam ! ' 
 
 * Purattbimiiya anudisiiya kin nimittam?' ** Pasano 
 bbante!" 
 
 * Eso pasano nimittam ! ' 
 
 * Dakkhinaya disaya kin nimittam ? ' " Pasano bbante ! " 
 
 * Eso pasano nimittam ! ' 
 
 * Dakkbinaya anudisiij'a kin nimittam ?' "Piisiino bbante !" 
 
 * Eso pijsano nimittam ! ' 
 
 ' Paccbiraiiya disaya kin nimittam ?' " Pasiino bbante ! " 
 
 * Eso piisilno nimittam ! ' 
 
 * Paccbimilj^a anudisiiya kin nimittam ?' "Piisilno bbante !" 
 *Eso piisiino nimittam !' 
 
 ' Uttariiya disiiya kin nimittam ?' *' Piisiino bbante ! " 
 
 * Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
 
 KATHIXA KAMMAVACA. 147 
 
 *Uttaraya anudisaya kiu nimittam ?' " Pasano bhante !" 
 
 * Eso pasano uimillam ! ' 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Yjlvatii samanta niraitta 
 kittita : yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho etehi nimittehi 
 simam samraannejya samana-samvasam ek' ujjosatham. 
 
 Esd mitti : 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Yavata samanta niraitta kittita 
 sangho etehi nimittehi slmani saramannati samiinasamTasam. 
 ek' uposatham. Yassayasraato khamati etehi nimittehi sl- 
 maya saramuti samana-samyiisaya ek' uposathaya, so tunh' 
 assa ! Yassa na kkhamati so bhjiseyya ! Sammatii sa slmii 
 sanghena etehi nimittehi samanasamyiisa ek' uposathii. Kha- 
 mati sanghassa tasmii tunhi evam etam dharayaraiti. 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Yii sa sanghena sammata sa- 
 manasamvasa ek' uposathii : Yadi sanghassa pattakallam 
 sangho tarn siraara ticlyarena ayippavasam sammaneyy^a tha- 
 petva gamarlca gamup)acaranca. 
 
 End natti : 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Yii sa sanghena sima sammata 
 samanasamvasii ek' uposatha sangho tam simam ticlvarena 
 avippav£isam sammannati thapetva gamarlca gamupacaranca. 
 
 Yassayasmato khamati etissa simaya ticlvarena avippava- 
 saya sammuti thapetva gamanca gamupacarailca, so tunh' 
 assa ! 5'assa na kkhamati so bhjiseyya. 
 
 Sammata sa sima sanghena ticlvarena avippavasii thapetva 
 gamanca gamupacaraiica. Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhl 
 evam etam dharaj'amiti. 
 
 Chap. IV. 
 
 THE BESTOWME]^T OF THE KATHINA ROBE. 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Idam sanghassa kathina- 
 dussara uppannam. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, sangho 
 imam kathinadussam itthannaraassa bhikkhuno dadeyya 
 kathinam attharitum.
 
 148 KATIIINA KAMMAVACA. 
 
 £sd natii. 
 
 Suuatu me bhante sanorho ! Idam sanghassa kathina- 
 dussam uppannam. Sangho imam kathinadussam itthannii- 
 raassa bhikkhuno 'dcti katbinara attbaritum. Yassayasraato 
 kbaraati imassa katbinadussassa ittbannamassa bbikkbuno 
 danam katbinam attbaritum so tunb' assa. Yassa na kkba- 
 mati so bbaseyya. Dinnam idam sanghena katbinadussara 
 ittliaunamassa bbikkbuno katbinam attbaritum. Khamati 
 sarigbassa, tasmii tunbl, evam etam dbiirayiTiniti. 
 
 Katbinadayakassa vattbam attbi sace so tam ajiinanto 
 puccbati : " Bbante katbam katbinam diitabban ti ? " 
 
 Tassa evam acikkbitabbam : " " Tinnam clvaranam anna- 
 tara-pabonakam surijaiggamana-samaye vattbam katbinacl- 
 varam demii ti datum vattatiti : 
 
 " " Attbarakena bbikkbuna sace sarigbtitiya katbinam 
 attbaritu kiimo boti, poranikii saiigbati paccuddbaritabba : 
 nava sangbilti adbittbatabbii, " imaya sangbiltiya katbinara 
 attbaramiti," vaca bbinditabba. Tena katbinattbilrakena 
 bbikkbuna saiigbam upasankamitva ekamsam uttarasangam 
 karitva afijalim paggabetvcT evam assa vacanlyo : 
 
 " Attbatam, bbante, sangbassa katbinam dbammiko katbi- 
 nattbiiro, anumodatba ! " 
 
 " " Attbatam iivuso sangbassa katbinara dbaramiko katbi- 
 nattbiiro anuraodama ti ! " " 
 
 Si^iitu me bbante sangbo ! Yadi sangbassa pattakallam 
 sangbo katbinara uddbareyya. 
 
 Em hatfi : 
 
 Sunatu me bbante sangbo ! Yadi sangbassa pattakallam 
 sangbo katbinam uddbarati. Yassayasmato kbamati katbi- 
 nassa ubbbaro so tunb' assa ! yassa na kkbamati, so bba- 
 seyya,— 
 
 Ubbbatam sangbena katbinam ! Kbamati sangbassa tasniii 
 tunbl evam etam dbarayamiti.
 
 THERA-SAMMUTI->v'AMASAMMUTTI. 149 
 
 Chap. Y. 
 THE ELECTION OF A PRIEST. 
 
 Aham bliante itthannatnam thera-sammutim icchami ! 
 soham, bliante, sangham ittliannainam tlierasammutim 
 yacami ! Dutiyam pi yacapetva, tatiyam pi j-acapetvii 
 bj'attena bhikkliuna patibalena sangho napetabbo : 
 
 Sunatu me bliante sangho ! ayam itthanniimo bhikkha 
 sangbam itthannamam therasammutira yacati. Yadi san- 
 ghassa pattakallara sangho itthannainassa bhikkhuuo itthan- 
 namam therasamrautim dadeyya. 
 
 £sd Jiatti : 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam itthannarao bhikkhu 
 sangham itthanniimam therasamrautim yacati, sangho itthan- 
 nainassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasamrautim deti. Yassa- 
 yasmato kharaati itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam 
 therasammutiyii danam, so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati 
 so bhaseyya. — Dinna sahghena itthannamassa bhikkhuno 
 itthannamam therasammuti : khamati sanghassa tasma tunhi 
 evani etam dharayamiti. 
 
 Chap. VI. 
 
 THE GIVING OF A NAME TO A PRIEST. 
 
 Aham bhante itthannamam namasammutim icchami, soham 
 bhante sangham itthannamam namasammutim yacamiti. 
 Dutiyam pi yacapetva tatiyam pi yacapetva byattena bhi- 
 kkhunii patibalena sangho napetabbo : 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam itthannarao bhikkhu 
 sangham itthannamam namasammutim yacati. Yadi sanghassa 
 pattakallam saiigho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam 
 namasammutim dadeyya. 
 
 JE'id tiatti :
 
 150 VIHARA KAMMAVACA. 
 
 Sunutu me bliante sanglio ! Ayam itthannamo bliikkliu 
 sangham itthannamara namasamrautim yiicati : sanglio 
 itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam namasammutim deti. 
 Yassayasmato kbamati ittbannainassa bhikkhuno itthanna- 
 mam njlraa sammutiyji diinam so tunh' assa ! Yassa ua kkha- 
 mati so bhiiseyya. 
 
 Dinna sanghena itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam. 
 namasammuti : Khamati sarighassa tasmii tunhl evam etam 
 dharayiimiti. — 
 
 Evam kammavacam katva byattena bhikkhunii patibalena 
 diltabbo ti. 
 
 Chap. VII. 
 THE DEDICATION OF A VIHARA. 
 
 Suniitu me bhante sarigho ; Yadi saiighassa pattakallam 
 sangho itthannamam viharam kappiyabhumiin sammanneyya. 
 
 Esd natti : 
 
 Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Sarigho itthannamam viha- 
 ram kappiyabhumiin sammannati. Yassayasmato khamati 
 itthannamassa viharassa kappiya bhuraiyji sammuti so tunh' 
 assa : Yassa na kkhamati so bhiiseyya. Sammato sanghena 
 itthannamo vihiiro kappiyabhumi. Khamati saiighassa tasraa 
 tunhl evam etam dharayamiti.
 
 HANDBOOK OF PALI. 
 
 III. GLOSSARY.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 A. 
 
 A, and before vowels AN, a negative 
 particle ; used only in composi- 
 tion. 
 
 AMSO, a part, a period of time. 
 
 AMSO, AMSAM, shoulder. 
 
 a-kattho (adj.), not ploughed. 
 
 a-kano, rice freed from the red coat- 
 ing which underlies the husks. 
 
 a-kanto (adj.), unpleasant, disagree- 
 able. 
 
 a-kdliko (adj.), without delay (epi- 
 thet of the dhamnia), immediate. 
 
 a-kuppo (adj.), firm, immoveable. 
 
 a-kusalo (adj.), bad, evil, sinful. 
 
 a-kkuddho (adj.), not violent. 
 
 akkha-dhutto, gambler. 
 
 akkhata (m.), one who tells. 
 
 a-kk/tdti, to tell. 
 
 AKKHO, a die. 
 
 AGGAM, point, top, extremity. 
 
 AGGI (m.), fire. 
 
 AGGO (adj.), first, foremost. 
 
 ANGAM, limb ; sliare, quality, at- 
 tribute. 
 
 acceti, to pass beyond, to over- 
 come ; p. p. p. attto, past. 
 
 AJJA (adv.), now, to-day. 
 
 ajjatagge, henceforward. 
 
 AJJHATTAM, individual thought. 
 
 ajjiiattam (adv.), relating to the in- 
 dividual. 
 ajjhattiko (adj.), internal, belonging 
 
 to the individual. 
 AJJHAYAKO, a preceptor. 
 ANJALI (m.), the hollow of the 
 
 joined hands. 
 anhataro, one, a certain. 
 ANNA (f.) knowledge. 
 anhatra (adv.), otherwise, with the 
 
 excejttiou of. 
 ANNO, other. 
 ATTO, a case, a cause. 
 ATTHA (num.), eight. 
 atthahgiko (adj.), eightfold. 
 atthamo, eighth. 
 ATTHI (n.), bone; caus. utthiyati, 
 
 to treat as a bone. 
 ATTHIMINJA (f.), marrow. 
 ATTHO, reason. 
 ADDHAYOGO (t. t.), large hall. 
 anuko (adj.), very small. 
 ANNAVO, the sea, the ocean. 
 ATI (adv. and prep.), over, beyond, 
 
 exceeding, before vowels ace. 
 ati-go (adj.), escaping from. [gant. 
 atl-mannati, to despise, to be ano- 
 ati-nidnt (adj.), proud. 
 ATIREKALABHO (t. t.), extra 
 
 allowance.
 
 154 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 ATTA (ii.), self, mind (for declen- 
 sion, see Grammar). 
 
 ATTHA (adv.), here. [ance. 
 
 ATTHAM (Slir. asta), disappear- 
 
 attha-gamo, atthavP, disappearance, 
 anniliilation. 
 
 a-ttharati, to spread out. 
 
 atthaya (adv.), for the good of. 
 
 ATTHI, to he (for conjugation, see 
 Grammar). 
 
 ATTHO, reason, desire ; property. 
 
 ATHA, ATHO (adv.), and; hut. 
 
 a-thuso (adj.), free from husk. 
 
 a-dlnndddnam, taking wliat is not 
 given. 
 
 ADDHAXAM, a road ; a long time. 
 
 ADHAMO (adj.), lowest. 
 
 ADH I (adv. and prep.), above, over; 
 frequently in composition before 
 vonels ajjh. 
 
 aflhl-titthuti, to devote oneself. 
 
 adiii-ttlianam, resting-place. 
 
 ADHI-PATI (m.), lord, chief. 
 
 adiii-blidsati, to address ; aor. ajjha- 
 blidsi. 
 
 ad/ii-vakanam, carrying. 
 
 ad/ii-i'dxanam, the assent, [accept. 
 
 adlii-vdseti (cans.), to consent, to 
 
 a-nano, free from debt. 
 
 an-attd (m.), not a self. 
 
 an-atto (adj.), without individu- 
 ality, unreal. 
 
 an-attlia-sui'niiito, profitless. 
 
 aii-anu-giddho, without greediness. 
 
 an-anu-ssuto (adj.), unheard of. 
 
 an-(mto, without end, innumerable. 
 
 ANA-BHAVO, non-existence; ana- 
 bhdvaih gacchati, to come to 
 nothing, to perish. 
 
 ati-ubhirati, dissatisfaction. 
 an-arahd, not being a saint. 
 an-ar'iyo, ignoble. 
 anaviijjatd (f.), blamelessness. 
 anavajjo (adj.), blameless. 
 an-avayho (adj.), not to be given in 
 
 miirriage. 
 an-aoaseso, without remainder. 
 an-av'ilo, clear from. 
 andkulo, untroubled. 
 andgato, future, coming. [less. 
 
 andlayo, free from desire, passion- 
 A-NICCO (adj.) (t. t.), perishable, 
 
 not lasting. 
 anittho (adj.), unpleasant. 
 ANU (adv. and prep.), after, later ; 
 
 along, again, in consequence. 
 anu-kathyati, to recite. 
 anu-kampako, compassionate. 
 anu-kampl, compassionate. 
 anu-jdndti, to permit ; p. p. p. anuh- 
 
 nato. 
 an-utthdnam, want of energy. 
 anu-tthitati, to make to follow. 
 an-uttaro (adj.), than which none is 
 
 higher, the highest. 
 anudisd (f.), an intermediate i>oint 
 
 of tiie compass. 
 an-np-pagacc/iati, not to embrace. 
 anu-para-yati, to walk round and 
 
 round. 
 anu-pussi (adj.), looking at, contem- 
 plating. 
 anu-pubbaso (adv.), in regular order. 
 anuppanno, not arisen. 
 an-uppddo, not arising. 
 ami-ydti, to fdUow. 
 anu-yogo, being addicted to. 
 anu-rakkhati, to protect.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 155 
 
 ANU-SAYO (t. t.), repentance. 
 
 anusarl (adj.), following. 
 
 anu-sasati, to teach. 
 
 anti-ssarati, to call in mind. 
 
 auu-ssaveti (cans.), to cause to be 
 heard, to procl.iiin. 
 
 an-ejo (adj.), free from desire. 
 
 an-ottapl (adj.), fearless of sinning. 
 
 ANTAM, the intestines, bowels. 
 
 ANTAGUxXAM, mesentery. 
 
 antamaso, even. 
 
 ANTARA (adv. and prep.), witliin, 
 between, among. 
 
 antara-dhunam, disappearance. 
 
 antara-dliayuti, to vanish, to hide ; 
 p. p. p. antarahito, vanished. 
 
 antarayiko, causing an obstacle. 
 
 ANTARA- VASAKO (t. t), under- 
 garment worn by a Buddhist 
 priest. 
 
 ANTALIKKHAM, sky, air. 
 
 ANTIMO, last, final. 
 
 ANTO (adv. and prep.), within, in, 
 inside ; see also mitara. 
 
 ANTO (also neuter), end, limit. 
 
 ANDHO (adj.), blind. 
 
 andha-kdro, darkness. 
 
 ANNAM, food. 
 
 APAMARO, epilepsy. 
 
 a-pamiittho (adj.), not left behind. 
 
 a-pa7'aJifo, unconquered. 
 
 a-jmrimam (adj.), immense, unde- 
 fined. 
 
 a-pariydddnum, not taking up, not 
 laying hold of. 
 
 APARO (adj.), other, subsequent; 
 western. 
 
 a-pddako, having no feet. 
 
 APAYO [going awayj, hell. 
 
 API, PI (part.), also, even. 
 
 a-pisuno (adj.), not calumnious. 
 
 ap-efi, to go away. 
 
 appa-kicro, liaving few cares. 
 
 a-ppagabbho, not arrogant. 
 
 a-ppati-sandiko, that cannot be 
 united. 
 
 appa-nigg/ioso, free from noise. 
 
 a-ppa-mattc, vigilant, careful. 
 
 a-ppamdiio (adj.), infinite. 
 
 a-ppa-mddo, vigilance, zeal. 
 
 appu-saddo, free from noise. 
 
 a-ppu-sanno, dissatisfied. 
 
 a-ppiyo, not dear, hateful. 
 
 APPO (adj.), small, weak ; fre- 
 quently in composition. 
 
 abbh-ug-gacchafi, to reach. [sire. 
 
 A-BY-APADO (t.t.), absence of de- 
 
 a-bhabbatd (f.), non-liability. 
 
 a-bliabbo (adj.), incapable. 
 
 a-bhayam, safety from danger. 
 
 ABHI (adv. and prep.), exceeding; 
 in, into. 
 
 abhi-kkanto, handsome, beautiful. 
 
 ablii-kkanto (p. p. p.), abliikkamati, 
 advanced. 
 
 ablii-kkamat'i, to step forward. 
 
 ablii-kkamo, advancing. 
 
 ablti-gito, (]). p. p.), recited. 
 
 abhijdndti, to know; ger. abhinhd. 
 
 ABHIJJHA (f.), covetousness. 
 
 abhi-t'ttthati, to surpass. 
 
 ABHITTHANAM (t. t.), crime, 
 deadly sin. 
 
 ABHINHAM (adv.), repeatedly. 
 
 abhinhaso (adv.), repeatedly, [with. 
 
 ablii-nandat'i, to rejoice, to be pleased 
 
 ABHI-NIBBATTI (f.) (t.t.), re- 
 birth in another existence.
 
 156 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 abhi-niveso, adhering' to. 
 
 abhi-paleti, to guard, to keep. 
 
 abhi-ppa-moilayam, rejoicing. 
 
 abhi-ramati, to delight. 
 
 abhi-rudo, cooing, singing'. 
 
 ubhi-ruhati, to monnt. 
 
 ab/n-vassati, to cau*.e to rain. 
 
 abhi-vadeti, cans, of abhivaduti, to 
 salnte. 
 
 abhi-sainetl, to penetrate. 
 
 a-bltojaneyyo, not to he eaten. 
 
 a-mato (adj.), immortal. 
 
 a-manapo (adj.), unpleasing, un- 
 pleasant. 
 
 a-manoramo (adj.), unpleasant. 
 
 a-mitto, enemy. 
 
 ARAXNAM, forest. 
 
 ARAHA ARAHAM (m.), a vener- 
 able person. 
 
 ARAHO (adj.), worth. 
 
 ARIYO (adj.), honourable, vener- 
 able, noble. 
 
 ARIVA-SACCAM (t. t.), sublime 
 truth. 
 
 ALA.M (adv.), sufficient. 
 
 ALASO (adj.), idle. 
 
 ALOKO, intuition. 
 
 allit/ati, to he attached, to adhere. 
 
 alllko (adj.), being addicted, ad- 
 hering. 
 
 AVA and O (prep, and adv.), away, 
 off; down. 
 
 ava-Janati, to despise. 
 
 ava-ruddho (adj.), obstructed. 
 
 a-viddasu, ignorant. 
 
 a-vippavuso, not parting. 
 
 a-vi-rulho (adj.), not grown. 
 
 a-vivayho (adj.), not marriageable. 
 
 avihimsd (f.), mercy, humanity. 
 
 avecca, gerund, of ava + ^J i, to 
 penetrate. 
 
 a-veram, friendliness. 
 
 a-sanfo (adj.), not good, wicked. 
 
 a'Sammoho (adj.), without infatua- 
 tion. 
 
 a-sallino, not cowering, resolute. 
 
 ASITI (num.), eighty. 
 
 ASU (pron.), tliis, that (see Gram- 
 mar) ; amunihi (loc), here. 
 
 a-suci (adj.), unclean. 
 
 a-subho (adj.), bad. 
 
 ASURO, an asnra. 
 
 a-seso (adj.), without rest ; all, every. 
 
 a-soko, free from sorrow. 
 
 ASXATI, to eat. [ness. 
 
 asbddo, tasting ; enjoyment, happi- 
 
 assasati, to inhale air. 
 
 ASSO, horse. 
 
 A HAM (pron.), I (see Grammar). 
 
 AHI (m.), a snake. 
 
 AHO (interjection). 
 
 A. 
 
 A (prep.), until, as/ar as. . 
 
 d-kunkhati, to desire. 
 
 d-ka])po, ornament, disguise. 
 
 d-gacchati, to come. 
 
 d-cikkhati, to tell, to announce, to 
 
 investigate. 
 djahiio (adj.), of noble birth, [hood. 
 d-jlvo, livelihood, means of liveli- 
 ATAPO, sunshine. 
 ATAPi (adj.), ai-dent, zealous. 
 d-ddti, to take ; pass, ddiyati. 
 ADJCCO, the sun. 
 ADiNAVO, distress, suffering ; 
 
 evil result. 
 dnantariko (adj.), uninterrupted.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 157 
 
 ANAPANAM (t. t.), inhaled and 
 exhaled hieath. 
 
 ANISAMSO, advantag-e, profit. 
 
 OHMMoi'ayrt (adj.), possessing' power. 
 
 anu-bhavo, power, dignity. 
 
 a-netl, to bring- home. 
 
 apadeta (m.), inflicter, causer. 
 
 abdflliiko (adj.), affected with illness. 
 
 ABADHO, illness. 
 
 a-bht(jati, to bend, to turn. 
 
 AMA (interj.), yes, truly. 
 
 a-manteti, to address. [sphere. 
 
 AYATANAM (t. t.), organs of sense ; 
 
 a-yatiho, future. 
 
 AVASMA, old, venerable. 
 
 AYASO, despair. 
 
 AY [J (n.), life. 
 
 a-yuto (adj.), endowed with. 
 
 d-raddlio (p. p. p. to dradhati), ac- 
 complished. 
 
 d-rabhati, to begin, to attempt, 
 to exert oneself; ger. drabbha; 
 p. p. p. draddho. 
 
 ARAMO, pleasure, pleasure-garden. 
 
 d-ruhati, to ascend. 
 
 d-varanam, covering-. 
 
 dvaso, abode. 
 
 dvaliati, to convey. 
 
 AVI (adv.), manifestly, in full view 
 (see Grammar). 
 
 d-visati, to enter, to approach. 
 
 AVUSO (voc. to dyasmd), friend! 
 
 dsanaih, a seat. 
 
 A-SAVO (t. t.), literally influence; 
 human passion ; khindsavo, one in 
 whom human passion is extinct. 
 
 ASEVi (adj.), addicted to. 
 
 AHA, to sj)eak (see Grammar). 
 
 dhaiiati, to strike. 
 
 AHARO, food. 
 d-huti (f.), offering. 
 dhuneyyo (adj.), sacrificial, wor- 
 shipful, worthy of offerings. 
 
 I. 
 
 INGHA (interj.), come ! pray ! 
 ICCHATI, to wish. 
 ICCHA, wish, desire, lust. 
 INJATI, to move, to be shaken. 
 INAM, debt. [sant. 
 
 ITT HO (adj.), desired, good, plea- 
 ITI, TI (c.mj.), thus. 
 ITTHATTAM, present condition. 
 itthan-ndmo, having- such and such 
 
 a name, thus named. 
 ITTHI (f.), woman (for declension, 
 
 see Grammar). 
 IDDHI (f.) (t. t.), supernatural 
 
 power. 
 iddhiko (adj.), possessed of iddhi 
 
 (supernatural power). 
 iddhiind, possessed of supernatural 
 
 power. 
 IDHA (adv.), here, hither. [gate. 
 indakhilo, pillar in front of a city 
 INDO, king, chief. 
 INDRIYO (t. t.), faculty. 
 ISI, a priest ; mahesi (idem). 
 issariyam, dominion. 
 ISSARO, master, chief. 
 ISSA, jealousy, envy. 
 
 I. 
 
 TSA, pole of a plough. 
 
 U. 
 
 uk-kujjeti, to set up again. 
 ug-gacchati, to rise.
 
 158 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 ug-ganhati, to rise, to lift up, to 
 learn. 
 
 vg-gamanam, rise. 
 
 UGGO, violent. 
 
 UCCA (indecl.), as Jirst part of 
 compounds high ; uccasayanam, 
 high seat. 
 
 UC-CARO, excrement. 
 
 UJU (adj.), straiglit. 
 
 uJ-J/iai/atl, to be irritated, annoyed. 
 
 u-tthahuti, to rise, to stand up, to 
 exert oneself ; p. p. p. vutthito. 
 
 UNNA-NABHI (m.), spider. 
 
 UNHAM, heat. 
 
 UN HO (adj.), hot. 
 
 ULARO (adj.), mighty, great. 
 
 UTU (m. f. n.), season. [most. 
 
 UTTAMO (superl.), highest, ut- 
 
 UTTARA-SANGO, the upper yel- 
 low garment of a Buddhist priest. 
 
 UTTARO (adj.), higher; northern. 
 
 UTTANO, supine ; open, evident, 
 dear, easy ; adv. uttani and 
 tit tana, clearly. 
 
 vt-trasafi, to tremble. 
 
 UD (l>rep., only used in composi- 
 tion), above, away ; outside, out. 
 
 UDAKAM, water. 
 
 UDARAM, belly. 
 
 tidariyath, stomach. 
 
 UDANAM, solemn utterance. 
 
 uddneti (cans.), to breathe forth. 
 
 nd-eti, to come up. 
 
 UDDllAM, upwards. 
 
 ud-d/iarati, to draw out ; to lift up. 
 
 UPA (adv. and prep ), near to ; 
 below, less. 
 
 upa-cdro, approach ; gamiipacdro, 
 the approach to a village. 
 
 upa-Jivati, to subsist by. 
 upajjhdpeti, to command. 
 UPAJJHO, preceptor. 
 tipa-tt/ianam, attendance. 
 upa-tthito (p. p.p.), ready, present. 
 upaddho, half, partial. 
 upa-dissati, to be seen, discovered. 
 UPADHI (t. t.), a substratum of 
 
 being. 
 upandmeti (caus.), to offer. 
 UPA-NAHl (adj.), bearing hatred. 
 upa-ni-pajjati, to lie down. 
 upaiiissdya, near, close to. 
 upa-nisso, residing in. 
 upa-pajjati, to come to, to attain. 
 upamo, highest. 
 uparimo (adj.), uppermost. 
 upa-vadati, to blame. 
 iipa-san-kamati, to go to, to ap- 
 proach. 
 upa-samo, quietude, calm. 
 UPASAMPADA (f.) (t. t.), the upa- 
 
 sampada ordination. 
 upasampaddpeklio, wishing for ordi- 
 nation. 
 UPADANAM (t. t.), clinging to 
 existence, attachment; okhandhd, 
 element of being. 
 upd-diyati, to take hold ; anuliam- 
 
 pum It paddy a, taking pity. 
 updydso, despair. 
 UPAYO, means of success. 
 UPASAKO, fem. UPASIKA (t. t.), 
 
 a lay devotee. 
 UPEKHA (f.), indifference, equa- 
 nimity. 
 vpekhha/io, resigned, patient. 
 vp-eti, to go, to approach ; pdnu- 
 peto, living, possessed of breath.
 
 GLOSSARY, 
 
 159 
 
 UPOSATHIKAM (t. t.), food 
 offered on full-moon days. 
 
 UPOSATHO (t. t.), the Buddhist 
 Sabl)ath-day. 
 
 up-pajjati, to arise. 
 
 uppa7ino, p. p. p. to uppajati. 
 
 UBBHARO= UDDHARO (t. t.), 
 rooting up. 
 
 ul-lapati, to lay rlaim to, to assert. 
 
 ul-lumpati, to lift up. 
 
 ul-loketi, to look up. 
 
 us-saho, exertion. 
 
 E. 
 
 ehaggo (adj.), calm, tranquil. 
 
 elca-cco (adj.), one, a certain. 
 
 eka-m-antam (adv.), on one side. 
 
 EKO (num.), one ; alone. 
 
 EKO (adj.), single, solitary. 
 
 EKODIBHAVO (t. t.), unity, per- 
 haps 'predominance.' 
 
 etarahi (adv.), now. 
 
 etadiso, such like. 
 
 ETI, to go, to enter (with ace). 
 
 EVA and EVAM (adv.), thus. 
 
 ESANA (f.), wish, desire. 
 
 ESI (adj.), seeking, desiring. 
 
 ehi-passiko (adj.), inviting (epithet 
 of the dhamma). 
 
 O. 
 
 o-kdso, room, place. 
 
 o-kkanti (f.), descent. 
 
 OGHO, flood, torrent. 
 
 opanuyiko, leading to perfection 
 
 (epithet of the dhamma). 
 ott/idvo (adj.), steady. 
 ODATO, M'hite, pure. 
 opuko, without result. 
 
 o-pilapeti, to let float. 
 
 o-bhdsati, to shine. 
 
 o-bhciso, light. 
 
 o-hito (p. p.p.), put down, deposited. 
 
 K. 
 
 KAMSO, metal, bronze. 
 KANKHATI, to douht. 
 KACCHURO, scab. 
 KATHINAM (t. t.), a robe made 
 
 for a Buddhist priest in a single 
 
 day, out of the rough material. 
 KATHINO (adj.), hard, solid. 
 KANDU (f.), itch. 
 KANNO, ear. 
 
 KANHO (adj.), black, sinful. 
 katapiimxatd, meritoriousness. 
 KATAMO (pron.), what .? which ? 
 KATHAM (adv.), how. 
 KATHA (f.), discourse. 
 kad-arlyn, a bad man. 
 KANTO (ac'j.), loved, agreeable. 
 KAPPASIKAM, cotton. 
 KAPPIYO (adj.), fit, right, proper; 
 
 kappiyabhumi, a suitable site. 
 KAPPETI (cans), to enter upon, to 
 
 arrange. 
 KAPPO, time; rule; ordinance; all, 
 
 the whole ; kevalakappo, whole. 
 KAMPATI, to shake. 
 KAMBAKAM, Moollen garment. 
 K AIM MAM, doing, action. 
 kammantd (f.), calling. 
 kammanto, conduct ; occupation, 
 
 work. 
 kamma-vipako, result of actions. 
 kamyatd (f.), desire. 
 KARANAM, making. 
 KARlSAM, excrement.
 
 IGO 
 
 GLOSSARY, 
 
 KARUNA (f.), compassion. 
 KAROTf, to make (see Grammar) ; 
 manaslkaroti, to pay attention ; 
 halanharoti, to die ; anjaliih 
 harotl, to salute respectfully. 
 KALE BAR AM, a corpse. 
 K AS ATI, to plough. 
 kasl, ploughing. 
 kassako, a ploughman. 
 KAMO, wish, desire ; lust, passion. 
 KAYO, body. 
 
 kdy'iko (adj.), bodily, physical. 
 KARI (adj.), doing, acting. 
 KARO, making, constituent part. 
 kdlakiriya (f.), death. 
 KALO, time; kalena, in due time; 
 
 bhattakdlo, meal-time. 
 kalam mannati, he deems it riglit. 
 
 KASO, a cough. 
 
 KIM (adv.), M'hy, pray? what. 
 
 kiihsu, what. 
 
 kin('i{(l), anything, whatsoever. 
 
 KINCIKKHAM, a trifle. 
 
 KITTAVATI, kifteti, to proclaim. 
 
 KITTI (f.), fame. 
 
 KIPILLIKO, an ant. [tion. 
 
 KILAMATHO, fatigue, mortifica- 
 
 KILASO, scab, dry leprosy. 
 
 KiRAM, meat. 
 
 KIVA (adv.), how? 
 
 KUKUCCAM, misconduct. 
 
 KUKUTTHAKO, Phasianus gal- 
 lus, a bird. 
 
 KL'CCHI (f.), belly. 
 
 KUXJARO, elephant. 
 
 KUTTHAM, leprosy. 
 
 KUNTHO, an ant. 
 
 KUMARO, hoy. 
 
 kumdr'i (f.), a girl. 
 
 KULAM, flock, herd ; family. 
 kulapulto, son of noble family ; 
 
 high caste. 
 KULIRAKO, a crab. 
 KUSALO (adj.) (t. t.), skilful. 
 KULAM, rag. [complished. 
 
 KEVALI (m.) (t.t), one who is ac- 
 KEVALO (adj.), whole, entire. 
 KESO, hair. 
 KO (inter, pron.), Avho? which? 
 
 what ? (see Grammar). 
 koci, whosoever. 
 KONCA, heron. 
 KODHO, anger. 
 
 kovido, knowing, acquainted with. 
 KOPlNAM, pudenda. 
 KOSEYYAM, silken stuff". 
 
 KH. 
 
 KHANO, moment (brief measure 
 of time). 
 
 khanrjiccaih, state of being broken. 
 
 KHATTIYO, warrior. 
 
 KHANTi (f.), patience. 
 
 KHANDO, the shoulders ; t. t. ele- 
 ment of being. 
 
 KIL-VMATI, to endure ; to forgive ; 
 to l)e approved. 
 
 KHAYO, extinction, vanishing. 
 
 KHARO, solid; harsh. 
 
 KHASA (f.), scab. 
 
 KHIPATI, to throw. 
 
 KHIYATI, to decrease, to waste 
 away; to murmur; p.p. p. kh'ino. 
 
 KHiLO, a pin, a stake. 
 
 K HUD DO (adj.), mean. 
 
 KHURO, hoof of a horse or ox. 
 
 KHELO, saliva, plilegm. 
 
 KHETTAM, land, district.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 161 
 
 KHEMAM, safety, well-being ; 
 
 yogakkhemam, nibbana. 
 KHEMO, fern. KHEMl (adj.), 
 
 secure. 
 KHO (interj.), imleed. 
 KHOMAM, linen. 
 
 G. 
 
 GACCHATI, to g-o (see Grammar). 
 
 GANG, multitude. 
 
 GANDO, goitre. 
 
 GANH ATI, to take, to seize ; p. p. p. 
 gahito. 
 
 GANTHETI, to tie, to bind. 
 
 GANDO, smell, odour. 
 
 GABBHARO, a cleft. 
 
 GABBHO, womb, belly. 
 
 GAMBHIRO (adj.), deep. 
 
 gammo, accessible. 
 
 GARAHA (f.), blame. 
 
 GARU (m.), parent, teacher. 
 
 gani-karo, respect. 
 
 GAHATTHO, a householder. 
 
 GATHA, stanza. 
 
 gandni (adj.), leading. 
 
 GAxAIO, village. 
 
 gar ay ho (adj.), blameable; contemp- 
 tible. 
 
 GARAVO, reverence. 
 
 gdvi, cow. 
 
 GIMHO, heat. 
 
 GIMHANAM, hot season. 
 
 GIRA, voice, speech. 
 
 GIRI, mountain. 
 
 GILATI, to devour. 
 
 GILANO (adj.), sick, ill. 
 
 GITAM, singing, a song. 
 
 GUTTI (f.), guarding. 
 
 GUMBO, a bush, a thicket. 
 
 GUHA (f.), rock-cave. 
 GEDHO, greediness. 
 GO (m. f.), ox, cow (see Grammar). 
 GOTTAM, family, lineage. 
 GOPATI, to protect, to guard ; 
 p. p. p. gutto, cp. kdyagutto. 
 
 GH. 
 
 GHARAM, house. 
 
 gharamesi, leading the life of a 
 
 householder. 
 GHARO, house. 
 GHANAM, nose. 
 GHAYATI, to smell. 
 
 CA (conj.), and, also. 
 CAKKHU (n.), eye, insight. 
 cakkhumd (adj.), having eyes, 
 
 having insight. 
 CANDO (adj.), wrathful, passionate. 
 catuttho, fourth ; catuttham, for 
 
 the fourth time. 
 catud-disam, the four cardinal 
 
 points. 
 catup-pado, having four feet. 
 CATTARO (num.), four; cataso 
 
 (f.), cattdri (n.). 
 CARANAM, good conduct. 
 CARATI, to go. 
 CAVATI, to disappear ; p. p. p. 
 
 cuto. 
 CAVANAM, disappearance, death. 
 CAGO, liberality, self-sacrifice ; 
 
 abandoning. 
 CICCITAYATI, to splash. 
 CITTAM, mind. 
 cittako (adj.), mindful. 
 CINTETI, to think. 
 
 11
 
 162 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 CiVARAM, robe. 
 
 CUTI, disappearing', death. 
 
 cetasiko (adj.), mental. 
 
 CETO, mind. 
 
 ceto-vimutti, emancipation of miud. 
 
 CORO, a thief. 
 
 CH. 
 
 CHA (num.), six. 
 
 CHATTHO, sixth. 
 
 CHADDETI, to tlirow away, to 
 
 renounce. 
 CHANDO, wish, resolve, intention. 
 CHAMBHATI, to be alarmed. 
 CHAMBHITATTAM, trembling. 
 CHAYA (f.), shadow. 
 CHINDATI, to cut off. 
 
 janapado, a country. 
 
 janeti (cans, jdyati), to bring forth, 
 
 to produce. 
 JANETTi, a mother. 
 JANO, man, person, being. 
 JARA (f.), old age, decay. 
 JARO, fever. 
 JALATI, to burn. 
 JAHATI, to leave behind. 
 JATARUPAM, gold. 
 JATI (f.), birth. 
 JATU (adv.), verily. 
 jato (p. p. p.), lomahatthajato, the 
 
 hair standing on end terrified. 
 JANATI, to know. [duced. 
 
 JAYATI, to be born, to be pro- 
 JALA (f.), flame. 
 JIGUCCHATI, to dislike. 
 JIGHACCHA (f.), hunger. 
 jinnako (adj.), old. 
 
 JIVHA (f.), tongue. 
 
 JIRANAM, growing old; decay. 
 
 JIRATI, to ^row old. 
 
 JiVIKA (f.), livelihood, life. 
 
 JIVITAM, life. 
 
 JIVl (adj.), living. 
 
 JUTI (f.), splendour; jutiina, pos- 
 sessed with splendour. 
 
 JO, at last part of a compound 
 ' arising from.' 
 
 JH. 
 JHANAM (t. t.), meditation. 
 
 NATTI (f.), announcement, declara- 
 tion, formula. 
 NANAM, knowledge. 
 NATAKO, a relative. 
 NATI, kinsman. 
 NAYO, right method. 
 
 p. 
 DAMSO, a gad-fly. 
 DASATI, to bite ; p. p. p. dattho. 
 DAHO, burning. 
 
 TH. 
 
 THANI (adj.), having breasts ; 
 
 timbaruttliani, having breasts 
 
 like a tiuduka fruit. 
 THANAM, standing. 
 t/ianaso (adv.), causally, necessarily. 
 THITI (f.), durability ; life. 
 
 TAGGHA (adv.), verily. 
 
 TACO, skin. 
 
 TANDULO, rice ready for boiling.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 1G3 
 
 TANHA (f.), lust, desire ; mahd- 
 tanho, having great desire. 
 
 tatiyn, third ; tat'iyarh, for the 
 third time. 
 
 TAl'RA (adv.), there. 
 
 TAPASSi (m.), hermit. 
 
 TAPO, penance. 
 
 TAMO, darkness. \tini. 
 
 TAYO (num.), three ; f. t'lsso, ii. 
 
 TARATI, to cross, to overcome. 
 
 TALAM, surface, level. 
 
 TASO (adj.), moving, moveable. 
 
 TALO, fan-palm. [mar). 
 
 TITTHATI, to stand (see Gram- 
 
 TINAM, grass. 
 
 TIDDANAM, destroyer. 
 
 TIMBARU (m.), the tinduka-tree. 
 
 tiracchanagato, a beast, an animal. 
 
 TIRIYAM (adv.), across. 
 
 TU (particle), now, but. 
 
 TUXplKiRO, cotton-tree. 
 
 TUXHl (adv.), silently. 
 
 TUVATAM (adv.), quickly. 
 
 TEJO (n.), splendour. 
 
 TELAM, rape-oil. 
 
 TV^A3I (pron.), you, thou (see 
 Grammar). 
 
 TH. 
 
 THADDHO (adj.), firm, stubborn, 
 ^roud ijdti-tthaddho, proud of his 
 birth. 
 
 THANAYATI, to thunder. 
 
 THAVARO (adj.), stationary, firm. 
 
 THERO, a priest, an elder. 
 
 THULO (adj.), big. 
 
 D. 
 
 DAKKHATA (f.), skill. 
 
 DAKKHIXO (adj.), right-banded; 
 
 southern. 
 DAKKHIXEYYO (adj.), worthy of 
 
 offerings. 
 DALHO (adj.), firm. 
 DAXpO, a staff. 
 DADATI, to give (see Grammar, 
 
 p. 56). 
 DADDALLATI, to blaze, to shine 
 
 brilliantly. 
 DADDU (f.), leprosy. 
 DAXTO, a tooth. 
 Dx\MO, self-command. 
 dammo (adj.), to be tamed. 
 DAYA (f.), mercy, pity. 
 DARl (f.), a cave. 
 DAVO, amusement. 
 DASA (num.), ten. 
 DASSAX^AM, insight, discernment. 
 DANAM, alms. 
 DAXI (adv.), now. 
 DAYADO, kinsman. 
 DAYO, a forest. 
 DARO, DARA, wife. 
 DASO, slave. 
 di-jo, twice born. 
 ditthapado, one who has seen the 
 
 state {i.e. X^ibbana). 
 DITTHA (interjection). 
 DITTHI (f.), view, belief. 
 DIBBO (adj.), celestial. 
 DIVASO, a day. 
 divasd (adv.), during the day. 
 diva ca ratio, day and night. 
 DISA (f.), a point of the compass. 
 dissati (pass, oi passati), to be seen. 
 DiGHO (adj.), long. 
 DUKKHAM (t.t.), pain. 
 DUG-GATI, hell, bad place.
 
 104 
 
 GLOSSARY, 
 
 dutiyo, second ; dutiyam (adv.), for 
 
 the second time. 
 duvijano, difficult to understand. 
 DUSSAM, cloth. 
 DCBHATI, to illtreat. 
 durato (adv.), from far. 
 DURE (adv.), far. 
 deva-ko, god. 
 devafd, a deva. 
 deva/nitto, a god. 
 DEVO, a god. 
 
 DESAYATI, deseti, to preach. 
 DESO, country. 
 DESSI, hater. 
 DEHO, hody. 
 
 domanassarh, dejection, gloom. 
 DOSO (Skr. dvesha), anger, hatred. 
 DOSO (Skr. dosha), defect, hlemish. 
 DVAYO, of two sorts, divers. 
 din-padako, having two feet. 
 DVE (num.), two. 
 dvedha (adv.), in two parts. 
 
 DH. 
 
 DHAJAGGAM, flag. 
 
 D HAN AM, proj)erty, wealth. 
 
 DHAMMO (t. t.), law, condition ; 
 ditthadhammo, the visible condi- 
 tion, the present world. 
 
 uttarimanussa-dhammo, superhu- 
 man condition. 
 
 dhanwia-vicayo, religious research. 
 
 DHAMMO (adj.), religious ; fern. 
 dhammi. 
 
 DHATU (n. and f.), substance; 
 principle. 
 
 DHAIIANAM, bearing in mind. 
 
 dhuriiyati (cans.), to bear in mind. 
 
 DHITI (f.), wisdom, energy. 
 
 DHiRO (adj.), wise. 
 DHUTTO, fraudulent. 
 DHUNATI, to shake. 
 dhtirava, taking the yoke. 
 DHURO, a yoke. 
 DHORAYHO, beast of burden. 
 
 N. 
 
 NA (neg.), not. 
 NAKHO, nail of the finger. 
 NAGARAM, a town. 
 NANGALAM, plough. 
 NACCAM, dancing. 
 NANDI (f.), joy. 
 NAIMATI, to bow down. 
 NAMASSATI, to honour. 
 NAMO (indecl.), honour, reverence 
 
 (with the dative). 
 NARASA BHO, chief of men. 
 NARO, man. 
 NALINl (f.), a pond. 
 NAVA (num.), nine. 
 NAVANlTAM, cream. 
 nava/no, ninth. 
 NAVO (adj.), new. 
 NAHATAKO (t. t.), one in whom 
 
 spiritual instruction is complete ; 
 
 who is cleansed, pure. 
 NAHARU, tendon, muscle. 
 NAGO, a serpent ; susundgo, a 
 
 young serpent. 
 NALIKERO, coconut-tree. 
 NANATTAM, diversity. 
 NANA (adv.), various, different ; 
 
 away from. 
 ndna-ppak'iro, of various sorts, 
 NAM A (adv.), by name ; indeed. 
 NAMAM, name; niiinariipain (t. t.). 
 ndmaso (adv.), witij name.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 165 
 
 NIKAYO, assembly, multitude ; 
 sa^^anjArayo, assemblage of beings. 
 
 NI (prep., only in composition), 
 downwards. 
 
 NI and NIR (prep., only in com- 
 position), outward. 
 
 ni-kubbati, to deceive. 
 
 nik-kdmi (adj.), free from desire. 
 
 nik-kujjito, what has been over- 
 thrown. 
 
 nik-khamati, to go out. 
 
 nik-khamati, to devote. 
 
 ni-kkhepo, putting down ; inter- 
 ment. 
 
 NIGAMO, a town. 
 
 ni-gahako, an oppressor, enemy. 
 
 NIGRODHO, banyan-tree. 
 
 NICCO (adj.), perpetual. 
 
 ni-jigiriisati, to covet. 
 
 ni-pako (adj.), prudent. 
 
 ni-patati, to fall down. 
 
 NIBBATI (t.t.), to be extinguished, 
 to go out. 
 
 NIBBANAM (t. t.), the summum 
 bonum of the Buddhists. 
 
 NIBBUTI, tranquillity (Nibbana). 
 
 nibbuto (t. t.), free from care, or 
 having attained Nibbana. 
 
 nibhdsi (adj.), shining. 
 
 NIMANTANAM (t. t.), invitation. 
 
 NIMITTAM, sign, mark; subject 
 of thought. 
 
 niyydniko, leading to salvation. 
 
 NIYO (adj.), own. 
 
 NIRAYO, hell. 
 
 wi-r?<;y/za#i (pass.), to cease, to perish. 
 
 NIRODHO (t.t.), cessation. 
 
 NIVATO, humility. [off. 
 
 ni-vdreti (caus.), to keep off, to ward 
 
 ni-vdsl (adj.), dwelling. 
 
 ni-vdseti, to dress. 
 
 ni-vesanam, house, abode. 
 
 ni-vuto, obstructed. 
 
 ni-sdmeti, to attend, listen to. 
 
 ni-sidati, to sit down. 
 
 NISSAYO (t. t.), resource ; cattdro 
 
 nissayd. 
 nis-saranam, outcome, result. 
 nis-fsdya (ger.), dependent upon. 
 nihino (adj.), low, vile. 
 NICO (adj.), low, mean, base. 
 ni-yati, to go out. 
 NONA (adv.), surely. 
 nekkhammam, giving up the world. 
 ne-katiko, fallacious. 
 NETTAM, eye. 
 
 PA (prep.), frequently in composi- 
 tion, before, onward. 
 
 PAMSU (n.), dust, dirt. 
 
 pa-kdsati, to be visible, to manifest. 
 
 PAKKHANDIKA (f.), diarrhea. 
 
 PAKKHI (adj.), possessed with 
 wings. 
 
 PAKKHIKAM (t. t.), a feast held 
 on the eighth day of the month. 
 
 pa-kkhipati, to throw. 
 
 pa-gumbo, thicket. 
 
 pa-gganhdti, to hold out, to bring 
 forth, to get ready. 
 
 PACATI, to cook. 
 
 pa-cdro, attendant. 
 
 pacca-kdlo, present time. 
 
 PACCATTAM (adv.), singly. 
 
 puccaniko (adj.), adverse, hostile, 
 opposite. 
 
 PACCAYO, a requisite.
 
 16R 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 pacca-vckkhati, to look at. 
 
 pacc-ud-d-vattati, to retreat. 
 
 pacceko, eacli one, single, several. 
 
 PACCHIMO (adj.), hindermost, 
 last ; pacchimd disd, the west. 
 
 pa-jahati, to abandon. 
 
 PAJA (f.), progeny, race. 
 
 pa-jjalati, to burn, to blaze. 
 
 pa-jdndti, to know, to understand ; 
 cans, panhdpeti, to make known ; 
 p. p. p. pahhatto. 
 
 pajdi/att, to multiply. 
 
 pajjalati, to shine. 
 
 pajjoto, light, lustre, lamp ; tela- 
 pajjoto, an oil-lamp. 
 
 PANCA (num.), five. 
 
 pancamo, the fifth. 
 
 PANXA, wisdom, intellect, under- 
 standing. 
 
 PANHAM (panhath), question. 
 
 PATI and PATI, towards, back, 
 in return ; in composition before 
 A-owels, pace. 
 
 pati-kkamati, to step backwards. 
 
 pati-kkamo, retreating. 
 
 pati-ggahanam, acceptance, receiv- 
 ing (to ganhdti). 
 
 pati-ghdto, repulsion, warding off. 
 
 PATI-GIIO, anger. 
 
 pati-cchddanam, concealment. 
 
 patl-cchddi, covering. 
 
 pati-fcliddcti, to conceal. 
 
 pati-jandti, to know, to personate ; 
 aor. paccanfiasi. 
 
 pati-7iis-sago (t. t.), forsaking. 
 
 patipadd (f.), step, way. 
 
 pati-pvjeti, to honour. 
 
 pati-ppa-.ssambhati, to be calmed, to 
 subside, to come to an end. 
 
 pati-bujjhati, to awake. 
 
 pati-bhdti, to appear, to be evident. 
 
 ]>ati-rnpo (adj.), suitable, fit. 
 
 pati-labliati, to obtain, to receive. 
 
 pati-ldbho, obtaining ; attainment. 
 
 pati-vatteti, to subvert ; witli a, not 
 to be subverted. 
 
 pati-vljjhati, to acquire. 
 
 pati-saiikhdt'i, to reflect. 
 
 pati-sahcikkhati, to consider. 
 
 pati-sam-vedi (adj.), experiencing. 
 
 pati-sarano, refuge, help. 
 
 pati-sundti, to assent ; aor. pacc- 
 assosi, paccassosum. 
 
 patl-sevati, to practise, to receive. 
 
 PATHAVl (f.), earth. 
 
 pa-ndmati, to bend. 
 
 pa-ni-dahati, to stretch. 
 
 PAXIDHI (m.), aspiration (t. t.). 
 
 panito (adj.), accomplished, excel- 
 lent ; as neuter, a term for 
 nibbdna. 
 
 PANDITO, wise man. 
 
 PANDU (adj.), yellow. 
 
 PAXHO and PANHO, question. 
 
 PATATI, to fall ; cans, patdyati. 
 
 pati-rupo, suitable. 
 
 pati-sallanam, solitude. 
 
 pathallundrdmo, delighting in soli- 
 tude. 
 
 PA-TITTHA (f.), fixity, resting- 
 place. 
 
 PATTAM, a leaf. 
 
 pattakallaih, seasonableness, time- 
 liness. 
 
 pattactvaram, bowl and robe. 
 
 PATTI (f.), obtaining, acquisition. 
 
 PATTO, bowl. 
 
 patto, p. p. p. oi pdpundti.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 167 
 
 PATTHAYATI, to wish for, to 
 desire. 
 
 PADAM, step; nibbana. 
 
 pa-dahati, to strive, to exert. 
 
 PA-DlPO, lamp. 
 
 pa-duttho, wicked, evil. 
 
 PANA (adv.), now, further (the 
 same as jmna). 
 
 pa-nudati, to remove, to reject. 
 
 PANTHO, a road; also neuter. 
 
 PAPPOTf, see pdpunati. 
 
 PAPPHASAM, lungs. 
 
 pa-bba-jati, to go forth. 
 
 PA-BBAJITO (t. t.), one who has 
 given up the world. 
 
 PABBAJJA (f.), monastic life. 
 
 PABBAJJA (f.) (t.t.), the pabbajja 
 ordination. 
 
 PABBATO, mountain. 
 
 pabhamkaro, light-giving. 
 
 PABHASO, splendour. 
 
 pa-majjati, to delay. [ful. 
 
 pamatto, p. p.p. to pamajjati, sloth- 
 
 pa-maddi (adj.), crushing, destroy- 
 ing. 
 
 PA-MANAM, measure. 
 
 PAMADO, carelessness. 
 
 pa-muncati, to release. 
 
 pa-mussati, to leave behind. 
 
 PAMOCANAM, deliverance. 
 
 payirupa-sati, to honour. 
 
 pa-yutto, tied. 
 
 PARAM (adv.), beyond, after. 
 
 paramo, highest. 
 
 pardbhava, suffering, loss. 
 
 PARABHAVO, decay, loss. 
 
 PARI (prep.), around, about, fre- 
 quently used in composition, where 
 it appears also as PALI. 
 
 PARIKKHARO, apparatus. 
 
 pari-kkhmo, wasted. 
 
 pari-cito (p. p. p.), accumulated. 
 
 PARINAMO, change, alteration ; 
 digestion. 
 
 PARITTA (f. and n.), protection. 
 
 PARIDEVO, lamentation. 
 
 pari-nibbdti (t. t.), to attain Nibbana. 
 
 pari-pdko, maturity, perfection. 
 
 pari-punno, completed. 
 
 pari-b/idsafi, to revile. 
 
 pari-mukharh (adv.), in front, before. 
 
 pariy-dddti, to seize, lay hold of. 
 
 party -dptcndti, to learn thoroughly ; 
 p. p. p. pai'iydputo. 
 
 pari-ydyo, succession, order, way. 
 
 pari-yosdnath, termination. 
 
 pari-rundhati, to surround ; to lay 
 siege. 
 
 pari-vatto, circle, succession ; modi- 
 fication. 
 
 pari-vanneti, to describe, to praise. 
 
 pari-vdretl (cans.), to surround, to 
 accompany. 
 
 PARI-VESANA (f. and n.), distri- 
 bution of food. 
 
 PARISA, assembly. 
 
 pari-sujjhati (pass.), to be purified. 
 
 parisuddho (adj.), pure, clear. 
 
 PARISSAYAM, danger. 
 
 PARIHARO, attention. 
 
 pareto, dead, destroyed. 
 
 PARO (adj.), distant, further ; 
 other. 
 
 PARO (adv.), beyond, more than. 
 
 PALASO, a leaf. 
 
 paligho, an obstacle. 
 
 PA-VACANAM, the word of the 
 Buddha.
 
 169 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 pa-vatteti (caus.), to set rolling ; 
 jmvattite dharniuacakke, having- 
 founded the kingdom of truth. 
 
 PA VAN AM, side of a mountain. 
 
 pa-vapati, to sow. 
 
 pa-vassati, to rain. 
 
 pa-visuti, to enter. 
 
 palayati, to run away. 
 
 pali-gunthati, to envelop, to en- 
 tangle. 
 
 PALLANKO, a couch. 
 
 pa-sattho (p. p. p.), praised. [fied. 
 
 jia-sanno, p. p. p. to pasidati, satis- 
 
 pa-sahati, to use force. 
 
 pa-sddo, brightness, clearness, glad- 
 ness. 
 
 pa-sdsati, to rule. 
 
 PASU, cattle. 
 
 PASSATI, to see. 
 
 pa-ssaddhi (f.), calming down. 
 
 pa-ssambJiati, to calm down ; p. p. p. 
 passaddho. 
 
 pa-ssambhayam, calming down. 
 
 pa-ssasati, to exhale air. 
 
 PASSAVO, urine. 
 
 PA HAN AM, abandoning. 
 
 pa-hitatto, resolute. 
 
 pahuto, much, abundant. 
 
 pa-koti, to be able. 
 
 pa-honako (adj.), sufficient. 
 
 pdkimo (adj.), cooked, dressed, 
 ripened. 
 
 PACANAM, a goad. 
 
 PAN AM, living being. 
 
 pdndtipdti (adj.), taking life. 
 
 PANO, breath. 
 
 PANAKO, Morm, insect. 
 
 PANI (m.), hand. 
 
 pdtikankho, to be expected. 
 
 PATIPADIKAM (t. t.), food offered I 
 on tbe day following full-mooa 
 day. 
 
 PATANAM, causing to fall. 
 
 gabbhapdtanum, causing miscar- 
 riage ; abortion. 
 
 PATi (f.), a bowl. 
 
 PATU (adv.), manifestly. 
 
 pdtu-bhavati, to become visible ; 
 aor. patur-ahosi. 
 
 pdtu-bhdvo, appearance. 
 
 pdda-talam, sole of the foot. 
 
 PA DO, a small silver coin. 
 
 pdddraho, worth a pdda. 
 
 PADO, foot. 
 
 PANAM, drinking. 
 
 pdpako (adj.), bad. 
 
 pdpiccho, having sinful desires. 
 
 PAPUNATI, PAPUNOTi, PAPP- 
 OTI, to attain ; pattabbo, attain- 
 able. 
 
 PAPO (adj.), evil, bad. 
 
 PAYASO, rice-milk. 
 
 PARAM, the other shore. 
 
 pdram Gaiigdya, across the Ganges. 
 
 pdri-sajjo (adj.), belonging to an 
 assembly ; brahmapdrisajjo, be- 
 longing to the retinue of Malia- 
 brahma. 
 
 pdrl-suddhi, purity, perfection. 
 
 PALAYATI, to guard, to preserve. 
 
 pdliccam, hoariness, greyness of 
 hair. [season. 
 
 pd-vussako, belonging to the rainy 
 
 PASANO, a stone. 
 
 PASADO, house of more than one 
 storey, tower, palace. 
 
 pdhuneyyo (adj.), worthy of being 
 guests.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 169 
 
 pitthi-mamsiko (adj.), backbiting. 
 
 pilakd (f.), a boil. 
 
 PINDAPATO (t.t.), food received 
 
 in the alms bowl. 
 PINDI (f.), lump, mass. 
 PINDO, lump, ball ; food ; alms. 
 PITA (m.), father (see Grammar). 
 PITTAM, bile. 
 PI-NASO, cold in the head. 
 PI PAS A, thirst. 
 PIPPHALl (f.), long- pepper. 
 PIYO (adj.), dear. 
 PISUNO (adj.), backbiting'. 
 PIHAKAM, spleen. 
 PITI, joy, delight. 
 PUGGALO, individual. 
 PUCCHATI, to ask, to question. 
 PUNNO (adj.), good, virtuous. 
 PUTTO, son. [wide. 
 
 PUTHU (adv.), separately, far and 
 PUNA, see PANA. 
 punab-bhavo, rebirth. 
 PUPPHAM, flower. 
 pubbanho, forenoon. 
 PUBBO (adj.), former, early. 
 PUBBO, pus, matter. 
 PUR AM, town. 
 pura-kkharoti, to put in front. 
 purato (adv.), in front of. 
 puratthimo (adj.), eastern. 
 PURA (adv.), formerly, previously. 
 PURANO^ former. 
 PURIMO, east. 
 
 PURISAKO, minister, attendant. 
 PURISO, man, a male. 
 piijako, honouring. 
 PUJA, attention, veneration. 
 PUJETI, to honour. 
 POTI, stinking, foul. 
 
 PtJRO, full. 
 
 PEKHA (f.), desire ; punnapekho, 
 looking for good works. 
 
 pecca (ger.), having departed. 
 
 peseti (caus.), to send. 
 
 POKKHARASAKATO, a bird. 
 
 POTAKO, youth, cub. 
 
 potikd (f.), maiden. 
 
 pothvjjaniko, belonging to an un- 
 converted person ; sensual. 
 
 ponobbliaviko, connected with re- 
 birth. 
 
 PORANO and PORANAKO, old. 
 
 POSO, man. 
 
 PLAVATI, or piluvati, to float ; 
 caus. pildpeti. 
 
 PH. 
 
 PHARATI, to flash, to shine forth. 
 PHARUSO, harsh, unkind. 
 PHALAM, fruit. 
 PHALATI, to split asunder, to 
 
 break open. 
 PHANITAM, sugar. 
 plidleti (caus.), to split, to cleave. 
 PHALO, ploughshare. 
 PHASU (adj.), comfortable. 
 phdsu-vihdro, comfort, ease. 
 PHUTO, thrilled, pervaded. 
 PHUSATI, to touch, to reach; 
 
 p. p. p. pliutt/io. 
 PHUSSITO (adj.), flowering, l)Ios- 
 
 soming. 
 PHOTTABBAM (t. t.), touch. 
 
 B. 
 
 BANDHATI, to bind. 
 BANDHANAM, binding; bonds, 
 fetter.
 
 170 
 
 GLOSSARY, 
 
 BANDHU (m.), kinsman. 
 
 BALI (m.), religious offering. 
 
 BALIVADDO, an ox. 
 
 BAHU (adj.), many. 
 
 bahu-ppado, liaving many feet. 
 
 BALHO (adj.), hard, severe, as first 
 part of a compound ' very.' 
 
 BALO (adj.), young, foolish. 
 
 BAH 1 110 (adj.), external. 
 
 BIJAIVr, germ, seed. 
 
 BUDDHO, an epithet of Gotama, 
 and used as a designation of 
 Gotama ' the Enlightened.' 
 
 BOJJHANGO (t. t.), constituents 
 of wisdom. 
 
 BOD HI (f.), wisdom. 
 
 BRAVlTI, BRUTI, to say, to tell. 
 
 BRAHMAM, practice of devotion. 
 
 BRAHMACARIYAM (t. t., also 
 fem.), a religious life ; the duties 
 of a religious life. 
 
 BRAHMAiyO, a brahmin. 
 
 hy-anti-haroti, to aholisli, to re- 
 move. 
 
 BYASANAM, misfortune, unhap- 
 piness. 
 
 bya-karot'i, to answer. 
 
 BYADHI (m.), illness. 
 
 BYAPADO, wish to injure. 
 
 BYAROSANA (f.), anger. 
 
 BH. 
 
 BHAKKHO (adj.), eating. 
 BHAGANDALA (f.), fistula. 
 BHAGAVA (adj.), worshipful, 
 
 venerable ; an epithet of the 
 
 Buddha. 
 BHAGINI (f.), sister. 
 BHANGAM, hempen cloth. 
 
 BIIAJATI, to serve, to honour ; to 
 cultivate. 
 
 BHANATI, to shine. 
 
 BHANATI, to speak; pass, bha- 
 nrtat'i. 
 
 BHATTAM, food; uddesa° (t. t.), 
 food given on special occasions ; 
 saldka° (t. t.), ticlvct food. 
 
 BHADANTO, term for addressing 
 a Bud<niist monk. 
 
 BHADDO, BHADRO (adj.), good. 
 
 BHAYAM, fear. 
 
 BHARATI, to bear, to support. 
 
 BHAVAM, lord, sir (see Grammar). 
 
 BHAVATI, to be, to exist. 
 
 BHAVANAM, being, existence ; 
 realm. 
 
 BHAVO, corporeal existence, birth. 
 
 BHAGO, portion, part, share. 
 
 BHATARO, brother. 
 
 BHATA (m.), brother. 
 
 BHARO, burden. 
 
 bhaveti (cans, to bhavati), to in- 
 crease, to cause to exist. 
 
 BHAVO, property. 
 
 BHASATI, to tell. 
 
 BHIKKHU, title of a Buddhist' 
 monk. 
 
 BHIKKUNi (f.), female mendicant. 
 
 BHISMO (adj.), terrible. 
 
 BHiYO, BHIYYO (adj.), more. 
 
 BHIRU (adj.), timid. 
 
 BHUJISSO, a free man ; a freed 
 slave. 
 
 BHUNJATI, to enjoy ; to eat. 
 
 binunmo (adj.), terrestrial. 
 
 BHUSAM (adv.), much, exceed- 
 ingly. 
 
 bhutakalo, time to speak the truth.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 171 
 
 bhutapuhbo (adj.), that has been 
 
 before. 
 BHUTO, spirit, being-. 
 BHUMI (f.), the earth. 
 BHEDO, parting-. 
 BHERAVO (adj.), frightful. 
 BHESAJJAM, medicine. 
 BHO, sir, master (see Grammar). 
 BHOGO, wealth ; appa-bhogo, 
 
 having little property. 
 BHOJANAM, food. 
 
 M. 
 
 MAMSAM, flesh. 
 
 MAKASO, a g-nat, mosquito. 
 
 MAKKHI (adj.), concealing; pu- 
 pamakkhi, hypocritical. 
 
 MAGGO, path. 
 
 MANKU, troubled, restless. 
 
 MANGALO (adj.), happy. 
 
 MACCU (m.), death. 
 
 MAJJAM, strong drink. 
 
 majjhimo (adj.), middle. 
 
 MAJJHO, middle. 
 
 MANNATI, to think. 
 
 MANDANAM, adornment. 
 
 MANDALI (adj.), having a disc. 
 
 WATTA (f.), measure ; quality. 
 
 MATTHAKAM, head. 
 
 MATTHALUNGAM, brain. 
 
 MADO, enjoyment. 
 
 MADHU(n.), honey. 
 
 niadhumeho, diabetes. 
 
 MANAPO, pleasing, pleasant, 
 charming. 
 
 MANUSSO, man, human being. 
 
 MANO, mind (also neuter). 
 
 manoramo (adj.), pleasant, delight- 
 ful. 
 
 MANTETI, to consult, to advise. 
 MANTO, hymn ; the Vedas. 
 MANDIYO, slowness, stupidity. 
 mamdyito, concerning oneself ; own. 
 3IAYUR0, MORO, peacock. 
 MARANAM, dying, death. 
 mahab-halo, liaving great strength. 
 MAHA, great (see Grammar). 
 malid-matto, king's minister, great 
 
 noble. 
 mahd-raja, king, great king. 
 MA, negation. 
 MALUTO, wind. 
 MANAVAKO (adj.), young ; a 
 
 young man. 
 MATA (f.), mother (see Grammar). 
 MANASO, lust. 
 MANUSO, MANUSi (f.) (adj.), 
 
 human. 
 MANO, pride, arrogance. 
 MAYA (f.), illusion, deceit; mdt/dvi, 
 
 deceitful. 
 MARISO, venerable person ; term 
 
 of address. 
 MALA (f.), a garland. 
 MASO, month. 
 MIGO, antelope, deer. 
 MICCHA (adv.), falsely, wrongly. 
 micchd-cdro, wrong conduct. 
 MITTO, friend. 
 MIDDHAM, sleep; vigatamiddJio, 
 
 awake. 
 MINATI, to measure ; p. f. p. 
 
 metabbo. 
 MUKHAM, mouth, face; means, 
 
 cause. 
 MUKHO, face. 
 MUCCHA (f.), faintness. 
 MUNCATI, to release.
 
 172 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 MUNDAKO, shaveling', term of 
 
 reproach. 
 MUTTAM, urine ; piitimuttam, 
 
 urine of cattle. 
 MUTTI(f.), release. 
 MUDU (adj.), soft. 
 MUDDHA(in.), head. 
 MUDHA (adv.), gratis, for nothing. 
 MUSA (adv.), wrongly. 
 nmsa-vddo, lying, falsehood. 
 MUHUTTO, second, brief measure 
 
 of time. 
 MULHO, stupid. 
 MULAM, root. 
 MUSTKO, a fly. 
 MEGHO, cloud, storm, rain. 
 METHUNO (adj.), relating to 
 . sexual intercourse. 
 ME DO, fat, blubber. 
 MERAYAM, intoxicating liquor. 
 MODATI, to rejoice. 
 MORO, see MAYURO. 
 MOHO, ignorance. 
 
 Y. 
 
 YAK AN AM, the liver. 
 YAKKHO, a superhuman being, a 
 
 yaksha. 
 YATI, to restrain ; p. p. p. i/ato. 
 YATO (adv.), since. 
 YATTHA (adv.), the same as 
 
 ' yatra,' inasmuch. 
 YATHA (adv.), as. 
 yathdbhutam (adv.), according to 
 
 the reality. 
 YADA (adv.), when, whenever. 
 YASO, fame, renown. 
 yasasHivdy surrounded by eminent 
 
 men. 
 
 yasassi (adj.), famous. 
 
 YACATI, to ask, to beg, to entreat. 
 
 YATI, to go. 
 
 YATRA (f.), livelihood. 
 
 YANAM, going, preceding ; car- 
 riage, car. 
 
 yuni-kuto, used as a vehicle. 
 
 YAPANAM, maintenance. 
 
 YAPANATI, to live. 
 
 YAVA (adv.), as long ; ydva h'l- 
 vahca, and as long as ; in con- 
 junction with eva, ydvad eva, so 
 long as. 
 
 YUGAM, pair ; generation. 
 
 YUGO (also neuter), yoke. [to. 
 
 YUNJATI, to turn one's attention 
 
 YEBHUYYO (adj.), abundant ; 
 yebhuyyena, in great numbers. 
 
 YO (pron.), who (see Grammar). 
 
 YOGAKKHEMO, security ; t. t. 
 Nibbana. 
 
 YOTTAM, tie. 
 
 YONI (f.), womb ; source, origin. 
 
 YONISO, really. 
 
 YOBBANAM, youth. 
 
 R. 
 
 RAKKHATI, to protect. 
 
 RAKKHA (f.), protection. 
 
 RAJATAM, silver. 
 
 RAJJAM, kingdom. 
 
 RATTI (f.), night. 
 
 ratti-n-divo, day and night. 
 
 RABHASO (adj.), contemptuous, 
 fierce. 
 
 RAMATf, to enjoy oneself, to de- 
 light in ; rata, delighting. 
 
 RASO, sap, juice ; sweet thing ; 
 taste.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 173 
 
 rassako (adj.), sliort. 
 RASSO (adj.), short. 
 RAHADO, a deep pool, a lake. 
 RAHO, solitude. 
 
 RAGO, evil desire, greed, attach- 
 ment, lust. 
 rdjadhdni, royal city. 
 rajabhato, king's soldier. 
 RAJA (m.), king, see Grammar. 
 RAMO, joy, delight. 
 RITTO [rishta] , injured. 
 RUDDO (adj.), cruel. 
 RUKKHO, a tree. 
 ROPAM (t. t.), form, figure. 
 ROGO, illness. 
 ROCETI (caus.), to approve. 
 ROSAKO (adj.), M-rathful. 
 
 LABHATI, to take ; p. p. p. 
 laddho. 
 
 LAYO, instant (brief measure of 
 time). 
 
 LASIKA (f.), the fluid which lubri- 
 cates the joints. 
 
 LABHA (adv. dat.), for the ad- 
 vantage of. 
 
 LUDDO (adj.), cruel. 
 
 LOKO, world. 
 
 loka-jettho, chief of the world. 
 
 LOKA-DHAMMO (t. t.), things of 
 the world, worldly condition. 
 
 loka-dhdtu, world-system. 
 
 loka-vidu, knowing the world (epi- 
 thet of the Buddha). 
 
 LOMAM, hair of the body. 
 
 LOMAHAMSO, horripilation. 
 
 LOHITAM, bh)od. 
 
 LOHITO(adj.), red. 
 
 V. 
 
 VAKKAM, kidney. 
 
 vaggiyo (adj.), belonging to a group. 
 
 VAGGU (adj.), beautiful. 
 
 VACCO, lustre. 
 
 VAJATI, to walk. 
 
 VAJIRO, Indra's thunderbolt. 
 
 VANCANIKO, deceitful. 
 
 VANCETI (caus.), to deceive. 
 
 VADDHATI, to grow, to increase ; 
 
 to pour out. 
 VANNO, appearance, beauty, form ; 
 
 caste ; vannavd (adj.), having 
 
 beauty. 
 VATA (interj.), indeed ! verily ! 
 VATTATI, to take place. 
 VATTHAM, cloth ; raiment. 
 VATTHU (n.), substance. 
 VATTHU (m.), a site, a building 
 
 (Skr. vcistu). 
 VADATI, to declare ; to speak. 
 VANAM, wood, forest. 
 VANATHO, desire, lust. 
 VANIBBAKO, mendicant. 
 VANDAKO, praising. 
 VANDATI, to praise. 
 VAPATI, to sow. 
 VAPPO, sowing. 
 
 varanhu, knowing what is excellent. 
 varado, giving what is excellent. 
 vardhai-o, bringing what is excellent. 
 VARO (adj.), excellent. 
 VALI (f.), a wrinkle. 
 vdlittaro (adj.), wrinkled. 
 VASATI, to dwell. 
 vasalako, MTetched, outcast. 
 VASA (f.), serum ; marrow of the 
 
 flesh.
 
 174 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 VASALO, outcast. 
 
 VASSO, rain ; a year. 
 
 VA (conj.), I'a — va, either . . or. 
 
 VACA (f.), word, saying, speech. 
 
 VATO, wind. 
 
 VADITAIM, music. 
 
 VADO, speaking, speech. 
 
 VAYAMATI, to struggle, to strive. 
 
 VAYAMO (t. t.), exertion, endea- 
 vour. 
 
 VASO, dwelling, living, abode. 
 
 VAHANAM, carrying; a vehicle; 
 an animal used in riding. 
 
 VI (prep.), used in composition, 
 asunder, apart from. 
 
 vi-kdlo, wrong time. 
 
 VIGGAHO, body ; manussa°, a 
 human being. [perking. 
 
 vi-kirano (adj.), squandering, dis- 
 
 vi-kkandati, to cry out. 
 
 vi-gahati, to obtain. 
 
 vi-cakkhano, knowing, wise, dis- 
 cerning. 
 
 vi-caratl, to wander. 
 
 vi-cfiro, investigation. 
 
 VICIKICCHITAM, doubt. 
 
 VICCHIKO, scorpion. 
 
 vi-jand-vato (adj.), understanding. 
 
 vi-Jeti, vi-jinuti, to conquer. 
 
 VIJJATI, to know (see Grammar). 
 
 VIJJATI, to be, to exist. 
 
 VIJJA (f.), knowledge, wisdom. 
 
 VIJJU (f.), lightning. 
 
 vijjuko (adj.), lightning. 
 
 VINNANAM, consciousness, in- 
 telligence. 
 
 vihndpeti (cans, to vijdndti), to 
 speak to, to address, to inform. 
 
 VINNa(adj.), intelligent. 
 
 VI-TAKKO, reflection, thought. 
 VITACCHIKA (f.), scabies. 
 V ITT AM, property, wealth. 
 vitthdrati, tf) declare, to amplify ; 
 
 aor. vitthdsL [cation. 
 
 vitthdro, detail, extension, amplifi- 
 VIDU (adj.), knowing, wise. 
 VI-NAYO, training. 
 VINA (adv.), without. 
 vi-ndseti, to waste. 
 vineti, to remove, to put away. 
 vinodanam, removal, dispelling. 
 vinodeti (cans.), to dispel. 
 VINDATI, to acquire. 
 vi-pdceti, to be indignant. 
 VI-PARI-NAMO, change, reverse. 
 vi-ppa-mutto (p. p. p.), released. 
 vl-ppa-yogo, absence. 
 vijipa-vasati, to go abroad; p. p. p. 
 
 vippaviittho. 
 vippavdso, absence ; ticivarenca 
 
 avippavdso, not parting with the 
 
 three robes. 
 vi-ppa-sldati, to become calm. 
 vi-bhajati, to divide, to distinguish. 
 VIBHAVO, power, prosperity. 
 VI-BHAVO (t. t.), absence of ex- 
 istence, formless existence. 
 vibhdvayati, to understand. 
 vibhuaanaih, adornment. 
 vi-muncati, to release ; p. p. p. 
 
 vimutto. 
 VI-MUTTI (f.), release. 
 VI-3I0KH(), release. 
 VI-MOCAYAM, releasing. 
 vi-rajn, free from corruption, pure ; 
 
 free from dust. 
 vi-rajjdti, to be displeased ; p. p. p. 
 
 viratto.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 175 
 
 VIRATI (f.), abstinence. 
 vl-ramati, to abstain. 
 vi-ravati, to cry aloud. 
 vi-rago, absence of desire. 
 vira'teti (cans.), to put away. 
 VIRIYAM, exertion, strength. 
 vi-ruhati, to go on. 
 vi-rocafi, to be brilliant. 
 VILEPANAM, toilet perfume. 
 vi-varati, to open ; p. p. p. vivato. 
 VI-VEKO, separation, seclusion ; 
 
 discrimination. 
 vivlccati (pass.), to separate oneself. 
 VISAM, poison. 
 vi-samo (adj.), uneven. 
 vi-siiddho, (adj.), pure. 
 VIS UK AM, show, spectacle. 
 VISUCIKA (f.), cholera. 
 VISESO, distinction. 
 vi-ssuto (adj.), renowned. 
 viharatl, to dwell. 
 
 VI-HARO, living; Buddhist temple. 
 vi-hiihsati, to hurt. 
 VIHIMSA (f.), hurting. 
 vlta-malo, spotless. 
 VITO (adj.), devoid of; a-vlto, not 
 
 free from. 
 v'ltipatati, to transgress. 
 vi-ti-sareti, to remind mutually. 
 VIRO, liero. 
 ViSATI (num.), twenty. 
 VUTTHI (f.), rain. 
 VUTTI (f.), conduct. 
 vusitavd, dwelling, residing. 
 vusi-md (adj.), dwelling. 
 vupakattho, distant, removed. 
 VUPASAMO, pacification. 
 VE (interj.), indeed. 
 VENU (m.), a bamboo, a reed. 
 
 VEDAGO (t. t.), knowing the law. 
 VEDANA (f.) (t. t.), perception, 
 
 sensation. 
 VEPULLAM, development. 
 veyya-karanam, explanation. 
 VEYYABADHIKO, sick, ill; to 
 
 byabadho. [al»l.). 
 
 VERAMANI (f.), abstinence (Mitli 
 VEROCANAK.O, bright. 
 VELA (f.), time, occasion. 
 VELO, time. 
 
 VEVANNIYAM, change, diversity. 
 VESi (f.), harlot. 
 VEHASO, sky. 
 VOROPETI (caus.), to deprive of. 
 
 SA, as first member of a compound 
 ' with.' 
 
 SAMYOJANAM (t. t.), bond, at- 
 tachment. 
 
 samlianti, to strike. 
 
 SAKO (adj.), own. 
 
 SAKKACCA (adv.), attentively. 
 
 SAK-KAYA-DITTHI (t. t.), con- 
 ceit. 
 
 SAK-KAYO, own body or person. 
 
 SAK-KARO, hospitality. 
 
 sak-kuroti, to receive hospitality, to 
 honour. 
 
 SAKKO (adj.), able. 
 
 SAKKHl, witness. 
 
 SAKHA (m.), companion, friend 
 (see Grammar). 
 
 SAGGO, heaven. 
 
 SANKAPPO (t.t.), thought, imagi- 
 nation, aspiration. 
 
 san-kampati, to quake, to tremble. 
 
 san-kudd/io, angry.
 
 176 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 SAN-KHARO (t. t.), the elements, 
 
 matter. 
 san-kliipati, to shorten, to abridg-e. 
 saii-khittena, concisely, briefly. 
 SAN-GAHO, protecting. 
 SAN-GAMO, conflict, battle. 
 SAN-GHATi (t.t.), one of the three 
 
 robes of a priest. 
 SANGHO, the Buddliist clerical 
 
 community. 
 SACE (oonj.), if. 
 SACCAM, truth. 
 sacchlkai'oti, to see face to face ; 
 
 p. p. p. sacchikato. 
 SACCHIKIRIYA (f.), realization. 
 sancicca (adv. ger.), intentionally. 
 SAN J ATI (f.), birth. 
 sanriamo, refraining. 
 SANNA (t. t.) (f.), perception. 
 SATHO (adj.), wicked, crafty. 
 SATTHI (num.), sixty. 
 SANHO (adj.), soft; smooth, gentle. 
 SATAM (num.), a hundred. 
 SATI (f.), thoughtfulness, remem- 
 brance. 
 satimd (adj.) of retentive memory ; 
 
 thoughtful, reflecting. 
 Sato, p. p. p. sarati, recollecting, 
 
 mindful. 
 SATTA (num.), seven. 
 SATTATI, seventy. 
 sattavaso, abode of l)eings. 
 SATTO, being. 
 SATTHAM, weapon. 
 SATTHA (m.), teacher. 
 sad-attho, one's own advantage. 
 SADA (adv.), always. 
 SAD-DAHATI, to believe ; p. p. 
 
 saddahano. 
 
 SADDO, sound. 
 
 SADDHA, faith. 
 
 SADDHIM (adv.), with. 
 
 SANTAM (a term for Nibbana). 
 
 san-tatto, scorched. 
 
 san-tarati, to be in haste, 
 
 SANTIKE (adv.), in the presence of. 
 
 SANTUTTHi (f.), contentment. 
 
 SANTUSSAKO, contented. 
 
 SANTO, true, good. 
 
 san-dasseti (cans.), to show, to teach. 
 
 san-ditthiko (adj.), visible. 
 
 san-dhupayati, to smoke. 
 
 san-nayhati, to bind, to fasten. 
 
 san-ni-patati, to assemble. 
 
 «aww^y>a^^7lo(adj.), gathered together. 
 
 SAPADANAM (adv.), constantly ; 
 sap° piridaya carati, goes his 
 begging-rounds constantly. 
 
 SAPPI, cow's butter. 
 
 sap-puriso, good man. 
 
 sabbattha (adv.), everywhere. 
 
 sabbattho, in every respect. 
 
 sabba-d/ii, from all sides. 
 
 SABBO (pron. adj.), every one, all 
 (see Grammar). 
 
 SABHA (f.), an assembly. 
 
 samanako, wretched samana. 
 
 SAMANO, an ascetic. 
 
 SAMATTO (adj.), complete. 
 
 SAMATHO, tranquillity. 
 
 SAMANTO, all, entire ; samanta, 
 from every side. 
 
 samanniigafo, endowed with. 
 
 SAM AYO, time, assembly, agree- 
 ment; ckam samayam, once upon 
 a time. 
 
 sama-vekkhati, to take into con- 
 sideration.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 17/ 
 
 sam-a-gacchati, to assemble. 
 sam-tt-caratl, to follow. 
 nam-a-dapeti (cans, samudiyati), to 
 
 instigate, to advise. 
 sam-a-duhatl, to put together ; pass. 
 
 saiuadhlyati, to become tran- 
 
 quilized. 
 SAMADHI (f.) (t. t.), meditation. 
 SAMANO (adj.), equal, same, 
 
 similar. [ment. 
 
 SA3I-A-PATTI (f.) (t.t.), attaiii- 
 sam-u-hito, steadfast. 
 sam-ikkhati, to consider, to reflect. 
 SAM-ITI (f.), assembly. 
 sam-uk-kanisati, to exalt. 
 sam-ug-ghdto, removal. 
 s(im-vt-thanam, rising, origin ating-. 
 saw-^^^^^y<?^i (cans.), to stir, to excite. 
 SAM- UD- A YO, rise, origin. 
 sam tid-eti, to arise ; samudifo, ele- 
 vated. 
 SAMUDDO, sea. 
 sam-uiiahbiilho (p. p. p.), set up. 
 sam-uliantl, to remove. 
 SAMO, equal. 
 sain-pa-kampati, to tremble, to 
 
 shake ; a-sani-pa-kampiyo, that 
 
 cannot be shaken. 
 sam-pajano, conscious. 
 sam-patto (p.p.p.)> endowed with, 
 sam-pa-dhupayati, to smoke in 
 
 volumes. 
 sam-panno (p. p. p.), endowed with. 
 SAM-PA- YOGO, union, presence. 
 sani-parciyiko (adj.), relating to the 
 
 future. 
 SAM-PARAYO, future state, next 
 
 world. 
 sam-pa-vedhati, to tremble. 
 
 sam-pa-sadanaiii , making serene ; 
 franqnilization. 
 
 sam-passati, to behold, to discern. 
 
 sam-pa-ha7Hseti (caus.), to gladden, 
 to delight, to praise. 
 
 sampha-ppa-lapo, frivolous talk. 
 
 sam-pha.ssa-jo, arisiug from contact. 
 
 SAM-PHASSANAM (t.t.), contact. 
 
 sam-p/iasso, contact. 
 
 sam-bahulo (adj.), many. 
 
 sam-badho, pressure, straits. 
 
 SAM-BOJJHANGO (t. t), con- 
 stituent of bodhi. 
 
 sambhav-esi (adj.), seeking rebirth. 
 
 SAM-BHAVO, production. 
 
 sam-niannati, to agree to, to decide ; 
 to sanction. 
 
 SAM3IA (indccl.), fully, thorouglily 
 (used frequently in composition) ; 
 Samma sambudd/io, the All Wise. 
 
 sam-mukh'i-bhuto , confronted. 
 
 sam-niukho (adj.), face to face. 
 
 SAM-MUTI (f.), consent, choice, 
 determination. 
 
 sam-muyhati, to be stupefied ; p.p. p. 
 sammul/io, 
 
 sam-modati, to agree with ; saddhbh 
 s°, to exchange friendly greetings. 
 
 SAMVARi (f.), night. 
 
 sam-vaso, living with. 
 
 sam-viggo, excited. 
 
 SAYATI, to lie down. 
 
 SA YANAM (SENAM), lying, sleep- 
 ing ; bed, couch. 
 
 SARANAM, refuge. 
 SARABU (f.), a lizard. 
 
 sarito (p. p. p.), flowing. 
 
 SARIRAM, body. 
 SARO, sound. 
 
 12
 
 178 
 
 GLOSSARY, 
 
 SALAKA, a peg- ; slip, bit of wood. 
 sal-lahuko (adj.), liglit. 
 SALLiNO, bent together. 
 SAVANAM, hearing. 
 SASSU (f.), mother-in-law. 
 SAHA (in composition), together, 
 
 with. 
 saha-gato, accompanied. 
 sahasa (adv.), with violence. 
 SAlIASSi, thousiind (in composi- 
 tion). 
 SAHA (adv.), with. 
 sa/id-sJli (adj.), being fond of society. 
 SxIKACCHA (f.), conversation. 
 SADIIU (adv.), well, good. 
 SAXAIM, hempen cloth. 
 SAMlCl (f.), correctness. 
 SAYAXHO, evening. 
 SAVATI, to taste. 
 SARATHI, charioteer. 
 sarini'iyo (adj.), that which should 
 
 l)e remembered. 
 sa-ruppo (adj.), fit, proper. 
 SALI (m.), rice. 
 SALIKA (f.), the maynah-bird. 
 SAVAKO, a disciple. 
 sciveti (cans, to sutioti), to impart, 
 
 to inform. 
 SASANAM, order, command. 
 BuddJiaiP, the teaching of the 
 
 Buddha. 
 SASO, asthma. 
 SIKKHATI, to learn. 
 SIKHA (f.), peak, summit; aggi- 
 
 sikliii, flame of fire. 
 SIKKHAPADAM (t.t.), sentence of 
 
 moral training. 
 SINGHANIKA, mucus of the nose. 
 SITO (Slir. ^rita), resting upon. 
 
 SIPPAM, skill. 
 
 SIRIMSAPO, a snake. 
 
 siri-ma (^adj.), liaving magnificence, 
 
 glory. 
 SIRl (f.), fortune, prosperity. 
 SILA (f.), a rock. 
 SILOKO, a stanza, a (jloka. 
 SI VI K A (f.), a palanquin. 
 SI VO (adj.), auspicious, blest, happy. 
 SiMA (f.). boundary, limit. 
 SiTAM, coldness. 
 SiTO (adj.), cold, cool. 
 SILAM (t.t.), nature, character; 
 
 moral (character, piety. 
 SiLABBATAM (t.t.), afi'ection of 
 
 good rites. 
 sila-va (adj.), virtuous. 
 SILI (adj.), having a liabit, dispo- 
 sition ; niddd-s-, drowsy, slothful. 
 SiSAM, head. 
 SI HO, lion. 
 
 SU (in composition), well, good. 
 SUKO, a parrot. 
 SUKHO (adj.), blest, happy. 
 SUKHO, bliss. 
 SU-GATO, happy (epithet of the 
 
 Buddha). 
 su-gandho, of good smell. 
 su-ggahito (adj.), grasped. 
 SUCI (f.), purity. 
 su-cinno, well done. 
 SUNNAGARAJ^, solitude, place 
 
 void of houses. 
 SUNOTI, SUNATI, to hear (see 
 
 Grammar). 
 siito (p. p. p.), heard, renowned. 
 suda)h (part.), sma -f- idam. 
 su-dul-labho, very difficult to obtain. 
 SU-DHAMiMATO (t.t.), perfection.
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 179 
 
 SUDDHO (adj.), clean. 
 
 sti-pati-panno, well-conducted. 
 
 SUPATI, to sleep. 
 
 SUPINAM, sleep. [joined. 
 
 su-ppa-yutto (p. p. p.), thoroughly 
 
 su-bhavo, easily supported. 
 
 su-mano, satisfied. 
 
 su-mapito (adj.), well-built. 
 
 SURA (f.), intoxicating- liquor. 
 
 SURIYO, the sun. 
 
 su-vi-juno, easily known. 
 
 SUSU, a boy. 
 
 SUSS USA (f.), desire to hear. 
 
 SUJU (adj.), conscientious. 
 
 SULO, rheumatism. 
 
 SEM HAM, phlegm. 
 
 SEKHO (t. t.), one who is under 
 training. 
 
 SETTHO (adj.), best, foremost. 
 
 SEDO, sweat, moisture. 
 
 SENA (f.), army. 
 
 SEX-ASANAM, [sleeping and sit- 
 ting] dwelling. 
 
 seyyako (adj.), lying, sleeping. 
 
 SEVATI, to serve, to follow. 
 
 SEVANA (f.), addicted to, devotion 
 to ; A-sevand, not addicted to. 
 
 SO (pron.), this (see Grammar). 
 
 SO (adj.), own ; saih (adv.) by 
 oneself. 
 
 SOKO, sorrow, grief. 
 
 SOCATI, to grieve. 
 
 socanattam, mourning. 
 
 SOCANAM, mourning. 
 
 SONDO (adj.), addicted to drink ; 
 fem. SOND!. 
 
 SOTAM, ear. [tion. 
 
 SOTAPATTI (f.), (t. t.), sanctifica- 
 SOTTHANAM, blessing. 
 SOBHATI, to shine. 
 SORACCAxVl, tenderness. 
 sovacassatd (f.), pleasant speech. 
 SOSO, consumption. 
 sv-alckhdto, well told. 
 
 H. 
 
 HA (interj.), truly. 
 
 HATTHI (m.), elephant. 
 
 HATTHO (p. p. p.), bristling. 
 
 HATTHO, hand. 
 
 HAD A YAM, heart. 
 
 HANTI, to kill. 
 
 HANDA (interj.), come on! 
 
 HAMMIYAM, house surrounded 
 
 by walls. 
 HARATI, to carry away. 
 HARI (adj.), green. 
 HARITAM, grass. 
 har'itattam, greenness, yellowness. 
 HAVE (interj.), truly. 
 HI (part.), for, because ; certainly, 
 
 indeed ; also. 
 HIMSATI, to hurt. 
 HIRANNAM, gold. 
 HIRI, modesty, shame. 
 HITO (p. p. p. and adj.), beneficial. 
 hmo (p. p. p.), wasted, decayed. 
 HETHETI, to injure. 
 HETTHIMO (adj.), lower, lowest. 
 HETU (adv.), on account of, by 
 
 means of. 
 HOTI, to be ; see bhavati.
 
 HEBTFORD: 
 
 PRINTED BY STEPHEN AISTIS AND SONS.
 
 SlNHAh^S:K ALFMABET. 
 
 Vowels 
 
 <^ a^ a. ^ i U \ Qy VI. (^ ti A e cD o. 
 Vowel Symbols. 
 
 0.- ^. ^ . ^. J- (^. ^ 0. 
 
 ^ ka. Z3S^ha B)ki h hi aiJku. rj\Jku<S^ke. St3ilh. 
 
 "^kha. ^ khu. 
 
 JVaSAL VOVIELS. 
 
 The symhol is c? . CPo am. . It is also used 
 fir any nasal 1/efore anclher consonant 
 
 ^50 (^ha CD yia 
 
 ^J:)jha 05^ na 
 
 CJ dha "25) na 
 
 &) Vka "£) ma 
 ^ va 
 
 Consonants. 
 
 
 ?;3 ka. 
 
 ^ . kka 
 
 00 ^a. 
 
 O ca 
 
 ^cha 
 
 ^ja 
 
 la 
 
 CB tha 
 
 Z^ dxi 
 
 tS) la 
 
 (3 tha 
 
 C/ da 
 
 ^ pa 
 
 tB -pha 
 
 'q) Va 
 
 60 ya 
 
 O ra 
 
 QW ^ 
 
 tx!) sa 
 
 to ha 
 
 c^- 
 
 Consonant Symbols 
 
 
 
 15 y. 
 
 'o)i3 h-ya 
 
 Virama ' 
 
 ^ hra 
 
 H k. 
 
 Compound 
 
 Consonants. 
 
 "S- 
 
 nv. 
 
 QC^ nga (x) rica (O 'nja (XD nda (C^ tlha 
 (SD ddha. ^ oca. oJd V-V-a C^ 'mha. 
 
 26U) kkha. 2^^ 7)?i« V^ ttha ^^ 'ndha
 
 BVRMESE AlVHABET. 
 
 6^' e 
 
 ^^ 0. 
 
 
 Vowels, __ 
 
 ^0^^^ XOorl.. ^ ^ 
 
 SYMBOLS.^ (j )L) 
 
 Cnka,. COoka. cSki. cSkT. cnku. op ku. ccokcGVooh). 
 o) ga go] go. 
 
 NfiSflL Vowels. The symhcl for th-t nasod v^oiv-els is " 
 3^ cLwc . ]t is also TAScJ to evcprcss any nasal h&foro 
 another censcnant. 
 
 Simple Consonants. 
 CO ka O hha 
 
 O.® ca 
 C la 
 OO ta 
 U ]oa 
 UO ya 
 OO sa 
 
 QO cha 
 C tha 
 OO Iha 
 
 (J pha 
 
 n. 5] ra 
 
 OO ka 
 
 Consonant Symbols. 
 C ria . ^ ^ 
 
 \ ^« C 
 
 J 
 
 ra 
 
 O OAa 
 
 O ^a ZX) gha 
 
 O j^ Cy jha 
 
 D da S) <i^ct 
 
 3 da Q dha 
 
 O ha OO hha 
 
 CO l<^ O v<^ 
 
 <A - 
 OO nka 
 
 OJU yya ^ khya 
 
 fcTj kra fo hra. 
 
 CO iv^a 
 
 on nhcL Q mha. 
 
 Virdma ^ o5 I 
 
 C ria 
 OD na 
 an na 
 ^ -na 
 O ma 
 
 Compound Consonants. 
 
 00 kkha $L ccha C ^i^/ia 9^ ddha 
 
 OOO u<ia OD JJ^a c3 ddha ^ -w-no/ 
 
 Cy ;9^a O jopha C=) ?nrn<z DO CO 
 
 O 
 
 
 .yr^A fct 
 
 J«/3
 
 KAMBOBIAN ALPHABET. 
 
 Vowels. 
 
 %^ a. W^^. sTi. 
 
 U 
 
 
 Vowel Symbols. 
 
 <i> 
 
 <^.- 
 
 
 ^ ;fa. et^ka <^ U n ki. ^ku. ^ ku. <;^ke. <^^ h. 
 
 N/\SAL Vowels. The symV-ol ^ is added to the simple 
 v-ow-el: ^ a/m . It is also used as a nasal Vefcre 
 ctnolker consonant. 
 
 Simple 
 
 Consonants 
 
 
 
 ^ ka 
 
 O kha 
 
 O ga 
 
 1±$ gha 
 
 •O ^na 
 
 Cj ca 
 
 $3 cha 
 
 t ja 
 
 f^JJjka 
 
 
 €^ ta 
 
 ^ tha 
 
 ^ ^^ 
 
 W dhu 
 
 (f^ na 
 
 ^ ta 
 
 £j? thu 
 
 e. da 
 
 Z^d dha 
 
 ^^ ncv 
 
 ZS pa 
 
 r 
 
 X^ pha 
 
 (n u 
 
 ?^ Vka 
 
 %=$ Tna 
 
 iXS^CL 
 
 T ra 
 
 ^ u 
 
 ^ v^a 
 
 
 ^ sa 
 
 if^ kcL 
 
 §J la 
 
 
 
 Compound Consonants 
 
 tSymUl for rou ] )0 Ira \^y ndra 
 
 )} „ gemination ^ ^2^Vssa £.5T ppa 
 
 /V^ nda ?^ ttha ^ tw %> ddha ^ ^t^a 
 
 ^rto^ 
 
 IJ' rnba. 
 
 isn
 
 I 
 
 i 
 nJ 
 
 D 
 
 < 
 
 E 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 ^ 
 
 r
 
 
 
 
 11/ 
 
 t^ 
 
 a 
 
 <o 
 
 c 
 
 r 
 
 n 
 
 V 
 
 u 
 
 ' 
 
 « 
 
 J. 
 
 A 
 
 
 r 
 
 VI 1 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 dU 
 
 
 -u 
 
 o 
 
 V 
 
 rv 
 
 
 03 
 
 a 
 
 n 
 
 n3 
 
 G 
 
 E 
 
 ID 
 
 ii 
 
 »°! 
 
 L3 
 
 R 
 
 S 
 
 R 
 
 ^ 
 
 □□ 
 
 03 
 
 En 
 
 S 
 
 □ p 
 
 U 
 
 u □ 
 
 33 
 
 y 
 
 -UJ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 EH 
 
 a 
 
 23 
 
 aa 
 
 5 
 
 no 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 oj 
 
 C 
 
 O 
 
 32 
 
 Oi 
 
 n 
 
 e 
 
 \ 
 
 s 
 
 ? 
 
 £; 
 
 on 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 ? 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 « 
 
 (JJ 
 
 n 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 oo 
 
 oo 
 
 S 
 
 « 
 
 Q 
 
 ?5 
 
 23LS 
 
 ^ 
 
 C^ 
 
 s? 
 
 i. 
 
 e55 
 
 ^^ 
 
 €^' 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 (?3S- 
 
 ix^ 
 
 S^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 SS' 
 
 ^ 
 
 §5 
 
 S:^ 
 
 O ?3 
 
 i^ 
 
 e« 
 
 5 
 
 Ii5 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 $? 
 
 fe» 
 
 S) 
 
 C50 
 
 OO 
 
 © 
 
 £) 
 
 d' 
 
 Z3" 
 
 rSJ 
 
 c^b 
 
 Cb 
 
 © 
 
 £A 
 
 /6^: 
 
 ^ 
 
 C3 ^ 
 
 a) 
 
 25) 
 
 O 
 
 £3 
 
 ^ &) 
 
 s 
 
 03 
 
 ^ 
 
 e 
 
 -D 
 
 CO 
 
 so 
 
 C 
 
 ?r 
 
 ?7 
 
 T 
 
 tl 
 
 ^ 
 
 =? 
 
 ^ 
 
 5| 
 
 m7 
 
 ^ 7 
 
 3- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 "S'l JUT 
 
 n 
 
 ! 
 
 V 
 
 "7 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ^ >T 
 
 T 
 
 u 
 
 T 
 
 5T 
 
 ^ ^FT 
 
 ■^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 /OIVfL.T 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 u 
 
 M. 
 
 C. 
 
 
 
 
 /IcoK/i's /nscKifr/o/vs 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 1. 
 
 (> 
 
 ■H- 
 
 S^V/ll>£ PttLI 
 
 33 
 
 sn 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 a 
 
 SI 
 
 Q 
 
 t'l^ 
 
 
 Burmese. 
 
 3j 
 
 3:>o 
 
 Kl 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 § 
 
 G 
 
 s 
 
 
 KtlMBODIMN. 
 
 M 
 
 f4^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^-i 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^1 
 
 Oi 
 
 h 
 
 
 Sinhalese. 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^ 
 
 § 
 
 a 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 6 
 
 SD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nachki 
 
 
 
 
 5T 
 
 ?aT 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 ■^^ 
 
 •3i 
 
 ? 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fl
 
 University of California 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 ^ "^^^2 5 1999
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 SADUN'S 
 
 Books iNCERY 
 
 75 Berkeley St. 
 
 Boston, Mass.